Ghosts captured in photographs

I’m going to go further with paranormal, negative forces and ghosts and here something more about ghosts:

ghost-rider-fire-burn

Ghosts captured in photographs

The ghosts (demons, devils, negative energies, etc.) exist in the subtle-dimension, that is, beyond the understanding of the five senses, mind and intellect. That is why they are not ‘seen’, ‘felt’ or ‘understood’ by most.

Photographic film can capture only something that is gross and dense. Among the five Absolute Cosmic Principles (Panchatattva) ghosts belong to the absolute Air Cosmic Air Principle (Vāyutattva). As a result, it is not possible to capture ghosts in their natural form on photographic film. However on some rare occasions when a ghost materialises it can be captured on film.

The reasons ghosts materialise are:

  • They want to perform some activity like a prank.
  • Just plain attention seeking.
  • To intimidate.

 

While they are made up of the absolute Air Principle, they materialise only when acting in conjunction with the Absolute Earth Principle (Pruthvītattva) and/or any of the other Cosmic Principles. Depending on the Principles they act through, the materialisation happens in various ways. The following picture shows the various combinations and their typical result.

Ghost photo - Mechanism behind materialisation of ghosts in photographs

Note: In all cases, in order to materialise, both the Absolute Earth Principle and its associated Tama subtle-component have to be present. Refer to the article on – What is the Tama basic component? Also refer to Why is there a protective border around the above picture?

  • When ghosts materialise while acting only through the Absolute Earth Principle their density increases and they are better perceived by the plain eye or the photographic lens. The photographs of apparitions which appear as a black shadowy presence are typical of materialisation acting through the Absolute Earth Principle.
  • If they materialise by acting through the Absolute Water Principle (Āpatattva) (along with the Absolute Earth Principle) they become visible in a flowing form. An example of this type of materialisation is ectoplasm, a vortex or an apparition which is whitish in colour.
  • If they materialise by acting through the Absolute Fire Principle (Tējtattva) (along with the Absolute Earth Principle) they appear as glowing objects, e.g. like orbs.
  • If they materialise by acting through the Absolute Air Principle (along with the Absolute Earth Principle) they appear in a very flowing form.
  • If they materialise into the Absolute Ether Principle (Ākāshtattva) (along with the Absolute Earth Principle) they appear as fog or mist.

The various ways ghosts materialise

The following are drawings based on subtle-knowledge of ghosts (demons, devils, negative energies etc.) seen and drawn by Ms. Anjali Gadgil, a seeker of SSRF having a highly developed sixth sense. They provide a comprehensive view of all the various ways ghosts (demons, devils, negative energies, etc.) can materialise when they do not take a specific form such as a human etc. These forms are subject to one of the five Absolute Cosmic Principles they are predominantly materialising in.

In some cases they are also captured in the same form on photographs. These drawings based on subtle-knowledge will give one an understanding of the Spiritual science behind the various shapes and forms one sometimes sees disfiguring pictures taken with a camera.

Earth

(Click on any one of the drawings based on subtle-knowledge below for more details)

Ghost photo - Earth element - Meshwork of black threads Ghost photo - Earth element - Meshwork of black threads - 2 Ghost photo - Earth element - Black frequencies, threads, masses - 1

Ghost photo - Earth element - Black frequencies, threads, masses - 2 Ghost photo - Earth element - Bursting materialisation Ghost photo - Earth element - Black threads

Ghost photo - Earth element - Circular motion Ghost photo - Earth element - sharp  Ghost photo - Earth element - Mass

Ghost photo - Earth element - Black current crossing each other

Water

(Click on any one of the drawings based on subtle-knowledge below for more details)

Ghost photo - Water element - Flowing 1  Ghost photo - Water element - Flowing 2  Ghost photo - Water element - Flowing 3

Ghost photo - Water element - Flowing 4  Ghost photo - Water element - Flowing 5  Ghost photo - Water element - Flowing 6

Fire

(Click on any one of the drawings based on subtle-knowledge below for more details)

Ghost photo - Fire element - Shining mass  Ghost photo - Fire element - Shining  Ghost photo - Fire element - shining border

Ghost photo - Fire element - Sparks flying from all side  Ghost photo - Fire element - Circular motion sparks  Ghost photo - Fire element - Flames

Ghost photo - Fire element - Star  Ghost photo - Fire element - Flower like shining mass  Ghost photo - Fire element - Spring like whirls

Air

(Click on any one of the drawings based on subtle-knowledge below for more details)

Ghost photo - Air element - Pyramid like spiral coils   Ghost photo - Air element - Rings  Ghost photo - Air element - Flowing 1

Ghost photo - Air element - Flowing mist/fog  Ghost photo - Air element - Flowing 2  Ghost photo - Air element - Flowing 3

Ghost photo - Air element - Flowing 4  Ghost photo - Air element - Non-flowing like hanging masses  Ghost photo - Air element - Non-flowing white layer fog/mist

Ether

(Click on any one of the drawings based on subtle-knowledge below for more details)

Ghost photo - Ether element - Particles  Ghost photo - Ether element - White flowing particles  Ghost photo - Ether element - White shining flowing particles

Ghost photo - Ether element - Absolute air and absolute ether element  Ghost photo - Ether element - Transparent echoing distressing sound

Source

What are ghosts and how does a person become one?

Ghosts have fascinated me all of my life and all paranormal and here is pretty good info about how ghosts emerge and such:

What are ghosts and how does a person become one?

 

OLYMPUS DIGITAL CAMERA

1. What are ghosts?

When a person dies only his gross body (sthūladēha) ceases to exist. His subtle-body (consisting of the subconscious mind, intellect, ego and soul, i.e. minus the physical body) however continues to exist and moves on to the other regions of the universe. Refer to the picture below for more detailed view of what we are comprised of and what we leave behind after death.

What are ghosts - What are we comprised of?

What are ghosts - Human subtle body after death

Some of these subtle-bodies become ghosts. Ghosts by definition meet all of the following criteria:

  • They are subtle-bodies.
  • They belong to the Nether region (Bhuvarlok) or one of the seven regions of Hell (Pātāl) but they are found on Earth region (Bhūlok) too. This is because ghosts from the more subtle-regions of the universe can travel to the more gross ones like Earth at will.

The entire universe is made up of fourteen regions or planes (lokas) of existence, comprising seven positive and seven negative planes. Earth is the only physical plane while all the other planes are subtle in nature. Heaven is just one of the positive planes we can go after death.

  • They do not exist in the positive planes of the universe i.e. Heaven (Swarga) and above.
  • They have unfulfilled desires such as cravings for sex, alcohol (things that they can only experience through a gross body), revenge etc.
  • They derive pleasure out of exerting control over and tormenting humans and other subtle-bodies. Their general aim is aligned with bringing about unrighteousness in society.

The subtle-body of a person after physical death is defined as a ghost if their characteristics and intentions match the above. There is no special process as such which they go through to become a ghost.

What are ghosts - Ghost subtle body

2. What decides where we go and what we become after death?

When we die, our course in the after-life is decided by a number of factors. These factors include:

  • The number and type of impressions that are created in the sub-conscious mind depending on how we have lived our lives. Refer to the article on the impressions in our mind that decides our basic nature and personality.
  • Our ego: The word ‘ego’ is used in a spiritual context here. In addition to its everyday usage as self esteem and self conceit, it also includes the attitude of duality with God. Duality means thinking of oneself as having an existence separate from God. Ego is a function of the extent to which we identify with our 5 senses, mind and intellect instead of identifying with the soul or the God within us.
  • The type of deeds done during our life-time.
  • The extent and the type of spiritual practice we had undertaken during our lifetime.
  • Our Destiny
  • The type of death – natural and peaceful, violent or accidental.
  • The type of funeral.
  • The rituals as per Spiritual science done by our descendants after our death to help us in our after life.

3. Who are likely to become ghosts?

People are likely to become ghosts after their death when

  • They have many unfulfilled desires.
  • Many personality defects, such as anger, fear, greed, etc.
  • A lot of negative impressions in the mind.
  • A high amount of ego.
  • They have harmed others and have the basic nature of harming others.
  • They lack spiritual practice consisting of progressive level of surrender of mind body and intellect, done with the intention of God-realisation.

Samashti spiritual level refers to the spiritual level attained through spiritual practice for the sake of society (samashti sādhanā), while vyashti spiritual practice refers to the spiritual level attained through individual spiritual practice (vyashti sādhanā). In the current times, spiritual progress for the sake of society has 70% importance while individual spiritual practice has 30% importance.

Only people who have reached the 50% (samashṭi) or 60% (vyashṭi) spiritual level and have low ego are able to proceed to the higher regions of Heaven and beyond and do not become ghosts. The rest of humanity, when they die, finds themselves in the regions of the Nether world and Hell. Most subtle-bodies in the Nether region are highly likely to become ghosts. All subtle-bodies in Hell are ghosts.

In fact, even if one is a gentleman but doesn’t have enough spiritual strength through spiritual practice, he is liable to become a ghost when he dies. This is because he is attacked by higher level ghosts and is controlled by them. Just as on Earth, in the other regions of the universe also, ‘might is right’ and only the strongest survive. Ghosts (demons, devils, negative energies, etc.) of a higher level, with their high spiritual strength, make the subtle-bodies of ‘gentlemen’ of lower spiritual strength, do things against their will and thus indirectly make them ghosts. Over a period of time, the subtle-body of the ‘gentleman’ too succumbs and becomes a ghost deriving pleasure through tormenting humans or fulfilling their worldly desires by possessing humans.

The moral here is that, if we do not undertake spiritual practice according to the universal six basic principles of Spirituality and do not reduce our ego, then the probability of us becoming ghosts, after our death is very high.

4. Who do not become ghosts?

They are typically people who:

  • Do spiritual practice with the intention of achieving God-realisation (the ultimate in spiritual growth).
  • Have less impressions in the mind, fewer personality defects, etc.
  • Have a low ego.
  • Are above the 50% ( samashti) or 60% ( vyashti) spiritual level.

When such persons die they move on to the higher regions, i.e. Heaven and beyond. Ghosts cannot influence or take them into custody due to their spiritual strength and protection from God.

5. Spiritual level and ghosts

Throughout the section on ghosts, we refer to higher level ghosts who have a lot of spiritual energy as a result of intense spiritual practice and penance. As a result, they have a high spiritual level and a lot of spiritual power. This may seem contradictory as one may ask, “How can one become a ghost when one has a high spiritual level?” The spiritual power of a Saint at the 70% spiritual level and a superior ghost such as a subtle-sorcerer (māntrik) from the 5th region of Hell may be the same. However, the key differences between them are:

  • The Saint does spiritual practice with the intention of surrendering his body, mind, wealth, ego, etc. to God so as to merge with Him.
  • The superior ghost or a person with high spiritual power (who after death becomes a ghost) does spiritual practice with the intention of gaining supernatural powers so as to play ‘God’ and thus has a lot of ego.

The Saint would identify more with the God principle or the soul within. The subtle-sorcerer on the other hand is very proud of the fact that he has the spiritual strength and identifies with his ego i.e. the 5 senses, mind and intellect.

Source

Life, death and afterlife

I found this great website with tons of information and I will be posting some of it in my posts. Let’s start with the topic of life, death and the afterlife:

life-after-life

Every now and again, we hear the clichéd question, ‘What is the meaning of life?’ or ‘What is the purpose of life?’ or ‘Why are we born?’. In most cases, we have our own agenda on what our purpose in life is. However from a spiritual perspective, there are two generic reasons why we are born. These reasons include to complete the give-and-take account we have with various people and to make spiritual progress with the final aim of merging into God. Once we merge with God we come out of the cycle of birth and death. But what happens after death if we remain in this cycle? Is there an afterlife? The innumerable recorded and researched cases of past life experiences clearly point to life after death. In all the recorded cases of reincarnations, it was found that there was a variable time lag between the death of the person and his next reincarnation on Earth. So, where do we go after death till our reincarnation on Earth? Is it a single plane of existence or are there a variety of planes of existence? If so, what are the factors that decide where we go after death? In the following articles, we present the answers to these and other questions about this topic. These answers are obtained through spiritual research done by seekers of the Spiritual Science Research Foundation (SSRF) with highly developed sixth sense (ESP).

Introductory articles to life, death, and the afterlife

Life before birth: the time before conception

After we die on Earth, we (i.e. our respective subtle bodies) go to one of the various subtle regions of the Universe depending on our spiritual level and merits and demerits.

Life before Birth: The time in the womb

A person’s designated life on Earth starts at the time of conception. This is in accordance with his destiny.

What happens after death?

Time of death

All of us have to die at some point and this is decided as per our destiny. There are some pre-destined time periods in our lives in which death can occur as per our destiny.

Where do we go after death

Where do we go after death until our reincarnation on Earth? Is it a single plane of existence or are there a variety of planes of existence?

What is the Region of the Dead?

Immediately after we die, we all go through an interim region in the Universe which is known as the Region of the Dead. In this region, the subtle-body gets accustomed to its new state without a gross body.

Can we meet our ancestors and loved ones in the afterlife?

Almost all of us have at some time wondered if we can meet our departed ancestors and loved ones when we leave this Earth at the time of death. The purpose of this article is to explain the factors and principles governing who we can meet and who we cannot in the afterlife.

A spiritual perspective on ’going towards the light’

This article explains why we commonly hear the phrase of ‘going towards the light’ and what actually happens at a spiritual level.

Why would the deceased require help in the afterlife?

What happens after the death of a person that causes him to need help?

After death the subtle-body becomes heavy due to sins and excessive ego and as a result gets stuck in lower subtle-planes of existence such as the Nether region. If the sins are intense then the subtle-body goes to Hell.

How can we help our ancestors in the after-life?

When family members die, we pay tribute to their lives by offering flowers at their grave, by publishing kind words about them in their memory in the obituary section of a newspaper or hanging the photograph of the deceased in one’s house. However, all these have no significance in helping our ancestors in the afterlife.

Disposing belongings of the deceased

After a loved one dies, many people are unsure what they should do with their belongings. This article provides a guide to the surviving relatives.

Other articles on life, death, and the afterlife

Colour of clothes to wear in a funeral

From a spiritual perspective what is the best colour of clothes to wear to a funeral? From a spiritual perspective, any sober colour other than black can be worn by relatives and well-wishers in the event of the death of a person.

What is the effect of keeping objects in the coffin?

The favourite objects of the dead person kept in the coffin are attacked by ghosts in the same way as the corpse is attacked. This includes even dressing up the dead body in their favourite clothes. The subtle sorcerers can use these objects to do black magic.

What is the effect of kissing the hand or forehead of the dead body?

Losing a loved one is a traumatic experience for anyone. Sometimes people who are emotionally upset, hug and kiss the body of the deceased. This may however be harmful for both the person and the subtle-body of the deceased

Spiritual perspective on funeral etiquette at a funeral reception

It is common funeral etiquette in today’s world to have a funeral reception. From a Spiritual science perspective, this can be highly detrimental for the people involved as well as for the subtle-body of the deceased. But as it is not always possible to avoid attending a funeral reception, this article provides information on what to do or not to do.

Planning one’s wedding after the death of a close relative such as one’s parents

For those who are in a quandary about wedding plans due to the sudden death of a close relative such as one’s father or mother, this article provides spiritual perspectives to keep in mind.

Source

Basic principles of spiritual practice

Now some info how we can prevent the intensity of Armageddon:

Basic principles of spiritual practice

How can we ensure rapid spiritual progress towards achieving Bliss?

Spiritual principles

Rapid spiritual progress can be achieved when we do spiritual practice according to the basic principles of Spirituality. Even though there are many different types of spiritual practice, whether our spiritual practice adheres to the basic principles of Spirituality is a true litmus test for its effectiveness. If not, we run the risk of putting in a lot of effort but not seeing the results that match that effort.

The six basic principles of spiritual practice are:

1. There are as many paths to God as there are people

 

 

 

When undertaking spiritual practice it is important to bear in mind that each individual is different and so what works for one person may not work for another. When climbing a mountain each climber thinks his way is the only way. But when he reaches the top of the mountain, he realizes that there were an infinite number of ways that could have taken him to the top. Likewise there are as many paths to God as there are people.

If five patients were to go to a doctor and each was suffering from a different ailment, then giving all five the same medicine would not result in each of them being cured. So also each of us are different and hence the same spiritual practice cannot be recommended for all. In a spiritual context each of us is unique across the following parameters.

2. Go from many to one

The impact of our efforts is much more powerful when we concentrate our efforts on the one, instead of the many.

Which is more effective?

  • Digging one well to access water which is 10 meters deep or digging 10 wells of 1 meter each.

  • Accruing frequent flyer miles from various airlines or sticking to just one airline.

The following is how this principle works depending on the various generic paths to God.

Path of Action (Karmayoga): In the initial stage, a seeker gives alms to several beggars. In the next stage, he focuses his efforts on a single cause such as a donation to a school or a hospital.

Path of Knowledge (Dnyānyoga): After studying various spiritual texts from new age philosophy to religious texts, a seeker finally turns to a single one that has the most percentage of spiritual truth in it.

Path of Devotion (Bhaktiyoga): A seeker progresses from worship of several Deities to that of one, goes to one place of pilgrimage rather than to many, reads one book of Holy verses rather than many.

Path of Chanting the Name of God (Namsankirtanyoga): Here, the seeker chants the Name of only one Deity instead of many.

Path of Guru’s Grace (Gurukrupāyoga): After visiting several Saints, a seeker finally visits only one Guru. Irrespective of the path of Spirituality one follows, spiritual progress does not really occur beyond a certain level without the grace of a Guru.

 

3. Progressing from gross (tangible) to subtle (intangible)

This principle states that we need to improve upon our spiritual practice by going from just physical actions, to a practice at a more subtle level.

A subtle spiritual practice is more powerful than a gross one. Take for example, a relationship where two people shake hands in friendship, while in reality, they may not like each other. The physical display of friendship is merely a façade. On the other hand, two people may feel genuine goodwill towards each other even though there may be no physical contact.

Likewise, when it comes to practicing Spirituality, going through the motions of external ritualistic worship (physical level) with no devotion needs to be replaced by having real inner devotion for God, or intense desire for spiritual growth.

4. Undertaking spiritual practice as per the spiritual level or spiritual capacity

We must check that the spiritual practice we choose is as per our spiritual capacity or spiritual level. A student, who has passed grade 3, will not be able to sit for the grade 4 exams if he has been continually studying only the grade 3 syllabus.

So too spiritual seekers should try to improve their capacity to do spiritual practice so as to not get stuck at one level of spiritual practice.

Let us go through the various stages of development from more gross forms of worship to more subtle forms as per the level of the seeker:

  1. At an initial level we feel that we can make contact with the Divine only by going to a place of worship and through praying to a statue of God or a Divine Being.
  2. Next we feel a connection with the Divine not just through rituals but through reading spiritual books whilst sitting in the place of worship.
  3. In the next stage we feel that even words are too gross, and just experiencing the vibrations in a church or temple are enough to spiritually nourish a person.
  4. After this we do not need to even go to a place of worship, but can experience God in the beauty of Nature; high up in the mountains, at a serene lake, etc.
  5. At an even higher level, we do not need nature anymore but can experience God in daily living. Even if we are in an unpleasant place such as a filthy slum or in the middle of a war zone, we can perceive the comforting blanket of God’s presence, and can worship Him there in the quiet presence of our hearts.

 

5. Doing spiritual practice relevant to the times

In all things in life there is a time for them to happen. If the right thing happens at the wrong time then the desired result is not achieved. For example, if seeds are sown in the dry months instead of the rainy season, they do not take root no matter how fertile the land is. Similarly, certain spiritual practices are conducive according to the time or era.

Spiritual practice and levels in the different Eras

Satyayug: This was a very pure era when the average spiritual level of a person was 70% (this is the level of a Saint). These people were so pure spiritually that the Path of Knowledge was best suited to them as they had the potential to spontaneously understand the implied meanings of all spiritual scriptures.

Trētāyug: This was the era when the spiritual level of the average person dropped to 55% and so they lost their potential to follow the Path of Knowledge. But they were spiritually capable enough to undertake penance (the kind that allowed a seeker stand on one foot for 12 years) and meditation (the kind that made a seeker meditate long enough for an ant hill to grow all over him).

Dwāparyug: There was a further decline in spiritual levels and people lost their potential for rigorous penance and sustained meditation. So it was divinely ordained such that they would be able to make progress through ritualistic worship. These rituals and sacrificial fires (yadnyas) were very time consuming and laborious as they had to be done after searching for the right ingredients. Along with this there were numerous steps which had to be followed to the last detail. But people were religious-minded enough to spend the time, effort and money to do them.

Kaliyug: This is translated as the ‘Era of strife’ and is the current period. The average person’s spiritual level has dropped to only 20%. Our capacity to do any of the above spiritual practices has greatly reduced. But considering the turbulent times we live in and the extent of the spiritual pollution – God has made a simple provision for us to still grow spiritually. All He wants of us to do as spiritual practice, is repeat His Name.

 

6. Offering to God as per your talent or capacity

All of us have some kind of resources at our disposal. These have been given to us by God. A basic principle in spiritual practice is that we use these same resources to serve Him as part of our spiritual practice and grow spiritually. The resources we have fall broadly into four categories:

1. Our body

2. Our wealth and worldly connections

3. Our mind and intellect

4. Our sixth sense

Let’s look at these four aspects in a little more detail:

 

1. Our body

6th basic principle of spiritual practice Serving by our body’ means using our body to serve God. For example:
  • Cleaning a venue and getting it ready for a lecture on Spirituality
  • Driving seekers to the venue
  • Putting up posters to advertise a lecture on Spirituality

 

2. Our wealth and worldly connections

6th basic principle of spiritual practice An example of serving God by offering our wealth and worldly connections respectively would be:

  • Paying for the venue where a spiritual discourse is to be conducted
  • Arranging for a lecture on Spirituality at an institute which one is associated with

 

3. Our mind and intellect

6th basic principle of spiritual practice Using our mind and intellect is about using our creative and intellectual processes to serve God. Examples of this would include:

  • Using our intellect to study Spirituality, put it into practice and then tell others about it
  • Using our writing skills to spread Spirituality by writing articles on Spirituality
  • Helping in the maintaining of records and administration of an event

 

4. Our sixth sense

6th basic principle of spiritual practice Some of us have been gifted with sixth sense from an early age. This is due to spiritual practice from either a previous birth or from this birth. The onus is on us to use it only to facilitate spiritual growth in us and others. The use of our sixth sense needs to be under the guidance of a Spiritual Master.

 

In summary, the following points can be kept in mind:

  • By consistently offering what we have to serve God as part of our spiritual practice, we grow spiritually.
  • Even if one does not have wealth or a high intellect he can still offer his body in service to God and thereby grow spiritually.
  • The four types of offerings mentioned above are not mutually exclusive. If a person has a good intellect and a strong understanding of Spirituality he may be inclined just to offer his intellect. However the principle is about ‘offering all what one has’. As the person has a body and also may have some wealth, he should offer that along with his intellect.
  • Out of all offerings, the mind and intellect is the most superior as through that medium one can help others understand and practice Spirituality.

Source

Battle of Armageddon for establishment of the era of rekindling Spirituality in mankind

This is very important information to us all:

Battle of Armageddon for establishment of the era of rekindling Spirituality in mankind

Definition of Armageddon: A subtle-battle of catastrophic proportions between good and evil at the end of an era.

Abstract:

Unknown to most of us, the world is in the midst of a subtle-battle of good versus evil also known as Armageddon. It is being fought mostly in the subtle-dimension in all the regions of the universe including the Earth region (Bhūlok). The fraction of this battle that will play out in the physical plane will have catastrophic consequences for us. There is a possibility of reducing the effect of this Armageddon on humankind if we undertake spiritual practice, which is according to the six basic principles of spiritual practice.

Note: To understand this article it is recommended that you read the following articles:

1. Sattva, Raja and Tama, the three subtle basic components that make up the universe
2. Battle of good versus evil

This article has been updated as of 30 Jun 2013.

1. Introduction to the battle of Armageddon and World war 3

The world has been experiencing an increasing trend of natural disasters, terrorist activities, war and political upheavals over the recent past. There is no respite to this trend or any signs of slowing down. Quite a number of us may feel a sense of helplessness as we see our world lurch forward uncontrollably towards even tougher times. A number of seers such as Nostradamus, Edgar Cayce etc. have predicted turbulent and distressing times of cataclysmic proportions. There has also been much talk about a battle between the forces of good and evil that will play out around the times we live in.

We conducted spiritual research to explore the events in the subtle-dimension behind these alarming trends and what lies ahead for us.

The purpose of this article is to provide information uncovered through spiritual research about:

The SSRF defines the word ‘subtle world’ or ‘subtle dimension’ as the world which is beyond the understanding of the five senses, mind and intellect. The subtle world refers to the unseen world of angels, ghosts, heaven, etc. which can only be perceived through our sixth sense.

  • The spiritual forces at work that are orchestrating worldwide events and the times to come.
  • Measures that can be taken by humanity to minimise the impact of these events.

To some of us due to lack of any understanding about the spiritual realm, this article may seem fictional or almost like a fairy-tale. We have tried to be as objective as possible in narrating what we have perceived through an advanced sixth sense. It is also not our intention to alarm society, but to alert and caution it. It is our plea to society to take the time to understand this article and commence their spiritual practice.

These facts have been obtained from the Universal Mind and Intellect through the medium of the highly activated sixth sense of Mrs Anjali Gadgil, seeker of the Spiritual Science Research Foundation (SSRF). The information has been checked by H.H. Dr Athavale for accuracy. Along with this article, we recommend that you also read the article on the ‘Battle of good versus evil’.

2. What is a subtle battle?

Forces of good and evil have existed since the beginning of the universe. These forces exist mainly in the subtle-regions of the universe and influence the positive and negative forces on Earth almost completely. From time to time the subtle-forces of evil gain enough spiritual energy to attempt to establish a demonic kingdom in the universe. In current times, the balance of power between the forces of good and evil is 70% and 30% respectively. However the forces of evil in the universe have once again derived enough spiritual energy to attempt to establish a demonic kingdom. The fight that ensues is known as a subtle-battle or an Armageddon and its effects are being felt through all the regions of the universe. This battle began to erupt in the subtle in 1999 and a fraction of the battle will increasingly play out on the Earth plane with catastrophic consequences for humanity.

The seriousness of this subtle-battle (Armageddon) and the consequences for humanity will be of unprecedented proportions. It is for this reason; we have named this article Armageddon, which means a conflict of catastrophic proportions between good and evil. The result of the battle will be a defeat of the forces of evil and the establishment of an era of rekindling Spirituality in mankind in the Universe and on Earth also known as the Divine Kingdom. The era of rekindling Spirituality in mankind on Earth will last for about a thousand years. We have explained the salient features of the era of rekindling Spirituality in mankind further down in this article.

3. Principle behind the subtle battle of Armageddon

Most of us are unaware of the fact that many of the events on Earth, which affect us at an individual or collective level, have their root cause in the spiritual realm. Let us take the example of the recent rise in natural disasters.

The primary factor contributing to the increasing trend of natural disasters is spiritual in nature. Physical factors such as greenhouse gases contribute to only 30% of the problem. In other words, the governments of the world and non-government organisations (NGOs) policing the international community’s adherence to the Kyoto protocol, though highly commendable, would at best address only a fraction of the problem. Most attempts to fix problems only at a physical and mental level without taking into account the spiritual realm will be clumsy and inefficient.

The single most important spiritual factor contributing to the rise of natural disasters, terrorism and political upheaval is a rise in the Raja and Tama subtle basic components. This increase is primarily due to:

The entire world is like a puppet in the hands of positive and negative forces from the subtle-realm. Good people act as per the will of God, whereas the evil people are puppets in the hands of ghosts (demons, devils, negative energies, etc.). The good people on Earth will not be able to live in peace unless negative energies are overpowered. People with lower spiritual energy who are not necessarily good or bad are easily affected by ghosts and controlled by them. As a result, they too are under the control of ghosts and contribute to the Raja and Tama. In any case, they get caught in the crossfire between the good and forces of evil.

Another major cause for the rise in Raja and Tama is the state of society with regards to Righteousness (Dharma). According to an evolved Saint Adi Shankaracharya from India (8th – 9th century AD), Righteousness is that which accomplishes three tasks:

  1. Keeping the social system in an excellent condition
  2. Bringing about the worldly progress of every living being
  3. Causing progress in the spiritual realm as well

Spiritual progress is said to occur only when spiritual practice happens in accordance with the six basic principles of spiritual practice. More often than not, societies of the world have failed in meeting these three conditions. Negative elements in society significantly increase the rot eating away into the fabric of society.

4. The severity of the battle of Armageddon and World war 3

Unknown to most people, the Universe is in the midst of a subtle-battle of epic proportions. Most of this Armageddon is and will be fought in the subtle-realms. The battle in the physical realm i.e., on Earth is also mostly due to the subtle-dimension. Hence awareness about its occurrence is limited only to those who are highly spiritually evolved people on Earth.

Only a fraction of Armageddon will be experienced on Earth. But this fraction itself will be catastrophic and the cause of mass destruction. We will physically witness this fraction of Armageddon in the form of the unleashing of forces of nature and World War 3 where weapons of mass destruction will be used. The rise in natural disasters such as floods, earthquakes and volcanoes will be primarily due to the rise in Raja and Tama fuelled by unrighteousness on Earth. The people who precipitate the World War 3 will be under the control of higher level negative energies known as subtle-sorcerers (māntriks).

World war 3 intensity prediction

The following table shows the comparison in severity between the various World Wars taking into account both the subtle and physical aspects.

Name of the war

Year

Severity of the subtle and physical battle

World War 1 1914 – 1918 30
World War  2 1939 – 1945 50
World War 3 2015 – 2023 70
Dissolution of universe End of Kaliyug 100

The above graph and chart gives us an understanding of the scale of the battle. To put things in perspective the combined physical and subtle-elements involved in World War 1 and World War 2 at its peak had a severity of 30 and 50 respectively. All the major disasters and terrorist activities of the past few years are tell-tale signs directly related to the subtle-battle. Higher level negative energies such as subtle-sorcerers possess individuals that have a mentality to harm society and carry out terrorist activities through them on mankind. The fact that the intensity of the battle will increase up to 70 units in 2017 gives us an indication of the severity of the battle. It will then rapidly come down to zero by 2023. 100 units is the intensity of the subtle-battle at the time of the dissolution of the Universe.

5. Who are the forces of good fighting this battle of Armageddon?

1993: In the ensuing battle of Armageddon, the forces of good are led by a Parātpar Guru (evolved spiritual guide of above 90% spiritual level) living on the Earth plane. At the start of the battle in 1993, only the Parātpar Guru and a few seekers were fighting the battle.

Their participation was entirely at a subtle-level. This means that all participants’ act automatically according to God’s wish without being aware that their acts were in fact a part of this battle of Armageddon. Thus all the participants are not conscious at the physical level of their involvement in the battle. The various acts during the course of the battle happen through them automatically as per God’s wish mostly at the subtle-level and to some extent in the physical dimension, like efforts for the spread of Spirituality.

2003: By 2003 the number of seekers of God accompanying the spiritually evolved guide in the fight rose to 35. Their role was mostly one of implementing God’s wishes in the gross tangible dimension. The forces of good progressively increased in quantity and quality as the subtle-battle intensified. The battle in the subtle is fought purely with spiritual power and has no physical element to it.

2004: From 2004 onwards the severity of the forces of evil and consequently of Armageddon stepped up considerably. Hence positive forces from the subtle-region of Heaven (Swarga) joined the battle. They helped in various forms beginning from yellow Divine Particles and progressing to particles of Divine consciousness (Chaitanya), frequencies of light and frequencies of colour of deities to counter the negative forces. This progressive change in form of the positive energies basically signifies that the forces from Heaven joining the battle are becoming more and more subtle and hence more powerful.

2008: From 2008 as the severity of Armageddon rose further, the forces from Heaven proved to be insufficient and hence their participation ceased.

2009 – 2013: In 2009, two spiritually evolved beings from the subtle-region of Maharlok (a higher region in the Universe) also joined the battle. By then approximately 400 seekers of God were fighting alongside the Paratpar Guru. In 2010, a third evolved being from Maharlok joined the battle. The participation of the evolved beings was in the form of Divine Particles progressing to subtle-frequencies, subtle-rays, divine frequencies and brilliant subtle-constellations in 2013. This meant that Divine help was getting progressively more subtle and powerful.

2014 – 2018: As the subtle-battle intensifies to 61 units in 2014, seekers fighting in Armageddon at a subtle-level will not be able to participate any longer as it would be beyond their spiritual capacity. They would not be able to receive and tolerate the immense spiritual energy supplied by God in order to meet the need of that level of battle.

In 2014, two more divine beings from the next higher region i.e., Janalok (a higher region in the Universe) will join the subtle-battle. Their participation will be in the form of divine particles progressing to subtle-frequencies, subtle-flames, auras of light to frequencies of light by 2018.

2019: Over the next few years up to 25 divine beings from up to the region of Tapolok (a higher region in the Universe) will join the battle against forces of evil from the 7th region of Hell. After that the number will gradually reduce because at this stage many Saints on Earth itself will have evolved.

Despite the reduction in the severity of the battle from 70 in 2017 to 48 in 2019, the number of divine beings participating in the battle will be 25 in 2019 compared to just 10 in 2017. This is because in 2019 in addition to the destructive work against the negative evil forces, positive work for the establishment for the era of rekindling Spirituality in mankind also needs to be undertaken.

2021 2023: In 2021, the establishment of the era of rekindling Spirituality in mankind will begin. In 2023, there will be arrival of particles from Satyalok, the subtlest and purest of the 14 main subtle-regions to help with the positive work taking place towards establishment of the Divine Kingdom.

2024: From 2024 onwards participation from the subtle positive regions will stop as it will no longer be required

6. Main stages in the battle of Armageddon

The battle of Armageddon being waged is mostly in the spiritual dimension. In addition it is also adversely affecting the world albeit mostly at an intangible level. The consequences of the subtle-war are mainly in the form of seeds sown for further rapid and progressive deterioration of the world at various levels. This works in two ways:

  • It decreases the overall sāttviktā in the world.
  • It enhances the hold of the forces of evil on mankind.

The main stages of Armageddon are described below:

Year

Event

1999 – 2012

Subtle-battle

  1. Battle of good versus evil in the subtle-world with some incidents in the physical realm which indicate its commencement.
  2. Battle at the physical level – negative energies prevent seekers from undertaking spiritual practice and creating obstacles in it.

2013 – 2015

Start of the battle in the gross

  • The tide of the battle of good versus evil at a subtle-level begins to change and the forces of good start to win.
  • Internal quarrels taking the form of small wars or clashes, commencement of riots within nations, revolt of the people against the system at a national level; though each incident may appear to be independent the root cause are higher level negative energies from the subtle-world.

Natural disasters

  • Increase in natural disasters

Battle in the physical realm

  • Commencement of the war with the evil-doers and anti-social elements at a physical, psychological and spiritual level.

2016 – 2018

Main battle in the gross

  • Third World War will take place
  • Large scale loss of life

Natural disasters

  • Natural disasters on a large scale

Fight with anti-social elements

  • Evil-doers and anti-social elements in society are eliminated at a physical, psychological and spiritual level.

2019 – 2022

Preparation for the Divine Kingdom

  • The tide of the battle of good versus evil at a physical level begins to change and the forces of good start to win.
  • Learning governance of the Divine Kingdom

2023

Establishment of the Sattva predominant (Divine) Kingdom

From 1993 onwards, subtle-sorcerers began to sow the seeds for the degradation of society and acceleration of unrighteousness. In most cases, the world had already set the process of degradation in place. This was due to a rise in man’s materialistic nature and lack of Righteousness. Aided by higher level negative energies, the downslide increased in intensity and speed. Over time these seeds would take root and increase the rot in society. As society becomes more and more unrighteous, they play right into the hands of negative energies increasing the Raja and Tama in the environment. This increase in Raja and Tama will cause the destabilisation of the world as we know it and will culminate in natural disasters and  World War 3.

The following are examples of a few mechanisms that have already been set into motion by higher level negative energies. The chart also gives other events that will come to pass in the run up to the establishment of the era of rekindling Spirituality in mankind.

Year

Event

2000

The seed of intense domestic quarrels sown in society

2001

The seed of increase in anti-social elements in society

2002

The seed of increase in malpractices in places of worship which accelerate the increase of Raja and Tama. Places of worship contribute to the Sattva component in society. When malpractices happen there it reduces the sattvikta and thereby helps increase the Raja and Tama.

2006

The seed of beginning of destruction of places of worship

2011

The seed of steps by terrorists under the control of ghosts to destroy spiritual organisations

2014

A high incidence of natural calamities

2015

Havoc by floods and volcanoes

2016

A massive earthquake in Pakistan

2017

Countries in the Middle East razed to the ground in bomb blasts

2018

America, China and Japan hit by war and an unprecedented loss of innumerable lives

2019

Loss of supremacy of politicians and rush of mankind to Saints for their rescue

2020

Decrease in the destructive process and predominance of particles of Divine consciousness in the environment

2021

The seed of times conducive and complementary to the establishment of the era of rekindling Spirituality in mankind created

2022

Experience of pleasantness and enthusiasm in the environment

2023

Settling down of the environment

2024

Internal and external settling down of life

2025

The seed of improved spiritual practice and spiritual journey towards God-realisation by seekers. Commencement of the era of rekindling Spirituality in mankind.

^Top

Note: At the current rate the world is going:

  • The probability of this catastrophe being avoided is 1%
  • The intensity may vary by +/- 10%
  • The timing of the event may vary by +/- 10% within the overall 25 year time frame.

6.1 World War 3

The Third World War will begin in 2015 and continue for about 9 years till 2023. The wars that will be fought within that period will all be linked. However it may not be readily apparent to the world. Towards the end of this period, weapons of mass destruction will be used. There will be an unprecedented loss of life where approximately 1/3rd of the population will perish and 1/3rd will experience suffering.  Some countries will be affected more than others. Needless to say in a highly interconnected world all countries will be affected. The Third World War will be triggered mainly due to religious fanaticism. Higher level negative energies will use this vulnerability in humans to push them over the edge and instigate nations to go to war with each other.

In all the three world wars (i.e., from World War 1 to World War 3) powerful negative energies from progressively higher regions of Hell have been the actual root cause instigating countries to go to war with each other. The following points elaborate on which subtle negative forces from the regions of Hell were responsible for instigating the World Wars.

  • World War 1: Subtle-sorcerers (māntriks) from the 2nd region of Hell.
  • World War 2: Subtle-sorcerers primarily from the 3rd region of Hell took part in the orchestration of the Second World War. Hitler for example throughout his tenure in power was possessed by a subtle-sorcerer from the 5th region of Hell. This was also the reason for his dramatic rise to power. Throughout his reign the subtle-sorcerer was fully manifest.
  • World War 3: Subtle-sorcerers from the 4th region of Hell will be behind the Third World War that will play out in the physical realm. However in the subtle-battle, subtle-sorcerers from the 7th region of Hell will take part.

Timetable of the 3rd World War and the establishment of the ‘Divine Kingdom’

Year

Stages of World War 3
2015 Commencement
2016 – 2018 Rising victories of the unrighteous people under the forces of evil
2019 – 2021 Righteous and the unrighteous forces at par
2022 – 2023 Rising victories of the righteous people under the forces of good
2023 Onwards Establishment of the ‘Divine Kingdom’

‘Depending on the devotion of seekers to God, the timetable of the war between devotees (righteous) and the demonic forces (unrighteous) can change.’

– His Holiness Dr Athavale

 

6.2 Role of India in World War 3 and the battle of Armageddon

From times immemorial, India has been the spiritual centre of the world. Spiritual research has revealed that in the Armageddon that is unfolding, India will hold centre stage from a spiritual perspective. In the course of the war, negative forces will instigate neighbouring countries to attack India to destabilise the pivotal role that it will play. Approximately 50% of the Indian population will perish as a result.

7. Can this catastrophe be avoided?

The catastrophe that is predicted to take place is mainly because the basic subtle Raja-Tama component in the world has increased to such unprecedented levels, that urgent intervention by God is needed so that the world can be cleansed in order to be able to continue peacefully. It follows that if mankind makes a supreme effort to adapt its lifestyle to a more Sattva predominant one, the cleansing process will happen only in part. This can be achieved if the majority of humankind mends its ways drastically and reduces its contribution to Raja-Tama. It can be better and earlier done, if people focus on increasing the basic subtle Sattva component. Thus the catastrophe can only be avoided if people earnestly start to practise Spirituality. It is imperative that in order to make a difference, their spiritual practice needs to take a more universal form rather than a sectarian form.

Spiritual practice according to the six basic principles of spiritual practice is the most conducive means for growth in the current era. Religions that preach that their way is the only way to God run the risk of violating the six basic principles of spiritual practice.

Depending on our collective spiritual practice and also if some highly evolved Saints intervene, the year and severity of the events may change to some extent. Higher level Saints are able to change the destiny of the entire human race as They can change the course of events or even shorten the difficult times if they are pleased with the sincere efforts of seekers in their spiritual practice. Seekers of God who have through their spiritual practice attained a spiritual level of 60% and above will be protected to varying degrees.

8. Salient features of the era of rekindling Spirituality in mankind

The upside of the battle of Armageddon is that humanity will finally experience peace on Earth which will last for almost 1000 years and this era will be known as the ‘Divine Kingdom’. The battle will be a spiritual cleansing of the world preparing people for a new kind of sāttvik world which will be very different from the old one. In a way, this will be an ushering of a mini Satyayug within the main era of Kaliyug. While it will be nothing compared to the sattvikta of the main era of Satyayug (at the beginning of the universe), it will be a period of spiritual renewal for mankind.

The following are some of the features of the new era that some of us will have the privilege to usher in.

  • Spiritual level: After the reduction in the world’s population with Armageddon, the mode spiritual level of the world will rise to 30% compared to its present 20%. A dramatic 10% rise in spiritual level across the world’s population will be due to people at a lower spiritual level losing their lives during the war on Earth. Please read our article on spiritual level, which gives the current breakdown of the world population by spiritual level.
  • Importance in life: A high degree of importance will be given to spiritual knowledge and spiritual maturity in assessing a person’s ability. The objective of life for people will be skewed towards spiritual growth for the realisation of God.  There will be importance given to spiritual rather than physical or intellectual strength. Accordingly progress will not be measured in terms of riches. The view about wealth will change. It will be viewed as purely a means and not an end in itself.
  • Governing system: Democracy will lose its status as the preferred type of governing system. For example in India, a benevolent leadership under the guidance of a Saint will form the government. The modus operandi of leadership will be in line with Righteousness. There will be no need for elections. The seer guides of the governing body will transparently point out the leaders. The rest of the world frustrated with its failed experiments at communism, dictatorship and democracy will look to India’s example and try to implement this new type of government to the extent possible for them.
  • Closeness: There will be unity amongst all nations. People will feel a genuine closeness with other cultures and nationalities. This will stem from the spiritual maturity of the world’s population. It will be the basis of an innate spiritual understanding of the oneness of all of mankind.
  • Education: Education systems will include Spiritual science and codes of Righteousness in their curriculum. Modern science will expand its viewpoint to take into account the spiritual dimension.
  • Medical science: Medical sciences will be rewritten. They will now include the spiritual dimension in analysing the root cause of a problem. Āyurvēda will become commonly accepted in the western world. The attitude and perspectives of people practicing medicine will change. For example, they will begin to question if a patient is spiritually deserving of an organ transplant or a heart bypass. What will a person do with the reprieve granted to him by a successful surgery? Will he squander the extra years that he has by watching television, aimless chit-chatter, parties etc? Even after getting a reprieve people rarely think of utilising life for realising God (the basic goal of life). In other words they will be considered as increasing the burden on Earth. If one needs an extended lifespan for spiritual practice, God grants it automatically.
  • Judicial systems: Judicial systems and processes will change dramatically. Now we have courts of law, later we will have courts of justice. There will be no need for lawyers as judges will be spiritually evolved and will be able to intuitively perceive the truth in the issue at hand. Their highly activated sixth sense (ESP) will allow them to plainly see who is lying and who is telling the truth. In short justice will be served instantly and without spending a cent.
  • Art: Artists will not undertake art for the sake of arts, but as spiritual practice to get closer and take others closer to God.
  • Security: As a nation based on Righteousness is God-made, God only takes care of its security. This means that God Himself guides the leaders about the appropriate measures to be undertaken.
  • Environment: Nature is influenced heavily by man’s actions. As man becomes progressively sattvik through spiritual practice nature automatically becomes conducive to man. There will be a complete reduction in weird weather phenomenon that we are experiencing in current times.
  • Family planning: Governments will not need to undertake family planning policies.  There will be an automatic adherence to family planning in society. The holy Vedic scriptures have also advocated a single child but not because of fear of scarcity of food etc., but to impress the importance of control on lust so as to grow spiritually.

8.1 The importance of this era of rekindling Spirituality in mankind

We live in momentous times amidst changing of an era. This era is also very conducive for spiritual growth as detailed in the article on good and evil. Our prayer is that the seekers of God in this world reflect on this knowledge. We must bear in mind that with intense spiritual practice according to the six basic laws of spiritual practice we can reduce the intensity of Armageddon.

Source

The Mind-Body Connection

And now some information about the connection between mind and the body:

tumblr_mht6g0t6uj1r0hxmjo1_4001

by Ken Adachi <Editor>
http://educate-yourself.org/mbc/

This subject is so patently clear and evident to me now, that it seems almost too obvious to require an explanation , yet I know there was a time when I didn’t see the connection and I had to gradually stumble over the metaphysical insights in order to see the Light. I can only presume that some of you are in the same boat.

It’s hard to know where to begin, but begin I must. I’m going to start with the metaphysical and move towards the physical connection as the story unfolds. Stick with me. You’ll realize why I’ve had to do it this way once you’ve read everything.

In The Beginning

We are all IMMORTAL SPIRIT BEINGS who have lived out THOUSANDS of other physical lives here on earth before this one. Each time we die, we return to the spirit world and have a conference with wise counselors who review our life’s history and help us decide on the best plan for our future and continued SPIRITUAL GROWTH. for our NEXT physical lifetime. After a period of rest, study (oh yes, you’re as busy and occupied on the Other Side as you are on this one), and self examination, we return to the earth plane by entering the body of a carefully chosen newborn baby, just as we had done on so many occasions in the past. The memory of our past lives is erased from our CONSCIOUS mind when we begin a new life in order to allow us the complete freedom of making truly unbiased (and un coerced) SPIRITUAL DECISIONS on a day to day basis. Eventually we figure out what’s going on, live better lives, and earn the right to incarnate on other worlds where “the living is easier” and not nearly as contentious as earth life. As we progress upwards (spiritually speaking), we find ourselves experiencing higher (and lighter) frequency realms. Earth life is merely the first (and lowest) rung of a very long ladder of spiritual evolution. Earth life can be wonderful and full of joy and pleasure (and some pain) if we play our cards right, but it can also be a very trying and difficult  existence if we don’t understand the Rules of Reality and decide to sleep with those who wish to be destructive and foment negativity or unkindness towards others.

That’s a super short condensation of The Big Story and I’ve left out a lot, but we will return to it as time allows.

The Smaller Story is as follows:

Reality

We are much more than what we appear to be. We base our perception of ourselves on what we see in the mirror. This physical perception is reinforced by society, our schools, and even our religions. We are alone, we think, fending off the wolves who would devour us and clinging to those who offer us support and loving care. Lord Jesus, Mother Mary, Lord Krishna, Lord Buddha, Mohammed, Zoarastra, etc. are thought of as Prophets or Saviors of Mankind who exist somewhere out there. When we pray to Them, we hope they can hear us out there and will come to our rescue when we need Them to save us from some dire situation. God is typically viewed as a Father figure, often depicted as a very muscular looking old man with a long white beard who is sitting on a throne in Heaven. Many religions reinforce this view of separation. Little, insignificant Us and big, powerful Them. Of course, many religions also teach us that their anointed representatives are necessary middlemen required to represent our interests before God, sort of like metaphysical lawyers. And you know how beneficial and necessary lawyers are, don’t you?

I’m being a little facetious, but I’m trying to get across the point that a fundamental misdirection has been taught by many organized religions that was never taught by the Founder of that religion. This misdirection did not come about by accident. It was intentional. It is the work of men who sought to gather power and privilege to themselves using the pretext of being earthly representatives of God. The purpose was to create a hierarchy of controlling elites at the top and the “‘followers” down below who were expected to pay the bills. A similar hierarchy evolved in the secular world with the idea of kingship/royalty and their “subjects” who again, were expected to pay (in some manner) for the privilege of being ruled and controlled. The true teachings of Christ and many other great spiritual teachers of antiquity were twisted and distorted by these elites desiring to create a paradigm of control and obedience to them. This is not what Christ taught or wanted. Jesus said that “The Kingdom of God is Within“. And so it is.

What did He mean? He meant that God exists within us at all times. We are part of God. We are not separated from God. We don’t have to go looking for Him because we already have Him within every molecule and atom of our being. In fact, none of us are truly separate from each other. It only appears that way. It’s an illusion, although it’s hard to accept that from our limited perspective. We are all part of God and God pervades everything. He is All That Is.

Now once you start to realize that, doors begin to open. You no longer feel so alone and fearful. You aren’t battling the Dark Forces of the universe by yourself, you now realize, but rather you have a great deal of help and support at your disposal. You are a part of God and God is a part of you.. You are an integral part of a greater Reality. A Divine Nature dwells within you since you are born of the Father and the Father is Divinity itself.  Therefore, you have friends in very high places. The ancient Hindu scriptures wrote of these truths eons ago.

If you study the writings of yoga masters, you will come across  the concept of Athman (Atman), or the Godhead figure within. The Soul and Atman are not exactly the same, but the Atman exist within the Soul. The Soul still retains the outer mantle of sense perception and carries the karmic baggage of previous lives. The Atman is completely detached and free of all sense desires or aversions. It is possible to perceive and experience the Atman while in this physical life. When you do, you are free. You can experience total bliss that will exceed anything your imagination can conjure.You will never view the world and its turmoil and triumphs in the same way, ever again.

Support Team

You have a team of Angels and Spirit Guides who have been ‘assigned’ to assist you during your earthly journey. Sometimes your Guides are changed or rotated depending on what sort of help you need at any given moment in your life. Guides are always beings who have experienced physical life many, many times and are very knowledgeable in the ways of the world. Your Angels, who have never experienced the physical plane, stay with you for the duration. These helpers always work in the background, but their assistance can become much more abundant and obvious if you attempt to communicate with them and seek their help.

One of the things that you’ll never hear about from conventional religious instructions is that there are certain spiritual Universal Laws in place that are in operation at all times throughout the universe. These Laws are inviolate and apply to all sentient beings whether you exist on the physical plane or in higher, non physical dimensions. They apply whether you come from Earth, Sirius B, Mars, Nibiru, Venus, or any other planet in this galaxy or any other galaxy. They apply in all the higher dimensional planes as well.

There are Three major Universal Laws and many other sub universal laws under the umbrella of the three main ones. One of those Universal Laws is the Law of Non Interference or Free Will. Simply stated, this law requires that Free Will rules above all else when it comes to receiving assistance from higher spirit beings. If you don’t want their help or do not ask for it, it cannot be ‘pushed’ on you. They must respect your Will. In an emergency, of course, due to ignorance on your part, your Angels will help get you out of a jam that might imperil your life or help avert a disaster, but as a rule they stand by ready to assist, but can only help you when you ask for their help. An extremely important point to remember. You’ve already been given this lesson by the Great Teacher who walked the Earth 2,000 years ago:” Knock and the Door shall be Opened unto you. Seek and you shall Find”.

The Law of Cause & Effect is also iron clad and causes us to acquire Karmic debt or Karma, at least in the lower dimensional planes. Once a soul ‘graduates’ to a high enough plane or spiritual dimension, he is no longer liable to incur Karmic debt. Karma, as you likely know, is reaping what you sow. For every unkind gesture, thought, action, or intention, you must pay the piper in this life or in future lives to come or both. The nastier you are, the more you’ll have to pay.

For every act of kindness, charity, or sacrifice, and every thought, word, deed or intention that you perform based on love and understanding (forgiveness), you pay down your Karmic debt and advance in soul development at the same time. Freedom from Karma can be achieved while still on earth and within the physical body. Many enlightened souls have done so down through the centuries. You can do it too, if you want it bad enough. The key for opening that golden door is obtained through enlightened mediation and complete self realization.

Paramahansa Yogananda and his predecessors taught a scientific form of enlightened meditation called Kriya Yoga that could permit the dedicated and devoted practitioner union with God, or samadhi and complete self realization while on earth.

The Law of Cause & Effect can also cause things to be created, including good health and freedom from adversity. I came upon an audio tape of Dr. Robert Bitzer in a most serendipitous way at the Power of Thought School in Fayetteville, Arkansas in the Fall of 1998. It was sitting there alone in a bin with other odd lot items for clearance sale. I think I paid 50 cents for it. I wouldn’t have taken it if the price wasn’t so low since I had no idea who Robert Bitzer was or if he had anything to say that I would be interested in.

It turned out to be the most powerful lecture that I’ve ever heard on the Law of Cause & Effect. I must have replayed it a hundred times. I can practically recite it from heart. I greatly treasure that tape and thank Spirit for allowing me to come upon it in the way that I did. Of course, now I know it was a set up all along. That’s the way they do it in the Spirit World. You think it’s dumb luck and blind chance, but Nahhhhh,…. it’s them giving you a lift to get up to speed and move you closer to God.

The Higher Self

Another topic that is never discussed in traditional religious education is the concept of the Higher Self. You think there is just you, the face you see in the mirror, and that you are alone in the world. You assume that the ego, the part of you that tenaciously clings to life, that jockeys for position and power, that propels you to seek physical gratification, that tempts you to dominate others, and causes you to respond to life’s tribulations with anxiety and fear is the very core of your being, but it is not so.

There is much more to you than you might imagine. The face you see in the mirror is but one aspect, in physical form, of your soul, but your soul is yet part of a larger concept called the Over soul. The Higher Self is the ‘director’, in a manner of speaking, of the Over soul and is directly connected to the Universal Cosmic Mind which in turn is connected to the core of all creation, God.  All knowledge, all truths, and all possibilities exists within the Universal Cosmic Mind. If you can gain access to this “Above Top Secret” cosmic computer room, you can find out anything you want and manipulate reality to satisfy your wishes.

As it turns out, you already have an inside contact. It’s your own agent/representative inside the “Big Room with the Big Board” (borrowed from the movie Dr. Strangelove-one of the funniest satires of all times on the foolishness of the military mind and the immature egotism that animates it) and we call that representative our Higher Self.

To be continued…

June 8, 2002

Martin Brofman contacted me by E mail on June 4, 2002 and said the following: ” I saw your web site on the Mind-Body Connection, and I thought you might be able to use the attached article I have written on the subject. I have been teaching healing for the past 25 years since I healed myself of terminal cancer in 1976, and have been exploring the body/mind interface ever since.”

It took me a couple of days to get around to reading his articles, but when I finally did, I knew I had to add them to this page just as he suggested. He has “continued” my story for me, for this is exactly where I wanted to go in my own piece. I’ll still finish my saga, but you can get an excellent ‘sneak preview’ to where my  story is heading with these two wonderful and inspiring articles.

1. Your Body is the Mirror of Your Life by Martin Brofman

2. Healing and Transformation by Martin Brofman

3. Improve Your Vision by Martin Brofman


Related

Spiritualism, A Guide for Those Who Seek ~ Part 2 (Nov. 29, 2011)

Spiritualism, A Guide for Those Who Seek ~ Part 1 (Nov. 28, 2011)

Defeating the Dark Side with Positive Intent Thoughtforms by Grey Wolf (Feb. 18, 2007)
http://educate-yourself.org/cn/positiveapproachwiththoughtforms18feb07.shtml

The Power of Thought: Daily Worldwide Wellness Affirmation (Jan. 6, 2007)
http://educate-yourself.org/lte/collectivewellnessaffirmation06jan07.shtml

Creation of Matter By Seth speaking through Jane Roberts (Oct. 8, 2006)
http://educate-yourself.org/mbc/sethcreationofmatter.shtml

We script our lives before we’re born…? (Oct. 7, 2006)
http://educate-yourself.org/lte/lifescript07oct06.shtml

Ho’oponopono by Joe Vitale (July 25, 2006)
http://educate-yourself.org/zsl/hooponopono25jul06.shtml

The Aloha Spirit (May 24, 2005)
http://educate-yourself.org/cn/alohaspirit24may05.shtml

The Conspiracy Is Against God By Henry Makow (Jan. 4, 2004)
http://educate-yourself.org/cn/conspiracyagainstGod04ajn04.shtml

The Power of Words (July 31, 2003)
http://educate-yourself.org/cn/powerofwords31jul03.shtml

The Rules of the Game When Visiting 3rd Density by Carissa Conti (May 8, 2003)
http://educate-yourself.org/cn/rulesofthegame08may03.shtml

Source

Codex Alimentarius

Information how big pharma wants to control all health supplements. IMPORTANT!:

Codex Alimentarius: Big Brother’s Plan to Control Health Supplements

http://educate-yourself.org/cn/codexalimentarius15jan09.shtml
January 15, 2009

Codex Alimentarius: Big Brother’s Plan to Control Health Supplements (Jan. 15, 2009)

Forward courtesy of Dorothee K

Ian Crane’s talk is quite a good introduction into the very complex matter
http://video.google.com/videoplay?docid=5800206429960925518

Codex Alimentarius:
Monstrously Toxic Power Play for Control of the Global Food Supply & Natural Health Industry

http://www.livingnutrition.com/articles/codex.html

September, 2007
From: Food & Health Safety News #20
Living Nutrition Magazine vol. 20
http://www.livingnutrition.com

Compiled from various sources and edited
by David Klein, B.S., Ph.D.

The Codex Alimentarius agenda, which has long metastasized in the recesses of closed board rooms and governmental chambers, is now coming to light. This is the paramount issue of our times, yet few know about it. If Codex standards ever replace the current laws in the U.S. governing food and dietary supplements, it will affect not just Americans’ right to choose supplements, but our right to grow crops with untampered seeds, to buy pure organic food, and to live free of the tyranny of Big Agro-Chem-Pharma-Med, through health-destructive FDA rules enacted and enforced by a pro-corporate government that cares nothing about our health freedom. In other words, the “natural health” industry will perish. Now more than ever, we must exercise our democratic duty and be vigilant in protecting that freedom, the health and survival of the Earth, and all her creatures and citizenry.

Please take action now and let your representatives know of your opposition to Codex, to prevent the pro-disease industries and affiliated financial interests from seizing the total power they crave. It’s our obligation to tell our Congressional leaders to stop Codex and to protect and promote food and health safety and freedom. Our right to live healthfully is at stake.

Let us remember the vehement, relentless defiance by the founders of our nation that broke the stifling grip of tyrannical rule, giving us the democracy we wanted and way of life we now cherish, which are now threatened. At this time of mounting crisis, each of us must expose this clandestine monster while claiming and exercising that democratic freedom as never before.

Scott Tips, Esq. & Paul Anthony Taylorwww.thenhf.com
The National Health Federation (NHF) is the only health-freedom organization with recognized status at Codex Alimentarius meetings, giving its members the right to speak out and submit comments on all Codex actions. As a case in point, the NHF was the only delegation at the 2005 Codex Alimentarius Commission meeting in Rome, Italy to protest the ridiculously harsh Vitamin and Mineral Food Supplement Guidelines submitted to the Commission for approval. Founded more than 52 years ago by an array of health-freedom activists, the NHF is the oldest health-freedom organization in the world, and has been following Codex issues for more than 10 years.

Codex is not just about nutritional supplements, although that is an important aspect. In fact, it is the primary political battlefield where the war is being waged about who will regulate and control the global food supply, from field and stable to table. This “war” is being waged by an increasingly tangled web of global governmental and international authorities, aligned with big business and financial interests, wherein human health takes a back seat to profit and power goals.

Although American dietary supplements are currently protected—somewhat—by the Dietary Supplement Health and Education Act of 1994 (DSHEA), its provisions are threatened by Codex and an interlocking array of emerging regional and international treaties, agreements, regulatory “handshakes” and other executive arrangements that will “harmonize” our food laws to harsh European standards, thereby relegating DSHEA to the dust bin of history and suppressing our health freedoms…unless we take immediate action.

Do we want to see a world where our access to safe, nutritious foods and effective dietary supplements is restricted, suppressed, and controlled by government in alliance with its pharmaceutical and chemical bedfellows? If not, we must act now, before it’s too late.

Contacting government bureaucrats with your complaints is largely a waste of time. Effective action takes the form of advising others and contacting your representatives in Congress. Remember: be “persistently vocal”—most politicians don’t see the light; they feel the heat. Make them feel the heat.

Shannara Johnson www.caseyresearch.com
Ever heard of the Codex Alimentarius? If not, don’t be surprised. It’s one of the best-kept “open secrets” of the U.S. government. The World Trade Organization (WTO) has accepted the standards of the Codex, and at some point, if their plans are allowed to proceed, member countries of the WTO will be required to implement Codex, “to harmonize the standards” for the global trade of foods. It may present the greatest disaster for our food supply—and thus for our health—that we have ever encountered, here and abroad.

Chris Gupta http://tinyurl.com/2xohw
It is not easy to come to grips with Codex. With over 20 committees meeting on an annual basis, and published reports comprising a total of over 1,600 pages in 2005 alone, most people are blissfully unaware of the extent of its implications for our health. Read on to discover the bigger picture behind the Codex Alimentarius Commission’s support for the “disease business.”

Tamara Thérèsa Mosegaardwww.mayday-info.dk
MayDay is a Danish civil health-rights organization that has been following Codex since 1999, participating in the Danish national delegation to Codex meetings. Although Denmark is a relatively small country, MayDay has had significant impact on the European food-supplement regulatory scene and its efforts are international in scope. MayDay has worked closely with the US-based National Health Federation to oppose restrictive Codex guidelines on food supplements. MayDay’s extensive and informative website features articles in both Danish and English.

Central American Free Trade Agreement (CAFTA) & Dietary Supplements
Rep. Ron Paul, MD, July 19, 2005 — www.ronpaullibrary.org

The Codex Alimentarius Commission, organized by the United Nations in the 1960s, is charged with “harmonizing” food and supplement rules among all nations of the world. As a result of Codex rules, those vitamins and minerals that would compete with medicines would require a doctor’s prescription. The European Union has already adopted Codex-type regulations that will be in effect across Europe later this year (2005). This raises concerns that Europeans will challenge our relatively open market for health supplements in a WTO forum. This is hardly far-fetched, as Congress has already changed our tax laws to comply with a WTO order.

Make no mistake about it: those international standards are moving steadily toward the Codex regime and its draconian restrictions on health freedom. Pharmaceutical companies have spent billions of dollars trying to get Washington to regulate your dietary supplements. So far, that effort has failed, in part because of a 1994 law called the Dietary Supplement Health and Education Act. Big Pharma and the medical establishment hate this Act, because it allows consumers some measure of freedom to buy the supplements they want.

The largely government-run “healthcare” establishment, including the nominally private pharmaceutical companies, want government to control the dietary-supplement industry so that only they can manufacture and distribute supplements providing any real benefit. If this takes place, as it has in Europe, the high-potency, beneficial supplements that you can now buy over the counter will be available, if at all, only by prescription and at a much higher cost. This alone is sufficient reason for Congress to oppose the unconstitutional, freedom-destroying CAFTA bill.

FDA and Congress are also working (FDA quite openly, Congress more covertly) toward the goal of harmonizing our health laws with Codex Alimentarius standards and guidelines.

Sharrhan Williamson — Boston, Massachusetts Area Codex Action Committee
The problem with U.S. membership in NAFTA and CAFTA is that all the trading countries have to be on the same page, in lockstep, accepting the same standards and regulations. This is the purpose of the Codex Alimentarius Commission: to standardize all regulations, resulting in product policies that are more convenient and more profitable for trade interests but that work against consumers’ interests. Under Codex, American sovereignty is lost, at least for international trade purposes, and the WTO will make rulings based upon Codex standards rather than Congress and/or other government agencies.

The FDA is presently recommending that the U.S. harmonize with Codex standards, and it seems they would prefer to apply those standards within the U.S. as well as for international trade.(It is more than likely that we will have no choice in the matter once we are signed on to Codex.) The recent actions of Congress (bills that threaten DSHEA) lead me to think they have a similar agenda.

The U.S. passed CAFTA with a very close vote and, in fact, the Republicans held the voting period open an extra hour or more while they haggled with their party members to accrue enough votes. Sure enough, they got them. The Democrats were already all on board.

Codex Alimentarius Background and History
Compiled by Chris Gupta, based upon the work of Paul Anthony Taylor, Sepp Hasslberger, Scott Tips and Helke Ferrie
http://tinyurl.com/2xohw
http://www.thenhf.com
http://kospublishing.com

Codex Alimentarius
“Codex Alimentarius,” which refers to a set of strict regulations covering all aspects of food, is Latin for “food code” or “food regulations.” This collection of food rules in Europe dates back to standards enacted between 1897 and 1911 by the Austro-Hungarian Empire. They were used as a legal reference by the courts, although the Codex Alimentarius itself had no legal standing.

Modern Codex regulations are prepared by the Codex Alimentarius Commission (herein referred to as “Codex”), which works with the EU and UN in an attempt to regulate every aspect of food production, packaging, preparation, preservation, and presentation of food “from farm to fork.” Codex also attempts to regulate supplemental nutrients. It even goes so far as to eliminate “organic produce” standards (through dilution)!

Codex’s reach
Because the U.S. is a member of the World Trade Organization (WTO), and because the WTO and other treaty agreements require the United States to adhere to Codex standards, any changes approved in Europe, and implemented in the EU-dominated Codex meetings, could subject the United States to WTO-enforced trade sanctions.

Codex will control:
1. Vitamins, minerals and nutrients,
2. Genetically modified organisms,
3. Toxic residues,
4. Antibiotics, drugs, growth stimulants, and other hormones in food animals,
5. Organic foods, and
6. Irradiation of food.

The plan is to suppress all beneficial, high-potency nutrients, and to allow only those and a few other vitamins and minerals that will be high-priced, low-dosage, and synthetically-made by drug companies.

Codex regulations will become binding internationally. Any nation that has entered into trade agreements through the WTO and its adjunctive treaties will eventually be forced to adopt Codex standards.

All “new” types of food supplements will be banned unless tested and approved in a drug-like manner. This is certain to be both time consuming and unnecessarily expensive. And, the validity of such tests is doubtful. A favorite ploy of drug and governmental authorities is to use such small doses of a supplement that tests do not show any noticeable value.

Codex standards are not based upon accepted scientific or research findings. Rather, the standards are developed in a political atmosphere, with seemingly obligatory EU and drug-cartel approval.

Organic foods
From the drug cartel’s point of view, the primary advantage in getting rid of true organic food is that in the absence of quality food, people will become ill and buy more prescription drugs. As a lesser advantage, the farmers will buy more insecticides and chemical fertilizers. The standards and definitions of “organic food” will be changed. Under Codex, a farmer or rancher will be able to call his products “organic” when they are full of toxic poisons. Under Codex, “organic food” may include as little as 70% organic contents, but this will not be noted on labels. (The other 30% can consist of poisons or contaminants.)

The new laws requiring genetically modified crops, pesticides, hormones and antibiotics in foods will be cost-prohibitive to people living in developing nations, and billions of people may die and/or sicken as a result of these policies.

Codex is not based on science or democracy
Unelected government officials, working in cooperation with vested industry and trade interests, make decisions that result in domestic and international standards, which in turn are to be enacted into law by the member states of the WTO. When the WTO was created, the enforcement mechanisms for Codex and other international standards were created. With this enforcement mechanism in place, an increased incentive therefore arose to hijack the original purpose of Codex (i.e., to provide clean and safe food for the planet with no international barriers to the movement of that food), instead promoting a restrictive governmental agenda of suppression of natural alternatives to pharmaceutical medicines.

Harm in ‘harmonization
Through the process called “harmonization,” our legislators in Washington will be required to align America with harsh and restrictive Codex requirements, regulating international trade, distribution and processing of food, herbs and nutrients. Those proposed standards will be extremely detrimental to the environment and your health, blocking your access to many clean, unadulterated, life-enhancing foods.

The FDA is currently at work, preparing its own plans for “directives” for “harmonization” of our dietary supplement laws so they will fully agree with the excessively restrictive “international standard” set by the EU-dominated Codex.

What Codex will accomplish
These new standards and guidelines will:
1. Protect the multimillion euro (European equivalent of dollars) investments of the large drug companies as well as their government-blessed monopolies.
2. Lead people away from natural healing methods, resulting in more power for the government-medical-pharma cartel, more suffering and death for the populace, and the further degradation of life on Earth.

Codex’s Evil Sister
The drug industry, recognizing the growing preference for natural remedies over pharmaceuticals, wants nutritional supplements and herbs either forbidden or priced out of reach. In Europe, the drug cartel has succeeded in enacting the European Food Supplements Directive, which will accomplish that objective on the European continent very soon. This Directive, which passed into European Union (EU) law in 2002 and was implemented throughout the EU on August 1, 2005, is the first of several EU Directives to impact natural healthcare and is one of the bases for the Vitamin and Mineral Food Supplements Guidelines adopted by Codex Alimentarius.

Effects of the 1994 U.S. dietary-supplement law, DSHEA:
In the United States, after DSHEA was enacted by Congress, the shackles were removed from American suppliers, who were permitted for the first time to actually advertise some of the purported health benefits of vitamins, minerals, and herbs, and to sell such products free of the arbitrary enforcement powers of the FDA. DSHEA was passed because large numbers of Americans demanded it. Over 2.5 million ordinary citizens wanted to ensure that dietary supplements would remain available over-the-counter. By 2002, nutritional supplements outsold drug medications. Interestingly enough, although the FDA has retained wide-ranging enforcement powers over supplements, many anti-supplement interests repeatedly and deliberately lie and call supplements “unregulated.”

CAFTA agreement
Special clauses have been inserted into the Central American Free Trade Agreement (CAFTA) designed to force America to submit to Codex standards after its enactment by the U.S. Congress. CAFTA was passed by the U.S. Senate and Congress in 2005. This laid yet another brick in the wall for the U.S. government to eventually restrict vitamin and supplement sales in accordance with the “German Model” of healthcare. Gradually, DSHEA, which protects the nutritional rights of Americans, is being nullified by these “end runs,” and the North American supplement companies (along with their healthfood stores) are being insidiously phased out.

The power behind the throne
Codex is a joint venture between the United Nation’s World Health Organization and the Food and Agriculture Organization (WHO/FAO). The WTO stated that it will enforce Codex “guidelines” as the world standard for trade in food and food supplements. Both the FAO and the WHO are intended to protect the health and welfare of the world’s population, but it is clear they have shirked this responsibility in regard to Codex.

An immense German, French, U.S., and British drug cartel is behind this. Codex is also working with other groups supporting the following agendas:

1. The chemical industry’s aim that all animals be treated with antibiotics and hormones.
2. The largest seed company in the world (Monsanto) is working toward 100% genetically-modified crops.
3. The nuclear industry’s goal of irradiating all foods including plants and livestock.
4. All industries’ goal: phasing out truly organic foods, or at least, making them extremely difficult to obtain.

Hopefully, the facts will alarm you enough that you will want to immediately contact Congress and tell them how you feel about all of this.

Actions by the European Union and the United Nations affect millions of lives. What makes it possible for drug companies to have so much influence at the EU and UN and even within our own FDA? The answer is rather simple: drug companies make excessive profits by overcharging on patented medicinal drugs. They claim that the profits are needed for research into new drugs. Yet, the costs of that research only come down to paying the salaries of some lab technicians. It is well-known that most of the profits are used for lobbying politicians, advertising, and similar methods of increasing sales.

The powers on the throne
Some 167 countries are members of the Codex Alimentarius Commission (CAC). Here are some of the international organizations working closely with Codex in order to accomplish its objectives:

* Food and Agriculture Organization (FAO):
* International Atomic Energy Agency (IAEA)
* International Consultative Group on Food Irradiation (ICGFI)
* Joint FAO/WHO Expert Committee on Food Additives (JECFA):
* The European Commission on Food Safety (ECFS)
* United Nations (UN)
* World Health Organization (WHO)
* World Trade Organization (WTO)

The bottom line is that, for all their power, the pharmaceutical companies could no more force you to buy their drugs and accept their medicines than Wal-Mart could force you to buy its pots and pans. It is the overriding dictates of monopolistic legislation enacted by Congress, coupled with the government-enforced monopoly given to government-licensed and approved medical doctors, that restrict our healthcare choices. Without these laws, you could reject “Big Pharma” with impunity as you bought and used all the natural health products you wanted in a truly free market.

There are more than 20 Codex Alimentarius Committees.
These committees develop guidelines (there are more than 16,000 pages of working documents) on every aspect of food, and present those guidelines to the Codex for ratification. Trade organizations with strong publicly documented ties to the pharmaceutical, chemical and agricultural industries have a very influential voice at these meetings. There has been no significant representation from health advocates, nutritional supplement manufacturers, natural healthcare professionals, or similar groups at the Codex meetings, except for the National Health Federation (NHF), which is the only health-freedom organization with official International Nongovernmental Organization (INGO) status at these meetings. The NHF is the only INGO voice consistently speaking out for health freedom year after year at these meetings.

The Codex Commission meets every year, alternating between Rome and Geneva, while its various committees meet in different host countries (such as France, Germany, Canada, Australia, the US, etc.). The U.S. representatives to Codex have well-documented, unsavory connections to the very industries that stand to profit from the wholesale implementation of the Codex standards. Insofar as the FDA is concerned, consumers have virtually no say at all.

The governments of both India and South Africa have repeatedly expressed their dissatisfaction with the foolish restriction of nutrients and herbs under Codex, but their protests have been regularly disregarded during meetings by ill-defined “consensus” tactics that do not allow full discussion or debate on these crucial issues, or even true consensus.

The Power in Codex
Here is one of many reasons why Codex can overrule our U.S. dietary laws. In the United States Federal Register, dated Oct. 11, 1995, the FDA’s Policy on Standards states that “where a relevant international standard exists, or completion is imminent, it will generally be used in preference to a domestic standard.” The U.S. Constitution states that U.S. treaties take precedence over U.S. laws. There has been activity on Capitol Hill to prepare “harmonization” rules, which will lock America into obeying Codex dietary standards.

It is important to note that Codex Alimentarius operates under the system enshrined in the Napoleonic legal code, under which anything not explicitly permitted is forbidden! In contrast to the Napoleonic legal code, the U.S. operates under the more sensible English-based Common Law, wherein anything not specifically forbidden is permitted.

WTO placed corporations over nations
The WTO has put the mechanisms in place to override any national law that interferes with multinational corporate profits in international trade. That is one of the reasons why Congressman Ron Paul tried to remove us from the WTO in 2000 via House Joint Resolution 90. Congress failed to enact his proposal.

U.S. Codex Office
The U.S. Codex Office is found within the FDA, which, in turn, is an agency of the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services. This Office works very closely with Codex in Europe. If you go to its website, you will see this:

“The Codex Alimentarius Commission was created in 1963 by FAO and WHO to develop food standards, guidelines and related texts such as codes of practice under the Joint FAO/WHO Food Standards Programme. The main purposes of this Programme are protecting health of the consumers, ensuring fair trade practices in the food trade, and promoting coordination of all food standards work undertaken by international governmental and non-governmental organizations.”

The U.S. obeys WTO
Codex standards and guidelines were originally intended to be voluntary, i.e., each nation could obey or disobey them. But that began to change when the various nations signed new treaties at the Uruguay Round of General Agreement on Tariffs and Trade (GATT), at which time the World Trade Organization (WTO) came into existence. According to the treaty the United States signed at Uruguay, we are required to obey the rulings of the WTO. The WTO has enforcement power through a new international court, the Dispute Settlement Body, which does not follow our rules of evidence and wherein our interests are represented by unelected government bureaucrats.

We have a controlled (or paid-off) press
This Codex crisis is the clearest proof this writer has ever seen that we have a “controlled press” in America! There is absolutely no mention by ABC, NBC, CBS, Fox, BBC, or the newspapers and newsmagazines that America is hurtling toward the total loss of effective vitamin-and-herbal supplementation! This is largely due to a conflict of interest: the drug companies provide them with millions of dollars in drug-ad revenues, and it is my belief that the media have been threatened with the loss of this revenue if they tell the public the truth about Codex.

In my opinion, this includes generous “contributions” to the White House and Congress, as well as immense bribes to EU and UN officials. Now you can understand why the newspapers, newsmagazines, and news broadcasts do not say a word about the nutritional crisis we are facing. In 2004, pharmaceutical companies spent over $4 billion on direct consumer advertising. This includes media advertising. In that same year, $785 million was spent on Congressional lobbying.

Can Codex be stopped?
There is no certainty about this. You should contact your Congressmen and Senators, and tell them how you think they should vote. It is imperative that concerned natural health consumers become organized and fully activated to stop Codex from being enacted in the United States.

July 4, 2007 Update by Sharrhan Williamson
Just this week, the FDA announced that it was implementing tough, new “Good Manufacturing Practices,” which consist of regulations that will adversely affect sales of vitamins and minerals. For once, the FDA was very forthright, making it clear that small supplement companies will have to go out of business. According to news sources, the big vitamin/supplement companies that are set to stay in business (Vitamin Shoppe, GNC, etc.) have strong pharmaceutical company backing.

Senator Ted Kennedy’s FDA “revitalization” bill S. 1082 is another blow to DSHEA: it allows for its dismantling by the FDA and Congress. Dr. Ron Paul is trying to counteract this with some new bills such as his H.R.2117. We’ll see if he is successful.

Codex is happening, although they are implementing it in small stages so that the public hardly notices. If we call Congress to complain, they’ll say, “Oh no, that’s not happening.” We must read between the lines and look at all the evidence—it’s as plain as day. On the bright side, perhaps people will get back to growing more good organic food and herbs locally than ever before.

July 16, 2007 Update by Scott C. Tips of National Health Federation
The 30th Session of the Codex Alimentarius Commission (CAC) in Rome, Italy just ended (July 2-7, 2007). Heaping plates full of Codex standards and guidelines were advanced to their final stages as if starving people were gathered around a banquet table. It did not matter what was heaped on the plate; it got passed to the table regardless. It also did not matter that there were some 451 country delegation members and another 61 INGO (International Nongovernmental Organization) delegate-observers from around the world in attendance (or pretend attendance); the CAC Chairman, Dr. Claude Mosha, plowed forward, pushing aside any and all objections—excuse me, he called them “reservations”—that were made. It would not have mattered if a plate of rotten tomatoes had been presented to him for approval; he would have approved them too. In this one meeting, the CAC was rendered irrelevant as a meaningful “approving” body, for it merely rubber stamped without thought what had been done by others. Mimi the Gorilla could have done just as good a job.

That is the essence of what happened at the Codex meeting as Sepp Hasslberger and I (the National Health Federation delegation) saw it. To read our full report, see www.thenhf.com/press_releases/pr_16_jul_2007.html

While Americans Slept by A. Ofria
When we see powerful players forcing our leaders to act in ways that threaten the rights that Americans have historically died to preserve, we must remind them of their duty to safeguard our way of life. If we do not raise our voices above the clamor of multinational commercial interests, we may be silenced forever.

Take Action by Scott C. Tips
Legislation can either protect or restrict your freedom in all its aspects, including your health freedom. As long as there is some semblance of representation in the halls of Congress, use whatever influence you have as a constituent on your Senators and Congressional representative. Let all three of them know that you oppose American harmonization with Codex Alimentarius standards and all other restrictions upon your right to purchase and grow naturally healthful foods and choose naturally healthful goods and services.

Remember the National Health Federation’s action motto: “Be persistently vocal.” That is, do not just send one letter or fax, or one e-mail, and then sit back and watch TV reruns, thinking your job is done. Be persistent, do all three, re-send, and pick up the telephone to call them with your concerns. Even better, if possible, pay them a personal visit in their offices, ideally, going together with friends. Engrave your views in their minds, even when they are on the Senate or House floor. Make them feel the heat.

To begin, you could say:
“I am asking you to do two things to protect our health freedoms here at home: 1. Support the Health Freedom Protection Act (H.R.2117) by signing on as a cosponsor; and 2. Oppose all efforts to harmonize with or conform our American system of food and food-supplement regulation to the European-dominated Codex Alimentarius Commission’s health standards, which are based on junk science.”
Unify your efforts with others by joining an organization such as the National Health Federation with an established track record of health freedom activism. Together, our individual efforts will be coordinated and amplified.

Editor’s note: Special thanks go to Scott C. Tips, Esq. of the National Health Federation for assisting with the editing of this article.

Watch These Films!
“We Become Silent – The Last Days Of Health Freedom –
The Codex-CAFTA Documentary” (2006)
A 28-minute video by Kevin Miller at http://herballure.com/Special/WeBecomeSilent/QuickTime.html

“This is What Democracy Looks Like” (2000)
A 68-minute compilation of interviews with Noam Chomsky, Vandana Shiva, Susan Sarandon and Michael Franti about the driving forces behind the World Trade Organization.
Available at video stores and www.corrugate.org.

New Book
CODEX Alimentarius – Global Food Imperialism
This 293-page book, just released this year, consists of a compilation of informative articles and viewpoints by various knowledgeable health-freedom activists who know Codex intimately. Compiled and edited by Scott Tips, President of the National Health Federation.
$15.95 plus shipping: U.S $3; Europe $12
Online orders: www.thenhf.com
Mail orders: National Health Federation, P.O. Box 688, Monrovia, CA 91017 U.S.A., or call 626-357-2181.

Democracy in Action
“The price of liberty is eternal vigilance.” –Thomas Jefferson.
To contact your U.S. congressional representatives, go to: www.house.gov.
To contact your U.S. congressional senators, go to: www.senate.gov.
Or visit: http://www.house.gov/zip/ZIP2Rep.html

Codex Action Information
Boston Area Codex Action Committee
Sharrhan Williamson • 617-499-0920 • sharrhan@verizon.net

National Health Federation
P.O. Box 688, Monrovia, California 91017
626-357-2181 • contact-us@thenhf.com• www.thenhf.com

http://tinyurl.com/2xohw
www.alliance-natural-health.org
www.codexalimentarius.net
www.dr-rath-foundation.org
www.iahf.com
www.isil.org
www.mayday-info.dk
www.mercola.com
www.newmediaexplorer.org
www.newstarget.com
www.thenhf.com
www.welltv.com

Source

The Golden Extraterrestrial Masters, Part 12 – 14

And here we go again…

Free-Spirit-By-Pooyan

From Willy and Andy
http://educate-yourself.org/cn/zetainfoD07apr06.shtml
April 7, 2006

Golden Extraterrestrial Masters (Part 12)

Netaboruli / Extraterrestrial Cosmic Beings

This is a highly spiritual developed race of extraterrestrial here to assist the planet in the process of Ascension or how they describe as the mutational change of the human species from a physical existence, to bodies of living light. As with many high ET beings, they choose how much to reveal about themselves and this is what we learned:.

They travel thought the Galaxy assisting planets in transition, where the species have gained enough momentum to take the leap toward a higher reality of existence. These Golden Extraterrestrials are Ascended Masters that are helping our planetary Ascended master in the transformation of consciousness for humanity.  Even though they exist in a non-duality all love dimension (8th dimension, ready to go to 9th where they will be formless), they acknowledge that humanity has to transcend through the 4th dimension of reality where all the battles between good and evil are fought seeking balance. It is in this 4th dimesional plane that the dark forces control and direct all evil individuals and organizations on the planet.

If humanity manages to transcend the 4th dimension toward the 5th dimension of love and light, a new species of being will be born in our beloved planet- free from duality experience and living in the delight of their own exquisite divine nature.  The golden masters said that they are very patient with humanity as they see the potential with us to transcend, and that’s why they wait for the right moment to assist us more deeply.   They see humans as 5th dimensional beings that are projecting into the 3rd dimensional picture of reality, so they in truth always see us as whole.

The Golden ET masters seem to posses many technologies of consciousness that range from interdimensional symbols, paintings, toning, music, and meditation. The have enormous golden space ships of light of oval shape around the planet.  Being so spiritually advanced, they don’t need naves to travel as they have other faster technologies of vibration and portal to travel, including materializing themselves where their consciousness is directed.

They also advised that they have sent in a form of walk-ins; many of them to assist us in the planet.  As we understand it, they descend with the permission of a humans individual into their body and the soul leaves the body, being replaced by the soul of the Golden Et master.  In that way, they can interact with us and help us in many areas, especially in the development of consciousness.  They said that they already did a lot of teaching on the planet through a teaching vehicle they called “Extraterrestrial Earth Mission”, but though no longer teaching, yet they are still walk-in among us working on another aspects of their mission. The synthesis of their message is: “Follow you spirit without hesitation”.

These Extraterrestrial masters said that there is going to be a great shift in consciousness on 2012 and for many, there can be a total transcendence of their limited pictures of reality to start living not as individuals, but as Beings in tune with the Universe.  They advised that for those who feel guided by their spirit to connect with them, there is going to be at disposal for all the planet, an initiation into what they call: The Golden Ray of Alarius.

On April 22nd at 9 pm your local time, if you wish, sit for 20 minutes and just relax. Ask internally that you wish to receive the Golden Ray of Alarius Initiation. That’s all.  They said that after the initiation, you can call upon the Golden Ray of Alarius any time you want a repeat the same experience, just by mentally saying : “Golden Ray of Alarius”.-Whatever experience you may had they said is just for the exaltation of your Beingness.

The Netaboruli
April 26, 2006

Humanity is very fortunate that these Extraterrestrials beings are assisting humanity at this time where the faith of our species is hanging by a tread. There existence has being veiled from humanity’s consciousness since millenniums ago, due to our egocentric ways and ignorance.

These beautiful extraterrestrial beings are only 23 inches tall and one of their main physical features is that their heads are very big in proportion to their small bodies. Their bright and beautiful eyes are like windows that allow you to see their unlimited consciousness and the Divine nature. The color of their eyes is violet and the form of their eyes is like our Asian races but bigger and are perfectly design to lite in the darkness of the night that is experienced in their far away planet, where the sun is seen just as another star in the firmament.

Their skin is one of the most wonderful creations that the mind of God have conceived, which looks like the most pure, clear starry sky, but with a purple background. Just to look at their skin can take your breath away. Their skin is like a miracle of nature and is very sensitive to heat as it has the ability to accumulate the light of the sun and the stars, creating thermal bubbles on top of their bones. This accumulated heat allows them to live on their cold planet.

The Netaborulis do not breathe oxygen like human beings, because the plants in their planet don’t work like ours as the sun is very distant and the plant can’t use photosynthesis. So their plants feed from subtle vibrations that are all over the planet, many of them produced by the same Netaboruli, in that way processing vibration into energy and producing carbon dioxide that in turn is breathed by the Netaborulis through their unique multifunctional skin. The Netaborulis are also heterosexual, none the less their bodies were never developed to have intimate relations. So their process of procreation is done by the use of vibration. (Later you will understand more about vibration).

Their babies do not grow inside the mother’s womb and of course are not born as human babies. During conception, the couple stand in front of each other and begin to produce a vibration sound through their skins, that sounds very similar to the Universal AUM, and through this vibrations a cocoon is formed in between the couple. The cacoon is made of sound waves and the baby begins to materialize inside until it is in complete form in only 3 terrestrial hours. But this is not an event that happens every day, only once a year. And if we understand that one of their years is equivalent to 1000 of our years, you will understand that this is something that is not very common.

The Netaborulis exist in all the dimensions, but those that materialized in their most dense form, can have an incarnation of about 10000 years. The newborn and small children will never go to school as our children do, because they are born with all the knowledge they need, their purpose and mission, all according to the vibrations that have been impressed in their minds and hearts. Their function to be is also influenced by the stars and the needs of their society.-

They have a very unique language that to the listener may sound that they are talking backwards and their mind can process their thoughts in the form of memories of things that have not happened yet. This process is impossible to comprehend for us humans as we have a rational linear mind. But do not get confused, their form of communication is one of the most perfect in the universe. It is not expressed though phrases or words that represent an idea, but through a language based on tones that vibrate though their skin, that to us would sound something like: Peng! Pang! Pik! Puk! pank! but in perfect tone beyond our imagination and our normal senses.

Each word that they express or vibration that they broadcast is a universal tone in a language that is beyond human comprehension or the capacity to speak. Other innate qualities they posses are gifts of Healing and Harmonization. The life of the Netaboruli have been always directed towards a pure spiritual life, to the point that they are the ones that have the key to purify all the karma in our solar system.

We were surprised when we found out that their planet is located in our solar system, beyond Pluto. They sometimes refer to it as the 8th planet and this may be that could be the 8th planet they colonize in this galaxy or maybe is the 8th planet from the Earth. Nonetheless the name they used for their planet is Keviananda in honor to the first netaboruli that materialized there. This planet has an oscillation between the physical plane and the etheric plane and as you know Pluto have a more elongated orbit than the other planets around the Sun and this is caused by the vibration attraction that keviananda exerts over Pluto. Keviananda’s orbit around the sun is done in a 90 degree angle, different from the other planets and it takes Keviananda 999 years to complete its orbit around the sun. As we mentioned before, this is not their original planet and it was colonized by them around 750.000 years ago when they perceived the first signs of troubles and lack of harmony in our solar system. They are like cosmic gypsies that travel from solar system to solar system where they are more needed. Every time they succeed in taking a system to a harmonic momentum that will propel the system towards final harmonization, they leave to go to another system where their presence is required.

May 1, 2006 (Netaboruli continued)
The Netaboruli are the greatest masters in the entire Universe in respect to their mastery over vibration. Everything in the universe has a vibrations and the one who understands it, can understand all the mysteries of all creation. There is an Absolute vibration in the Universe that they call the Universal Symphony, to which they tune and recite as part of the spiritual culture. Our solar system has a vibration and they said each planet also has a specific vibration. The Netaboruli says that all the planets in our solar system are tuned, to the “Universal Symphony” with the exception of the Earth and Mars.

The Netaborulis mission is to assist in the harmonization of our planet to this Universal Symphony. For example in this moment we could say that the tone or vibrations of the planet is a low ooooooooooo when it should be a hi iiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiii. For this reason the Netaboruli has little tolerance with the actions of the Zeta Reticulim, because all they do is interfere with the planetary tuning process.

The Netaboruli never die, because their DNA is based in pure vibration that is in harmony with the Universal Vibration. The moment a Netaboruli decides to leave his body, they go to a special meeting place where the other Netaboruli form a circle around the departing Netaboruli. Then he enters a kind of trance with the Universal Symphony and frees all the vibrations of his body throughout the colony, leaving in the minds and hearts of the others a living impression of his own perception about reality and all he experimented with in his long life. Then the Netaboruli transcends to a more subtle body that he can use to live in the highest planes of existence, where the Netaboruli will accumulate more vibration energy from the Universal symphony, until the time the soul decides to descend to another more dense body. With this process of transcendence, the colony evolves 1000 faster in experience and knowledge than we humans, as they don’t have to live all the experiences in their own bodies and can learn by osmosis from the tons of experiences that the transcending Netaboruli leaves behind. It may take up to 5000 years before a Netaboruli can accumulate enough energy to accomplish this process of Transcendence or Ascension.

They have their elders, but they are not the oldest in incarnation, but those who are in the highest dimension. These elders have the lowest vibration of all the Netaboruli and their minds are Eternal. They believe that the highest level of consciousness is the one closest to total dissolution into Source and the less vibration that you have, the closest you are to the level of dissolution and therefore God.- Because their bodies are based on vibration, the humans can’t see them or their spaceships, unless the human has been trained to see the subtle planes.- The Netaboruli were friends of humanity in the times of Lemuria, where and when humans had the ability to connect to the highest spheres. It was in those times that the Netaborulis brought the first dolphins to the earth and left them in our oceans that in those times had a golden vibration. But, the ties of friendship where broken when humans began to become Egocentric, and pass judgment and be possessive. It was at that point that the Netaboruli stepped back and Lemuria began to disappear to the eyes of the ignorant and Atlantis began to be created, where the abuse of technology made them lose the inner vision and the communion with the most subtle planes of existence.

Even though, the relations between humans and Netaboruli were broken, the last ones have maintained eternal vigilance over the human race. When humanity started to leave the white path, the original dolphins were pick up by the elder of the Netaborulis named Tanas, and he returned them to their original home where they still remain in special golden pools that contain the pure vibrations that existed in Lemuria, which are the most pure vibrations from the Earth and the Sun. The Netaboruli says that when the planet is ready once more, they will return the violet hue dolphins to our oceans, creating a new vibration and transforming the water to their pure original vibration. Our present day’s dolphins are a dense version from the original ones. Still, our present day dolphins emit healing tones waves and are extremely receptive to the Netaboruli’s transmit ion.- The Netaborulis also said that they are the ones that brought the first plant seeds to Earth. They say that the trees are the only living beings that never loose contact with the Universal Symphony. (Hence why the Druid tradition believe nature to be divine).- In contrast to many other civilizations of beings around the universe, the Netaboruli’s culture and civilization has been preserved intact and in perfect harmony since the beginnings of time.

May 4, 2006 (Netaboruli continued)
The densest Netaboruli travel in spaceships that are propelled by their talents in the fields of vibration, producing tiny multiwaves of sound and vibration that bounce toward the posterior parts of the spaceship. As they are Universal Healers, they have to travel in their spaceships between galaxies and planets. The Elders don’t need spaceships as they can transport themselves to great distances due to their low vibration. The less vibration, the easier for the mind to transfer the body. Their spaceships don’t have a metallic structure, and are made of tiny treads of crystal that they call magnetrityn , used to build the basic structure of the ships. When the Netaboruli board the ships, they produce a tone equivalent to their vibration of their destination, and the crystals sustain that vibration, creating a vibrational field between the treads, filling all empty spaces and sealing the ship, then expelling the excess of vibration through the back of the ship, creating propulsion. There are no steering wheels, levers, buttons or anything like that, as everything works with vibration and magnetism. Once the spaceship is magnetized by the vibration of the destination, it is magnetically attracted to the arrival point and magnetically repulsed away from the point of origin, thus creating a secondary propulsion at the one originally mentioned as a discharge.

As they know all about universal vibrations and know the vibration of all the stars, if the destination point is too far, they can allow the ship to be magnetized toward a specific star at the half way point, with a similar vibration to their destination point, and use the star’s own magnetic force to sling shot the ship to the final destination. As we mentioned before, the Netaboruli consider themselves Universal healers, as they understand that all the Universe is like a symphony of vibrations and they know how to use vibration to heal and also their deep spirituality gives them a clear knowledge about karma, even of entire galaxies and the Dharma or purpose of all beings in the Universe. The Netaboruli believe that Karma is when a body, event or condition is not in tune to the Universal Symphony. They perceive that not only the bodies have vibration, but also events, circumstances, and even time and space have the most subtle vibrations. So they consider that not only the bodies and plants can be healed, but also events and circumstances in time and space, by tuning them to the Universal Symphony. The Netaboruli understand that everything in the Universe is interdependent. They understand that this symphony of existence has a Source, but they never seek to escape into that source and dissolve in it. They know that eternally they have been that source, and to live as Source is more powerful that to dissolve in it and loose your individuality.

Only then you can experience the highest vibration in the entire Universe that is “Universal Love”. This is their highest achievement that is different from the beliefs of our yogis and some Buddhist that seek liberation in the Absolute or Source and total dissolution in the Divine Consciousness or Nirvana or Brahman. The Netaboruli believe that this attitude is only for those that have not been able to develop their hearts fully, as they know that the Source is always present and they don’t want to exclude Creation, but on the contrary, they want to include it as part of their  “Totality”.

Then, the level of vibration closest to the dissolution in Source, is where you experience the highest and purest love of all, as in this point, they are fully manifested and almost dissolve at the same time. The eldest Netaboruli’s Avatar named Remukala Tanas said once: “Love Rules All”. The Netaboruli are helping us maintain the vibration balance for all the planet. As we mention before, there is a war of vibration occurring at inner levels. There are forces misaligned with the Universal symphony that are manipulating the planet with their own vibration and even humanity with their own, out of tune vibration in the lower psychic levels are part of this vibrational tension. So, the Netaborulis are assisting us to sustain the right vibration, so it won’t be lost at the most fundamental vibration level. They say, that the humans can easily listen to the Universal Symphony if they follow a discipline routine of meditation, but to really understand the vibration pulse, it could take thousands of years or more. Their race is the Originator of all the meditation techniques based on vibration, tones, and mantras or sounds. The meditation technique that they propose is the simplest one we have ever heard. They say: (Take time to go out to an open space, close to “Nature” if possible, and “Understand” that the Universe and you are “connected”. Keep silence and allow that the tuning with the Universal Symphony to occur. Is that simple!

May 16, 2006 (Netaboruli continued)
The more humanity begins to tune to the Universal Symphony, the easier it will be for the planet to also tune. In that way the final transcendence will happen. So, just relax and try to feel the vibration in the heart, and don’t look for the Universal Symphony with the senses, just feel the vibration. If you can’t go outside to meditate, you can find an empty room in your house and lie down and relax. Make surethat there are no electromagnetic devices in that room, because electromagnetism acts as a shield that breaks the vibrational waves and distorts them. Imagine that the ceiling of the room disappears and in its place, an open sky. Relax and allow the tuning to happen.

These vibrations are being transmitted all over the solar system and beyond. The Netaboruli transmit them through their glorious skins and pores that act as transmitters, although the vibrations originated in their hearts. Just relax and tune to this wonderful universal vibration that already exists where you are now. You already know that the transmission is ongoing throughout the solar system, you just need to tune in. The human mind at its root is simple- a universal antenna that can receive all. This aspect of the mind is perfect and divine, and will never change unless the human in the final transition wants to dissolve the mind into the Divine Consciousness or Source, or dissolve the owner of the mind as the Netaborulis say.

The Netaborulis priority is the Universal Symphony, although they support any technology based on vibration that is in harmony with the Universal Symphony, as they understand that the universe has many dimensions and that there is a tool in every dimension for every mind. The Universal Symphony or Auniversam OUM, is the same that our mystics named AUM [“om”]. Knowing the existence of the sound is not the most important thing, but the vibration behind the sound is what matters.

As the Netaboruli Avatar Ramukala Tanas taught: “Behind each sound there is a subtle vibration”. The Netaboruli said they have some connection with the gods of the Native American (North and South) Tradition, as they believe these gods are the most connected to humanity. They said that the gods of other traditions like Egyptian, Norse, Kabalistic and others, are not originally from this planet and don’t have the clue for the final transition of the Earth.

The Netaboruli also work very close to the Ascended Masters of our planet, as their purpose is the same. The Ascended Master act as filter for this symphony and vibration, doing the necessary modifications as the original vibrations would be too strong for humanity to handle. The Ascended Master know at a very deep level human behavior and its tendencies, so they can adapt the transmition to get the best and safest result. So, if you are going to pray or meditate, it’s better to work with an Ascended Master that an ET.

The Netaborulis have no direct connection to the human lineage on this planet, and they assist us not because of a lineage connection, but because they understand humanity’s need to heal and evolve. Not only do they assist us through our Ascended Masters, but they protect us from other extraterrestrial races, like the Zeta Reticuli and other grays, creating enormous shields of vibration around the big cities of the world and even stronger shields around some special mountains. Now it is easy to understand why the abductions that the Zetas perform, mostly occur in open spaces beyond the perimeters of the big cities.

Balance is not about good and evil as humans understand it, but it’s all about tuning into the Universal Symphony. The Netaboruli can control the deposits of light inside their bodies and release them to be transferred to another being, creating instantaneous changes. In the case of the Zetas, they make them realize the consequences of their bad actions, not by showing them or telling them, but rather by allowing them an opening in their hearts, so they can feel with their own hearts, the unbalance that they have created. It makes the Zetas conscious of their wrongful actions, so they can reexamine their lives, and begin the path of harmony that should exist in all creation.
..
When the Netaboruli open the Zetas’ hearts, their mind is free and this allows a release from the chemicals that control them, implanted by other species. Even though these chemicals continue in their bodies, the experience of an open heart is so strong, that the host can find the will to overcome the chemicals negative influence and neutralize them. This procedure has produced great results; so good, that many Zetas have left their peers and created a small base on Mars, where slowly they are getting together and growing in numbers, to leave the solar system at a later time.

June 6, 2006 (final installment on the Netaboruli)

The Netaboruli are the only Extraterrestrials that classified themselves as Trans-multidimensional. That means that they not only have members of their species in “every dimension of creation”, but even in parallel universes. Their Avatar Tanas was the first one of their species to reach the spiritual level that they named “Trans-multidimensional Diversity”. That means that he can maintain a balance quantity of his total vibration in each atom that exists in the universe. To put it in Vedic terms, we know of the following progressive levels of Consciousness Enlightenment; Cosmic Consciousness, God Consciousness, Unity Consciousness, Brahman Consciousness, Krishna Consciousness. Krishna level may be equated to Trans-multidimensional Diversity. On this planet, only Krishna of course and probably Moses had reached that level. We have to understand one thing about the Netaboruli: they have been Eternally manifested and their minds are Eternal. They have never dissolved in Nirvana, Source or the Absolute. There has never been a time when they have not been Enlightened. Their reality is Eternal: no beginning, no end, no notions of time and space -only Eternity. They live in the NOW and they have no goal or objective but to tune to the Universal Symphony and they allow whatever transition from one level to the next happen, just by tuning to this Symphony.

The final transition to Trans-multidimensional Diversity can take a Netaboruli one year or 20 millions years. It does not depend on them, but it’s up to the Universal Symphony. The general population of the Netaboruli live in Unity Consciousness and it doesn’t’t matter in what tribe or dimension they are, they are all ONE.

They don’t possess any powers, nor are they active in the Creating part of the universe, as from their perspective, it is something that naturally occurs, thanks to this Universal Tone. But they can co-create if they need, amplifying their frequencies or vibrations of creation and tune to the type of vibrational being they want to create. But this is not their function, as there are other species doing that who don’t work with vibration, but with light. This is not an ego based race seeking power. It is s a divine species, sublime and very, very spiritual; a true role model of harmony and perfection for the universe.

Their powerful transmissions of energy and vibration are reaching more and more on our planet. In the coming years, this new process will start to change  our species from carbon based to silicon (or crystal) based. Changes in DNA and mind structures will happen. Their last transmission was on March 11, 2004, when through the Polar star, they sent a transmission to begin restructuring the old genetic codes. At the end of this transmission, we will jump from having 2 pair of genetic chains to 12 pairs of genetic chains [DNA strands].

The Polar star transmission will last for 300 years. In the near future, the Vega star will also begin a new transmission to assist genetic restructuring. The next available transmission for those that want to consciously share their life force in this process will be on October the 8th, 2006 at 4 pm  Eastern Standard time and will last for 3 hours. Just lay down on the floor in the outdoors if possible and place your bare feet in the direction of the polar Star. Relax and enjoy the sunset.-

Other Extraterrestrial Groups

Part 14 (Oct. 2, 2006)

Extraterrestrial Cosmic Beings

These Divine Beings are the most advanced extraterrestrials that are visiting our planet now. They have no form and live in the 7th and 8th dimensions. In the 7th, they look like fluctuating geometric forms and in the 8th, they basically have no form and their bodies look like a radiant transparent clouds. They are purely spiritual beings and with great powers.

They have no spaceships as they transport by thought. They are beings of pure love and see us as their little lost brothers. These beings are not Ascended Masters, but Cosmic Beings and they act as Universal Archetypes looking within themselves.

They don’t need planets to live and if they were to need one, they just could manifest one at will. These beings represent entire galaxies and are here simply because we are within them. They could ascend the planet with a blinking of an eye, but that would kill us all as we are not ready.

These are the hardest Et masters to comprehend and there is not much to say about them. They work with all the extraterrestrials on this planet, even the evil ones, as their love has no limits. Even though they are cosmic in nature, they still have individuality and can still differentiate from each other.

In this moment, there are three cosmic ET beings assisting the planet and their names are: Alkarius, Zentririus and Melkarinius. To assist us in the process of ascension, they recommend humanity to use and the intellectual and feeling process. For example ask your self:

How can I connect to Alkarius?…………………..Feel
Is Zentririus working with me?…………………….Feel
Is Melkarinius teaching me something?………….Feel

This is what they propose as a spiritual practice. This all we could get from them at this time and still make some sense to our human minds.

Conclusion of the ET Saga

During these times of havoc, humanity is coming to the point where decisions have to be made in order to prevail against the dark forces that have been dwelling within us, since the beginning of this era. It is true that these forces have been controlling us since time immemorial, but that is because we have failed to gain the true knowledge of our reality. Now there is so much to tell about the possibilities that lie ahead for us when thinking about the enormous odds that we are confronting us against an invisible enemy that is hiding behind the wall of injustice, as true freedom is being negated for all of us.

These extraterrestrial beings are here for many purposes as you have read before, but knowledge is power and how you use that knowledge makes a big difference in the outcome of this enigmatic part of our history. We can prevail against this foe, if we but claim unity ourselves in one voice against the obvious cover-up behind these lies that others are telling us about the existence of these beings.

Yet, it is not our place to judge or to pass judgment to those that are so blind as to see that they are but puppets in this mystery of the rebellion against human will, to act and to be free. Dominion over the planet Earth is imminent if we are to do nothing. Action is the only way to overcome the odds that others has been piling up against our families, friends and countries.

The interest of these negative beings are far from being honest as you have read, but there is more to their agendas than what we have been able to reveal. There is hope in knowing that there are other superior beings willing to give their all to defend us in this injustice. But, is not up to them to win the battle, as is in our own nature to be able to prevail against the dark forces that are about us.

Not by war, but by Peace.

Not by being violent, but by cultivating a spirit of Brotherhood and Love.

The war is won in the heart of each and every one of us. There is no technology, no matter how far superior, that can eradicate the human spirit, if only we are to believe in our own Divine right to be Free.

So, it is time to rise up against all this injustice and these cover-ups that are just misleading humanity. It is not your job to make others believe in this stories, as only one can unveil truth by himself, but it is your job first to seek freedom within yourself and then show the way to others.

When there is no mind to conquer, there is nothing to gain. Free yourselves from the bondage of the mind and allow your true self divine expression to blaze through this darkness that is but a mere illusion in this world. There is nothing more to say, but to uplift your spirits and your love to new heights, where none can touch you as you are free in your heart and in your soul. Divinity is the open door to overcome illusion and it is but in front of your eyes when you look at a mirror.

Behind that wall of fake appearances lies the true nature of your divine soul, eternally free and ever self- sustained. No extraterrestrial, no matter how mighty his powers may be, can conquer your free spirit that is living beyond the illusion of the human mind…

Blessings for you all and may we walk the White Path of Truth and Freedom as Love opens all the ways.

Love Willy and Andy.-

Source

Further Insights on Alien Groups, Part 11

And the story continues…

alien-woman-head

From Willy and Andy
http://educate-yourself.org/cn/zetainfoC17feb06.shtml
February 16, 2006

Part 11

Tibetan Extraterrestrial Beings

We were not able to get the name of these Extraterrestrial beings, but we call them the Tibetan Ets as that is the location where their base is on our planet. They have an enormous Space ship, made from the purest crystal, which is the size of a major city, and located under ground, below the highest mountains of Tibet.

The Tibetan Ets have a human appearance, but have no hair and their skulls are more elongated. These Ets are 5th Dimensional beings who always dress in white tunics, to show the commitment to purity.  The only purpose for them to be here on the planet, is to assist us to ascend towards the 5th dimension and get the planet ready to enter the Photon Belt, when the ascension process will be accelerated.  They know the importance of Earth’s Ascension as when it happens, the whole solar System will ascend too, and of course, they perceive that this event will affect the whole galaxy- indeed and even the Universe.

Their gigantic spaceship is connected to all the Planetary Chakras. Yes, the planet has chakras as we human do, as is a living being. These chakras can be found in the physical world as great accumulations of crystal, deep under the planet, where the Ets have constructed great quartz pyramids around these areas to create magnetic energy fields that assist to transmit, receive and channel the Ascension vibrations for our planet.

Each quartz pyramid is compose of many other pyramids interlaces, some with the apex upwards and other downwards, fitting perfectly with each other until the big pyramid is formed.  They show us this clearly, maybe they want someone to build them in any size, as they can become a focal point for powerful energies the Ets bring from the 5th dimension.-

These beings are Masters of working with quartz crystal and the have no equal in the universe in this field. They can transform quartz crystal into liquid, without losing its properties, making them into a brilliant and vibrant elixir that they drink for many purposes.

When they drink this liquid the vibrations are raise and using the crystal made ships they can travel great distances in seconds. When they get into the ship, they mentally project the image where they want to go and due to the high vibration the ship is transported to its destination. Remember this happens in the 5th dimension, and is a supramental process that allows this displacement. This elixir has many applications such as: When the ETs form a circle and drink this nectar, they can fusion their bodies with each other until there is only one individual remaining, composed of hundreds or thousands of them- The first individual that serve as vessel keeps his mental awareness while the others start to receive his mental impressions in their minds through vibration and energy.

They use this technique for many purposes and one of them is to manifest in the third dimension. When so many masses are in one place, the density is lowerd, and the remaining individual’s body vibration can be lowered to the point that it can manifest in the 3rd Dimension.

In this way, they can interact with the 3rd dimension and they can assess in a more objective way, how their energies are affecting the physical world. If for any chance they are seen by a human being, they just release their bodies from the unity, returning to the 5th dimension and to each one individuality.

They come from a mega solar system, bigger than any of you can imagine.  Their sun is bigger than our entire solar system, and around that Titan sun, many other suns rotate, still bigger than our own sun. In the farthest sun from the main central sun, there is a crystal planet, and that is their home. Their planet looks like a crystal sphere, and reflects the light of all the other suns making it even more brilliant than the suns by themselves. Again, this is a 5th dimensional phenomena, where they are not limited by the same laws of our physical universe.

There comes a time when all the suns are aligned with the planet and in that moment a great discharge of energy occurs which produces a great beam of light that goes through the sun and penetrates the planet, that like a crystal, divides this beam into many colors and vibrations that are directed, in turn, to our planet where they are received and processed by the great space ship and the pyramids, to assist our planet in the Ascension process.

Also in this moment of high vibration, they use their planet in the same way as a mystic magician would use a crystal ball. All the Ets go around the planet and look into the sphere where they can see all the universe and beings, and it is in this way that they find out where they are needed next to assist other civilization to transcend into the 5th dimension.

The more enlightened Buddhist Tibetan monks have had contact with these beings and work together with them. The Monks balance all the negative energies that are attracted to this focal point of light, while the Ets expand the light through the planet. –  That pact was done millenniums ago by humanity, that when the planet was to be ready to ascend, the Ets would come, but we were to balance the negative part.- (This makes you understand why the evil forces, promoted the invasion of Tibet to control and eventually displace many of the monks. Of course, the Dalai Lama relocated to a very strategic place in India to continue their work for sure, nonetheless it is not the same as before.- Free Tibet!)

In the times of Lemuria, our Planet was on the 5th dimension and when Atlantis appeared, the Planet descended to the 4th dimension. In the last days of Atlantis, 100.000 years ago, these Ets tried to assist that civilization from descending into the 3rd dimension, not to be lost in total ignorance, and at least be in an etheric plane.  So, they created the Pyramids of Egypt that originally where build in pure crystal and existed in the 4th dimension, but human karma was too heavy and although the pyramids created high vibrations, it was not powerful enough. The pyramid couldn’t hold the fall to the 3rd dimension, and the final descent occurred. The pyramids descended with the planet too, as they were connected to the planetary grids and axiatonal lines.  When that happened the pyramids materialized in the rocks and stones that we see now. In recent times archeologist and scientist have discovered an unusual concentration of quartz crystal in the stones of the great pyramids. This was the main purpose of the pyramids as shown by these Ets.

All of their technology is designed to spiritually assist the Earth and they have almost no spiritual technologies for personal application.-  The one spiritual technology that they seem to use the most is they create a bowl from the most pure quartz, and touching the bowl will create tones ever so higher in sound and vibration, thus increasing their own vibrations. The entire Universe is about vibration.

We can see the same concept in the Tibetan Bowls that are made of bronze and other metals and are used for their meditations or chanting. In the New Age market you can find some of these bowls made of pulverized quartz, an idea closer of what the Ets use. The Tibetan Ets show us that if one of these bowls is made from very pure quartz, we mean cut or sculpted from a solid quarts stone, would make that when the bowl is play (as the Tibetan monks do), that the molecules started to come closer and closer, discharging a high vibration that would play beyond our ear’s range, and the sound would disappear, being replaced by a vibration so powerful that will stimulate the brain, opening anyone’s consciousness to see higher planes of reality; almost like a psychedelic technology. – (We don’t know if we have the technology to cut/sculpt a bowl from quartz or even if there is quartz big enough to do that).-

To be continued.. 

Willy and Andy

Source

Insights on Zeta Reticulans and other Alien Groups, Part 5 -10

Continues from latest post…

 mantis

Insights on Zeta Reticulans and other Alien Groups, Part 5 -10

From Willy and Andy
http://educate-yourself.org/cn/zetainfoB23sep05.shtml
September 23, 2005

Ferget Melangus (Praying Mantis aliens) / Yukonadious (a Gray alien group) / Aeronians / Xexonitilus / Beltanicus / Herudians

Part 5

In our last letter, we revealed in a nut shell the big Extraterrestrial conspiracy behind the veils. We have experienced many of their attacks to prevent us from divulging this kind of information to the public. Those attacks only served to confirm that the information we were getting was real; so instead of stopping us, it just made us more determined and confident.

We learned that the Zeta Reticuli are being controlled by the insect-like ETs named the Ferget Melangus. As we said before, their physical appearance is very similar to our native insect, the Praying Mantis. The Ferget Melangus are very difficult to detect as they produce specific signals that serve as a camouflage for everything they do.

Ferget Melangus (Sep. 23)

They hierarchy is very similar to the one used by every organized insect colony. Basically, there are 4 types of different insect- like ETs. First, we found the Queens, which basically place the eggs and control the entire colony. Second, are the Mentalist that are the ones controlling the Zeta Reticuli. These Ets have bigger heads, antennas on their heads, and long arms ad legs. Third, there are the Workers that are smaller, but stronger and heavier built. This group has no antennas and are usually found working in mine fields and other heavy labors. Fourth, we find the Servants. The servants are a mutation between the Ferget Melangus and the Zeta Reticuli. This mutation is done only at the brain level, so they still keep the same physical appearance.

This Ets are not like our insects for sure, because they are supremely intelligent and posses a higher mental development than us. Also, they have the innate ability to control other beings, not only with their minds, but also using natural chemicals that they produce in their own bodies. Even though their minds are highly develop, they don’t have rational thought, but instinct impulses that are activated by numerous chemicals in their bodies, everything carefully supervised by a higher mind (Demons) that transmits through the queens. It is very difficult for the human mind to comprehend, but this nature of their mind has helped them to be a superior race over many others in different parts of the universe.

The Ferget Melangus do not seek political or social control over other beings. They don’t have desires of conquest as we human beings have had in our history. They feel by instinct that their true essence and existence in not their bodies or their minds, but their own natural chemicals.

Their experience is that if their chemicals survive in another host, even is if is from a different species, their own existence will continue. For this reason they need the Zeta Reticuli, because through them, they are trying to find a balance or mutation in humanity, so they can insert their chemical DNA in our bodies, without killing the host. So, they don’t want to take over the planet like we conventionally think or like the Zetas or Yukonadios want, but they want to take over our species from inside. This ET Specie only will be satisfiied if they can propagate their chemical DNA among humans and make sure that their chemical information passes from generation to generation in our genes. In time, this chemical will affect the host at a cellular level and will eventually create a mutation, even if it take hundreds or thousands of generations, and creating in this way, a new species of insects that is parallel or equal to theirs. The Ferget Melangus that are on the planet now, are not pure blood, but a mutation that occurred in another species that was transformed to what we described before.

The original species had a more humanoid look. Originally, they were created millions of years ago by the Demons, using very complex scientific methods during the last periods of what was call the Orion War. (That war is briefly described in the Bible as the Fall of the angels, but it is just a tiny description of what truly happened). The Demons wanted to create a very strong army based on pure instincts, to allow them to have victory on the physical plane. This is the reason why this species of Ets, and their mutations, have an innate susceptibility to be controlled by Demons.

Ultimately, behind any kind of evil, if you follow the chain, you are going to find the Demons. They began the conflict of good and evil from the beginning and even though the War ended many millions of years ago, they continue to plot and the desire supremacy over all of God’s creation for their own.-


Part 6

The Yukonadious (Sep. 27)

This is another Extraterrestrial species of the Gray kind. – There is not much that we know about them as they are very secretive about their plans and try to conceal all that they do. Nonetheless, they are as active as the Zetas on our planet, and maybe even more dangerous and a bigger threat to humanity.

Technologically speaking, the Yukonadious are even more advanced than the Zeta reticuland. These kind of Gray ETs are very intimidating as they have a bellicose and explosive nature; to the point that even the Zeta Reticuli want to avoid them, using camouflage all the time to avoid being perceived by them and take great care not to invade their air space.

The Yukonadious are physical beings that look much like a hybrid between the Zetas and Humans (but they are not), and have a more threatening appearance. From our standards of beauty, they are ugly as you can imagine. If you add to their looks (they look much like the ET that appeared in the last part of the movie Aliens: the Resurrection, as the hybrid between humans and the Aliens) that they are a little over 11 feet tall, with extremely long arms that reach all the way under their knees, you can start to get the feeling that they are one ET that your don’t want to encounter- not even by chance.

Their have the same big plans as the previous described ETs: to control and conquer the Universe. They are also controlled by the same demonic forces trying to take over the planet, and without a doubt, they are the biggest threat to our planet. The Yukonadious are too proud to admit that their ideas about chaos and destruction are not theirs alone, but are controlled somehow by the demonic forces. They believe that the have their own agenda and nobody influences them, as the form of their skulls is very peculiar and specially designed not to allow any mental waves to penetrate the brain. In this way, they cannot be controlled by any other species, but their hearts can be influenced by evil forces.

Their space ships are very luminous (in contrast to the plain metal look of the Zetas) due to their advanced scientific technologies in the area of Electro-magnetism. At first sight, someone may think that the ships are made of light, but there are not- as they are made of physical materials. Most their ships have a triangular shape (similar to the stealth bomber), but more futuristic.

The Yukonadious also are making massive mental waves broadcasts with the purpose of controlling human kind. Due to their own morbid and violent nature, their transmissions contain specific impulses that stimulate violence in human beings. Like any beings who consider themselves superior, they think others have to be like them and adapt to their views about the way they view life and the universe.

They have underground bases under many mountains, like in the Andes all the way South to Patagonia and in many other locations around the world from where they do their transmissions. Most of the violent countries around the world are subliminally under their mind waves control. They are especially active in South America in countries like Colombia and Peru, in Central America, in Mexico, in Africa. and the Middle East. – Their impact is very clear and real on many countries, but totally invisible to human eyes. Many countries suffer terribly due to their presence.

We have talked a lot about transmissions from Ets to humanity. The transmission of each species is different and they don’t interfere, one with the other. For example, if we look at this transmissions from the energetic psychic point of view, we might describe that the Yukonadious mental wave transmissions look like an Orange-red radiation of high frequency. The purpose is to promote violence in the planet and morbid behavior in humans and society at large.

As you can see, all ETs that are on the planet, transmit mental waves to humanity.

A) For example, the Zetas transmit a Low, dark Green color radiation to close down human hearts and promote rational cold thoughts.

B) There is even a powerful demonic transmission from the hells (from which the planet is well protected) that only evil individuals or black magicians can receive.

C) In contrast, the angels transmit a beautiful golden-yellow,

D) the Earth Elementals a Beautiful light green,

E) Ascended master from Orion transmit in a bright Violet Blue,

F) the Earth (Gaia) in a deep ocean blue color, etc.

So as you can see, there is a war going on in the heavens (as said in the Bible), but it is a war of vibrations.

The Yukonadious have a great facility to adapt to cold weather. So they have constructed a big base at the South Pole that serves as the central source to accumulate natural resources. They have great machines that process hydrogen that is used for their cooling systems. One of the many purposes that these ETs have is to exploit all of the natural resources from this planet that they need and are trying to adapt this planet to make it more hospitable for their own species. They are unconsciously here for a spiritual reason, but they ignore that, and believe that they are here for the sole purpose of conquering the planet. As we were saying, they are working from their base at the South Pole to change our climate and environment to reach their goal, but there are other good extraterrestrials who are balancing out the mischief that they create.

The Yukonadious also practice the abduction of humans, but not for the purpose of doing scientific experiments. they want to brainwash their victims and make them perform certain functions to serve their ends (they also practice some sexual acts with the abductees) These Extraterrestrial are savage and attack without mercy. They are fierce enemies in combat and are feared by many other species in the universe. Their bellicose nature is due in part to their long history of fighting, survival and suffering. They were extremely abused by an ancient civilization, already extinct at this time. Pain is at the root of their hearts and the time is coming for them to balance all the karma that was created, even though they can’t comprehend it and don’t believe it to be so. They are so blinded by their goal of dominion, that the Intergalactic Federation of United Solar Systems is considering the expulsion of these Ets from our planet. Until then, we have to learn to defend against them and their big threat to our survival as a species. Especially our South American countries suffer daily under their relentless attacks that promote violence and instability.

The Yukonadious have a great weakness that we discovered that we can use to expel them from our planet. – Like we wrote before, the Yukonadious are great telepaths, probably more than the Zetas, to the point that they can know what you are going to think before you become aware of your own thoughts. .Thus, they can produce incredibly powerful mental waves to manipulate humanity behind the veils.

Being so mentally powerful, however, has a disadvantage in their case:

They can receive the transmissions of human mental thoughts and they can’t avoid or block human transmissions from being received.

That’s why there are so secretive about their existence. Because humanity does not know of their existence and ignores them, there are almost no thoughts being directed towards them at this point (but that will change thanks to Ken’s generosity of making this letters available to millions),

Now that their existence is being revealed for the first time, more and more humans are going to start to thinking about them and their existence and our thoughts are going to begin to overflow their minds, to the point that hopefully they won’t be able to tolerate the thoughts generated by thousand or millions of humans and they will have to leave our countries and eventually our planet.

It’s time for them to lose their main advantage over us and reveal their presence to anyone who is willing to learn about their existence. That’s all that is needed for our thoughts to get to them. Imagine your mind full of thousands of thoughts- not of your own. Enough to drive you away we think! They have attacked my brother and I without mercy to prevent us from revealing their presence, but thank God, for other good ETs, we where able to preserve and overcome the odds to provide this important information


Part 7

The Aeronians (Sep. 29)

Now that we finished with the grim description of the Extraterrestrial beings trying to manipulate, control and conquer humanity, it’s now time to mention one of the many good Extraterrestrial beings that are assisting us to prevent the evil Ets from fulfilling their missions. The Aeorians are one of these friendly Extraterrestrials supporting humanity in these times of transition. The most incredible feature of this Extraterrestrial is that they’re human, exactly like us. (But they are not originally from Earth-and that makes you wonder if we are).

One of the things that surpriseed us was to find out that their way of life and technologies are very similar to the ones portrayed in the famous TV show Star Trek. Their great ships are all around our planet, made invisible by energy fields that bend the light. The Aeorians are at the same level of spiritual evolution as we are, but their technology is light years ahead of our times. They are the most active Extraterrestrials on the planet as their human appearance allows them to integrate into our society and be in any position they desire (so here you just can imagine how many organizations and governments they may be involved with). They are not here for the purpose of conquest or dominion, but merely for spiritual reasons.

They help us every time they can, but they do it using their human judgment, and you know that human judgment is not always perfect. Most of the plots created by the Zetas and Yukonadious are disassembled by the Aeorians. If the Yuko’s try a massive change in the atmosphere by using chemicals they neutralize their substances. If the Zetas try to invade the space of a big city or abduct people who are flying on commercial planes (that’s the way they change their clones for humans) they intercept their attempts… and so on.

Their original planet was named Aeron, but now they live in small human colonies on different planets. Their Ascended Masters and Enlightened masters guided them to come to our planet so they can eventually live here. But, before that happens, they have to wait for the Earth’s Ascension. They are here to understand and live through the Ascension process and pick up the vibrations and experience in order to later reunite with their own brothers and sisters scattered over 10 different solar systems. Their total number does not exceed 10 million as they are the only survivors of their original planet.

The Aeorians are the most independent Extraterrestrials on our planet now and also posses the highest and most sophisticated technology of all the third Dimensional Ets. Of course, they have the greatest and most powerful military arsenal of all. That’s why the Zetas and Yukos respect them. Plus the humans have a more refined camouflage technology and they posses an energetic shield that prevents mental waves from penetrating their ships. If there were to be a military encounter between them and the Zetas or Yukos, the humans would come out on top easily. Of course, the Aeorian can’t act freely and run them out of the planet, as they are guided by superior Ets Beings from higher dimensions and also they are regulated by the Intergalactic Federation of United Solar System of which they are a part of.

Even though they are humans like us and about at the same level of spirituality, their moral and ethical values are much, much more refined than ours, and that alone has allowed them to survive as a race for so long after the destruction of their planet in the famous Orion War. Maybe by now, knowing about their presence, earth human minds can open up in order to establish a more direct communication with them. ( which is the worst fear for many organized religions).

Part 8

The Xexonitilus (Oct. 4 & 5)

These beautiful and very harmonious extraterrestrials are assisting our planet in a very direct and specific way. The evolution of their planet is deeply linked to our planet and our own planetary ascension process that without a doubt will occur simultaneously with their own planetary ascension.

This extraterrestrials are physical beings, with multicolor skin in many hues and interlace in the following way: Their hands are gray, which going up to the arms turn purple and then change to a nice pink tone; at the neck, the color becomes blue to finish on the face as a beautiful blue/golden color. Their heads are elongated and have no hair and their ears are long and pointy. The Xexonitilus have a big oriental type shape to their eyes and the iris is multicolored in concentric hues. From the outside to the pupil of the eye, the iris colors are light red, then yellow, orange, green, blue, violet and black- This race not only exists in the third dimension, but also simultaneously in other dimensions. Their clothes reminded us of our old tunics from ancient Greece. These tunics have many small crystals inlaid and the appearance of the material is a metallic fabric. They walk bare foot and their singular feet only have 3 toes.

The Xexonitilus breathe pure oxygen and curiously exhale pure oxygen too. It seems that breathing for them is a rue pranic function or to move vital energies through their bodies. A combined atmosphere like ours could be lethal for them. They grow their own plants that in turn are converted into vibrant green nectar, almost luminous and very high in nutrients that keep their physical bodies in perfect health. The life span of these Ets is around 2000 of our years. We have a glimpse that they reproduce placing their hands together initiating a type of mitosis process, creating in that way another being. Totally different of our ways of reproduction for sure.

The Xexonitilus are the ones that create the world famous Crop Circles. These marvelous geometric symbols have appeared in many countries around the world and nobody really knows until now their purpose and function. The Ets revealed to as that those are sacred symbols for the purpose to initiate and active the whole planet to assist in the Ascension process. The symbols activate natural universal energies that serve as a link to other energies they bring to our planet. Using their ships the form this symbols that are in fact a Cosmic Activation that not only occur in the physical level but at etheric, astral ,mental and higher planetary levels. Our planet is a living being and also has many subtle bodies like us. Some symbols serve as seals of protection, while others are communications to humanity about changes to come. The Xexonitilus said that there will be a massive planetary activation for the year 2012. As you can see their work is at a planetary level and no just concerned just with humans as individual. All they do is for all of us as we are part of the planet as a cell is part of your body.

The Xexonitilus comes from a planet that exists in the Galaxy X9. Their planet provides an exquisite view from space as all the surface of the planet is full of symbols. They build an immense hall that divides the planet in two, in which they carve all the symbols from all the extraterrestrial civilizations you can imagine. All the symbols that their species have been able to cognize through their intellect have to do with planetary activations and DNA structures.- The Xexonitilus spend most of their life getting detail instructions about the understanding and perfect use of each symbol and the correct ways to use it.

Their ships are propelled by a blue bright energy plasma, that serve as fuel for their interstellar trips- These ships look like an art gallery inside with thousands of symbols symbols and multiversal logos.

These Ets are highly spiritual advanced and all their symbology is sacred for pure purposes. Their spiritual practice is based on deep meditation on the most basic divine vibrations or sound pulses that are beyond all the dimensions of creation. Those vibrations have been perceived also by some of the most enlightened Yogis and mystics on our planet and have been named as Bija-Mantras and most of them are written down in the holy Hindu (Barath) books named the Vedas- Each of these divine pulses gave origin to one aspect of the whole creation and the Xexonitilus in their meditations connect with these pulses to transcend all the mental levels and enter into the Absolute Field of Pure Consciousness.

Their government is nothing like ours, as they have a main Council with 12 members (all of them Enlightened Beings) which make the most important decisions for their civilization- But there are many other smaller types of councils dedicated to only one function. For example, if one planet needs specific activations, the Council of Planetary Activations is consulted, but if the activations are geared towards the beings of one planet, they have to go to another council. If the symbols have a message coded they have to go to another council. There is a council of ET psychics that are dedicated to writing symbols, that predict events to come or warnings to specific ET races to prevent them from making serious mistakes in their evolution. In short, there are councils for Archetypal Activations at Cosmic Level, Planetary Ascensions, for the Inhabitants, Technologies, Sciences, Spiritual Technologies, and even a Council for War prevention. Even though they are a peaceful race, they have an army of enemies (like the Zetas and Yukos and many others) who may be a threat to them at any time. Their race suffered great loses in the famous Orion War (the biggest war ever in the Universe). The remaining councils are the coordinators for secret dispensations and Intergalactic Initiations. Their main council makes their decisions guided by their own Ascended Masters.

They advise that the best way for humanity to cooperate with their work is to keep them in our mind and conscious awareness, and to understand that our planet is being assisted by them and to know of their presence. That’s all that’s needed.

Part 9

The Beltanicus (Oct. 12 & 18)

Of the many beings that have been created from the heart and imagination of God, the Beltanicus race is an inspiration to all who admire the qualities of innocence, purity and humility. When the Creator wanted to admire his creation through the eyes of a child, his inspiration was the impulse to create these noble beings. We humans were like them (ages ago), but now we can only perceive the creation in duality and with opinions and judgment.

The Beltanicus was the last ET race that we contacted that exists in the physical plane. Their eyes have a nice pale gray hue, and their bodies are thin, with a long head, small nose, big ears, eastern-like big eyes, and as tall as humans. Their appearance is very sweet, and very inviting to open the heart to share with them as children (A unique type of Gray ET). The bodies have the ability to breath different atmospheres, including ours and they also eat, but no physical foods. They feed on a form of energy transfer that is ingested through their mouth and goes directly to their cells. They have a long life spam, but not as long as other ET races. However, they can live up to 350 terrestrial years. Their species are heterosexuals, but are no limited to only one sex and they can change from male to female and vice versa. any time the want. Even though they are physical beings, they have a great ability to control and keep their bodies pure, as we mentioned before, they feed from energy found in nature or even produce it by technological means, instead of processing food into energy as we do.

The Beltanicus have no sexual intercourse as they are too innocent to feel those instinctual impulses. If they want to procreate they just choose a partner from the opposite sex and place their hearts together, creating an energetic momentum where the masculine energy is transfered to the feminine initiating then the conception of a new being.

They don’t use space ships to travel (although they do have them), but utilize a system of portals to transport themselves. They are very shy by nature and the epitome of innocence. As a race they are universal explorers and they collect living samples, rocks, crystals, plants from all the cosmos. When they do this they do it with such a delicacy and softness that they wouldn’t dare to hurt an ant in the process. Everything that is picked up is taken to their planet where they recreate the environment for all the species on the road to extinction, so they can preserve and nurture them in a natural habitat. Many extinct species from many planets of the universe can be found there. (We didn’t see it, but probably our dinosaurs are part of their cosmic zoo).

The Beltanicus are the ones that warranty the survival of many beings as species. When the civilization of any planet is on the road to auto destruction or going through a very difficult period of evolution which will endanger their survival as a whole, the Beltanicus arrive to collect the specimens they need (That makes you think that if they are here on Earth, it is a clear warning that we are on a path to self destruction either by war, or conspiracies or natural disasters).

The Beltanicus never abduct or take an intelligent being against their free will. For these incredibly innocent Ets, Nature is divine, and that is their drive- to preserve all the different manifestations of Nature through the universe.

Another type of tool that they have to explore the universe that surrounds them in a more intimate way is by using their ability to transfer all their essence to a being’s body, with the purpose of observing and learning, but they never take control in any way over the host. The Beltanicus are highly spiritually developed, but they are so innocent that they don’t even know this fact. Their innocence is so great as to be able to analyze anything related to spirituality or to create a belief system about God and the Universe. Their hearts are extremely developed, even for their thin bodies. We don’t mean the physical heart, but the spiritual heart that is totally open and in communion with the Universe and Nature. All of their actions are 100% intuitive and innocentss, creating deep connections with each other, beyond ideas and perceptions.

The Beltanicus have no thoughts and don’t have conceptual thinking, but vibrational thinking without any context of intellectuality. (We humans can’t conceive of this yet). Their mission in the universe has not been imposed by anyone or a higher being, because they act based on pure intuition and the Universe guides them to act the way they do. They are like a “back up” so that none of the wonderful species that the universe has created should be lost forever.

In the epitome of their innocence, they don’t even know that they are called by the name “Beltanicus”, because their great hearts allow them to directly see the meaning of things and not the name or form of them. If someday you have the fortune to encounter one of these beings, do not talk to them, only radiate your pure intentions to them, without hiding anything. If you hold back they will sense deception and will immediately hide. Remember, they are like children, but with a great perception about the feeling in all beings.

As we wrote before, the Beltanicus don’t need spaceships to travel to here as they have several portals that transport them directly to our planet.- Only they can use these portals, because these are well protected and are designed to recognize the Beltanicus DNA. In this way, the portal cannot be activated by any other species. One of the security systems of these portals is they are invisible and not even the Beltanicus can see them. To use them, they allow themselves to be guided by their great intuition to find them and they never fail to find them. With this system of portals, they can transport from their planet to the middle of one of our forest, or mountains, or anywhere else. It’s like a hole that opens in the fabric of time and space allows them to see their destination. It’s as easy as stepping through a door that can take them millions of light years in distance. So, if one of them appears out of nothing, don’t be afraid you know what to do.

As we have learned, their hearts are highly developed, but their minds are too. Their species never learn anything as all their actions are natural as if guided by the Universal mind that knows it all. They never seek the answer to complex questions about existence as their innocent minds don’t work that way. It’s not lack of love or connection with the universe at all. They just “know and act” totally different than we that “think, rationalize, and then act, following the mind and not the heart. As they can’t conceptualize, they don’t believe in higher planes “although they sense them as part of themselves”. In their innocence, they don’t know what happens after death and they don’t even care about it.

We feel that these ETs are very highly enlightened beings, but are so innocent, that they have no need to express their Realization. We can say that they can feel God in each of their innocent actions. Their innate innocence is only matched by their great healing abilities that has no equal to any other being in the universe. Their fingers light up (like in the movie, ET ) when they are going to heal another being. The Beltanicus were genetically created from their most fundamental blocks to heal. They shared a lot with us in the times of Lemuria, when the Earth was the main center for healing in the Universe, where warriors came to heal and rest from the Orion War.

Millions were healed back then finding harmony and balance in their lives. When our planet is ready once more, the Beltanicus will share their great gift of healing again.-

The Zeta Reticulum and the Yukonadios try to find and hunt them down, but the Beltanicus are very well protected from the universe itself, due to their unique function in creation. Millions of years ago, the Yukonadius and the Beltanicus were one race, but the Yukonadius took the dark path leaving harmony and innocence behind. Today, they are 2 totally different species.

The Beltanicus see humanity as children that have lost their innocence and they would love to play and share with us, but there have been incidents in which humans, in ignorance, have attacked them. Hopefully, this information will serve as a first step, to someday be able to understand and relate to them in a direct way. After the release of this information and the energetic earth changes, the Beltanicus are going to be seen more often by humans in the coming years. Imagine the benefit for humanity to be able to interact with these great healers! For now, we have to start filling our hearts with innocence if someday we expect to fully share with our extraterrestrial brothers.

Part 10

The Herudians (Nov. 8)

These Extraterrestrial beings exist in the 4th Dimension. Their species are around 11 feet tall and their bodies look the same as ours, save their heads. The following statement is going to sound strange (remember they are not physical beings), but the form of their heads are almost exactly the same as one of our earth animals- the horse. There is no relation between our horses and them, it’s just a coincidence that their heads look like that, creating a mythological atmosphere around them from our human perspective.

Our old cultures had contact with them and the Herudian confirmed to us that they did contact the North American Indians in the past, long ago. The form of their heads allows their brains to have an unusual form and it also allows them to have the most powerful mental powers of all ETs. The Herudians seek to free themselves from their mental limitations (even though we humans can’t fathom the heights of their mental development) and connect more to the heart. Their great mental powers have helped them to play the role of planetary police here on Earth, specifically supervising the activities of the Zeta Reticulum. The Herudians can control and dominate the Zeta Reticulum when necessary and if the circumstances require it, they can enter into the third dimension, lowering their vibration with their minds.

The fourth dimension is very different from 3rd dimension and the process of densification occurs in a quantum leap process. One moment they are in 4th dimension and all of a sudden, they are in the 3rd dimension. It’s not like they are in the fourth dimension on top of the planet and then are slowly condensing into the third dimension. It’s an instant change and is not based on technology, but due to their mind’s power. When their spaceships materialize in the 3rd dimension, they have great oval shapes, full of lights like a Christmas tree. When the ship flies in the sky, to the human eye, it looks like they jump from one point to another, instantly.

As a spiritual practice, they retire themselves to Nature or their impression of nature in the 4th dimension, to find peace and serenity. They recommend that humans do the same and find time to share with nature and commune in the outdoors with nature to find internal peace.

The Herudians train their minds to levels that are totally unknown to us and can connect to supra-mental levels at will, obtaining a deep knowledge of how everything works. They can materialize and de-materialize at will, as they are masters of their forms. Even in 3rd dimension, they can make us believe that they disappear as they are also masters of creating illusions in the mind. They can make us think they are in a place that they are not, or to see something that is not there. They communicate by telepathy from any distance in the universe.

They help humanity by dissipating the mental waves that the evil Ets create and also assist those that have been affected by mental wave attacks to return to their normal self (If you find yourself under a mental wave attack, direct your attention towards them, as a simple direction of your mind to them will be perceived by the Herudians and if allowed, they will give you assistance).

Simple Tool to Help Mitigate Mind Control Technologies
The Herudians said that there are many ways to create physical tools to help dissipate these mental waves (scalar and microwave mind control transmissions) that the Zeta Reticulum and others produce. They allowed us see only one of the simplest ones and it was by filling jars with seawater or water with sea salt and placing them around the house. Also quartz crystals around the house works, but the crystal has to be cleaned daily and the salt water also has to be changed frequently.

In conclusion, the Herudians believe that a “strong personal will” is the best antidote and that a person should practice any exercise that increases their will power, like trying to sit while having the knees touching each other for a long time.

The Herudians came to protect our planet for a long period of time. The Zeta Reticulum are their long time enemies. The Zeta Reticulum come from a different galaxy than the Herudian and as we said before, the Zetas are 3rd dimensional beings like us, but even so they have tried to penetrate the holy ground of the Herudian civilization in the 4th dimension. Using their technology the Zetas can manipulate ultra high frequencies of electromagnetic pulses, creating energies capable to open a portal in the fabric of time and space allowing them to access the 4th dimension. Although the Herudians are much more mentally advance they are not violent by nature and in a way that is weakness that have prevent them to finish the conflict against the Zeta Reticulum and other ETs. The Herudians do not posses high technology or weapons as the Zetas do. Mind over matter in their weapon, but a big bomb send through the portal and not detected on time can cause great deal of destruction. The superiority of the Herudians is solely based on their mental capacity to block and control the Zetas, not with the intentions to control them, as the Zetas would do, but in self defense and protection of out planet.

The Herudians are being help by other Ets named the Zeltan Dunikus. They are an enlighten civilization in absolute harmony with Nature. (The most spiritually advance Ets honor Nature, but we humans destroy it. That says it all). We called them the Druid civilization and they live in one of the farthest galaxies in the Universe. Their civilization is more advance than the Herudians and in this moment they are living a Golden Age in the 3rd dimension. Because they are so far away, they transfer their consciousness to the bodies of the Herudians and in that way they can help anytime they are needed. The Zeltan Dunikus had a colony here on Earth in the times of Lemuria, but they are not totally humans. They look much like us, but possess big green eyes and their hair color have many violet hues. The Zeltan Dunikus help the Herudians, because they helped long ago, in a big evacuation some time before Atlantis began to disappear. ( Atlantis fell 100.000 year ago, not 12.000 as many think).- Since then, a deep unbroken bond grew between these races and the Zeltan help the Herudian all the time.

To continue, after 15, 000 years of conflict between the Herudians and the Zeta Reticulum, these last ones came to our planet for the reasons already mentioned in the first letters about the Zeta Reticulum. So the Herudians decided to follow them, first with their minds, and them with their ships that now orbit around the planet.

The Herudians are also here to receive the great light dispensation that our planet is receiving. The light penetrates the 4th dimension and then the 3rd, bathing the aura of our planet. The Herudians can’t comprehend the other dimensions from the point of view of the heart, so many times they live a difficult and extreme dilemma between the mind and the heart. They can know all the dimensions with their mind, but without the pure feeling of light and love from the Heart, the experiences in this dimensions become cold, dry and insipid. But their hearts are not in atrophy as the Zeta Reticulum, and they have faith that someday will their hearts reach the same height as their minds.

Even though the Herudians haven’t had a Golden Age in thousands of years, their connection to their Ascended masters and Saints haven’t been lost, and this spirituality is the one that will take them to a new golden age.  That will happen at the same time that our planet ascends to a higher vibration. For now, we can only be grateful for their presence in our planet, as these noble beings protect us from the Zeta Reticuli and have prevented and stop many of their evil plans. Like they once telepathically said to us in a form of a joke: “We are not here to run in a race track for sure”

Their planet is located in one of the farthest stars of our galaxy. Is a green planet with purple toned hues, and great oceans in many colors. When the waters hit the shore, rainbows of color splash over the rocks. (remember this is the 4th dimension). They have great fields of pure untouched Nature. Like our planet, theirs is full of many species of wild life that live in harmony with each other. The mating seasons of those species occur once every hundreds of years and their life span is thousand times longer than the species on our planet. In the fourth dimension, the natural laws are different than ours. They have gigantic mountains sculpted in the image of their greatest spiritual masters.  Inside many of the mountains they have beautiful temples of light.

The Herudian houses look like huge Igloos, built along the bases of their chains of mountains and towards the ocean.  In the afternoon, they enjoy watching the sky, where the most beautiful display of light and colors fills the atmosphere, something similar to our Aurora Borealis. It’s important to mention that their planet is a little bit bigger than our moon and it has no natural satellites. Also the planet has two suns, about the same size, but each in a different solar system, but parallel to each other. ( The reader may ask why is important to write about their culture and 4th dimensional life, but the more you know about them, the easier it is to connect to them)

The planet is in the outmost orbit of one their sun’s systems, but there is a point in the year where the planet is just in the middle distance between these two suns.  In this point of tension, the planet is equally pull by the gravitation of these two suns, and that is when the New Years celebrations begin.  The climax point is when the Herudians wait to see towards which solar system their planet is going to be pulled, to begin the new year. If the planet is pulled towards the red sun, they know it is going to be a year of work where they will have to balance a lot of their karma. But if the planet is pulled towards the blue sun, it means it will be a year to be dedicated to devotion and relaxation.

The Herudians are androgenous in nature, but with some male and female characteristic about them, that can change from year to year, depending on the necessities of their civilization and which sun they are being pulled towards. The have a Monarchy system and their blue blood expands for hundreds of generations, as they say, all the way to the original gods. For reasons unknown to us, the life span of the Kings and Queens are three times longer than the general population. Close to their command centers, they have built enormous fields made of what seems like millions or billions of crystals. These fields can be as big as the New York City, and that’s the place where the Herudians go to anchor the excess of mental information and to clarify  their minds. It is in these fields where they celebrate the New Year and other important dates.  The young ones are trained in a very special school where they learn to control and train their minds. The is also a healing society which trains how to heal with their mental powers, and another of intellectuals, that spend all their time writing and recording the events that transpire in their super high mental experiences. They write these events in crystals, through vibration, creating rings of light from the inferior, exterior part, towards the interior, superior part of the crystal.  They just need to touch one of these crystals and their mind instantly reads all of the information and sensations recorded in the crystal.

There is a very special event in their culture and society,  where a synchronous eclipse that takes place about every 399 years (their years). It’s caused by the presence of an internal planet in one of their solar systems. At this time, Herudians from all parts of the universe return home to discuss events that are to come.  In every sacred mountain, there is a sacred cave where all the knowledge that has been recorded by the intellectuals, is reviewed by their mystics and all the flaws are polish.  Their mystics and saints have a great level of spirituality , even though the general population is mainly mental. Their mystics are connected to the heart, which clearly shows that they keep the connection intact, not to be lost like has happened to other species.  The main names of the four most highly enlightened Herudians are: Kimatori, Santamerti, Gotamiri and Dematori. They hold the light of spiritual Realization for all. Each of this Saints lives in one of the sacred caves mention before and are only consulted in spiritual matters. It is said that Sanat Kumara incarnated in their planet to do an avataric mission. They also have stories of great avatars equals to our Rama and Krishna.

More to come…

Willy and Andy

Source

Insights on Zeta Reticulans and other Alien Groups, Parts 1- 4

Here I start a nice series which deals with different kind of aliens:

alien6

Insights on Zeta Reticulans and other Alien Groups, Parts 1- 4

[Editor’s Note: Jan. 23, 2007. This series on Extraterrestrial Aliens has now grown to 14 parts (the links to all 14 parts are found at the bottom of the page). The information comes from two brothers, Willy & Andy, both born in South America. One brother is now living in Miami, while the other brother is living in Thailand. They both have had experiences with aliens since childhood. Friendly aliens have been trying to provide them with detailed information about the agendas of various alien groups who are influencing humans, while negative aliens have tried to shut them down. You can read the details below. I’ve left my original notes in place, so you can follow the narrative as it came in. Much of this information is new and cannot be found in other books or articles about extraterrestrial groups.

In my opinion, the information presented here is extremely useful as it reveals much about the psychological motivations and goals of the negative alien groups who are behind the human predators whom we refer to as the New World Order crowd. If you are knowledgeable about and can understand the motivations which propels a hidden enemy, you can outflank him and abort his agenda.

Phil Schneider stated the gravity of the situation plainly in  his 1995 lectures where he said that “The Alien agenda IS the New World Order agenda; they are one and the same” and that agenda is to kill off the majority of humanity and enslave those who remain. You will find that the negative aliens are depending on their ability to use high tech mind control technologies to subdue us, but we are acquiring many tricks of our own-including orgone generators-which are throwing huge spanner wrenches into their unseen mind control machinery. Many wonderful tips are offered here on how to negate the dark alien efforts. Study them, memorize them and use them. You have everything to gain and nothing to lose….Ken Adachi

September 16, 2005. The writer of this letter is not a native English speaker, so I had to touch up the spelling and grammar here and there to make the text more understandable. The context, however, was not altered in any way. I’ve invited this person to send additional information as he sees fit. The writer says up front that the info is from a psychic source. While there is always the possibility of deception from such sources, the information here seems to ring true to me, based on my own research into the nature of the Zeta Reticulan aliens. A second e-mail was received on Sep. 19, 2005 which continues the narrative. I will label each new addition as Part 1, Part 2, etc.

I’ll post the most recent info on this Alien Insights Update page ( http://educate-yourself.org/cn/zetainfoupdateindex.shtml ) …Ken]


From Willy & Andy
http://educate-yourself.org/cn/zetainfo16sep05.shtml
September 16, 2005

Zeta Reticulans / Demons

Parts 1-4

Dear Sir:

We saw your interesting page and felt the impulse to contribute with some information that may be interested to yourself and your readers- As the origin of the information is from a psychic source, we prefer to remain anonymous for now as to avoid so evil hands that would like to make use of our gift (as they already do with many more gifted psychics) The information we got seem very interesting as is about Extraterrestrial activity in out planet- More exactly, the grays named Zeta Reticulan and their connection to the NWO– The interesting part was that while getting this information we were attack (mind waves) by another race of extraterrestrials (Yukonadius, another type of gray) trying to prevent us to present this information to the public-

We started a series of chats over the internet, while meditating and expanding our awareness opening ourselves for information about ET intelligence in our planet.- Soon enough we started to get specific information about several ET Races that are at this point affecting our evolution-

In the following week, while getting this information, I started to feel sick- I began to feel overcharged with negative energy and my body began a natural process of vomiting these energies like a shaman would do it- At nights, I began to feel my mind overcharge with intense psychic pressure and it was hard to go to sleep- Many times I awakened abruptly under heavy mental attacks- I just could endure those days as I kept vomiting this noxious energies-

One morning, I woke up and I was only experiencing through my awareness, my mental level- For a few minutes I was a being that had no emotional body, but pure mental energy- very lucid and aware mental energy, yet devoid of feelings- I was in empathy with the state of being of this gray ETs- As we kept getting more information, the attacks became worse. I couldn’t’t sleep for days in a row and I felt the presence inside my head of another intelligence, literally trying to drive me crazy. There were some days that I literally thought I was losing my mind-

One important event that happened was the following- I was living in South America at the time, and one day I had to go to the American Embassy as I was processing a visa petition for my wife- The minute I entered the American Embassy, the mental bombardment stopped- I took a mental vacation for the few hours I was there- Later I found out that the Embassy was protected by another race of ETs, the same one that actually protect the country , but that is another story-

To make this short, I ended changing my plans and traveling as soon as I could back to the US, not without withstanding the strongest of all the attacks while in the plane. I endured with all my heart the impulse to go running wild all over the plane screaming like a mad man.- But as soon as we reached land, the nightmare ended. I love this country-

In total, we gathered information on about 12 different races of ETs here on the planet now. The Zeta Reticulan being the most known to the public, is the one we are going to describe now

Zeta Reticulan
The Zetas are physical beings like us, that’s the reason we can see the UFO so easily. They knew about the existence of our planet thousands of years ago, but ignored it as they didn’t’t considered it as a strategic point in their plans to conquest the universe. After the first atomic bombs, they considered that our race achieved a substantial scientific advancement and started to pay us more attention.

Their original planet was destroyed thousands of years ago, losing a lot of their culture and spirituality. After that, a lot of changes occurred from their physical level to their views about the universe. Now they are a shadow of what they were once, a great race- .

They are extremely mental beings and destroy any emotions that may arise in them– In their minds, their goal is to understand what is the greatest power of the universe and exploit it for their own benefit. They know the greatest power is Life itself, and for millenniums they have tried to find a way to create life from nothingness, but have failed to find the origin.

Having no spiritual beliefs, the truth will always escape through their fingers.- They only believe in science and believe that there is a tool or machine for everything, and believe that their minds are so great, that someday they will become like gods. They are extremely telepathic and can produce great mental waves, that they use to manipulate and control weaker minds.

Their technology is based on the sub-atomic power and supra-electromagnetic transmissions used to power their transportation, weapons, and others life support machinery. They seek the cure for a constant pain. There is a deep pain in their race that they control with their powerful minds from time to time. It is not a physical or emotional pain, it is something that the human race has not experienced yet.- They think that this constant pain is what prevents their powerful minds to achieve their full capacity. Through science they are trying to find the cure for this pain and its source.

The Zetas see humanity as a basic intelligent life form that still has their roots in animal instinct. They believe that in studying us and our animalistic nature, they will find the cure for their pain. (We believe that the pain is in reality a great inner tension between the very highly develop minds and their extremely underdeveloped hearts). Scientifically they will never find the cure they seek. As they have no spiritual values in their minds, their moral values are thin, and this allows them to control others without remorse, while their great minds shake any feeling of guilt. And with their heart closed, they will never find fault in their ways.

Their philosophy is to control all the details and events in their lives and even their deaths if they could. They have great ambition of power and a deep desire of supremacy of their species over all others. Science is their religion and they have a deep knowledge in regards of mental evolution. What they don’t understand is that the mind can’t evolve to the supreme level without the heart. They feel emotions, but in a vibrational form, (humans can’t understand this ) and the vibration of fear is the most powerful in them.

They don’t feel love or jealousy like we humans understand those feelings. They just want to control and know everything. The Zetas are extremely curious. – The only thing that has prevented them to achieve their goals with us are the more advance extraterrestrial beings that guard our planet 24 hours a day.

(I know you are very busy and I don’t feel to keep writing more and taking more of your time unless you let me know is of some interest to you).

Andy.-

*****

Zeta Reticulan (continued)

Part 2 (Sep. 19, 2005)

( By the end of getting this ET information, the attacks had gotten worst. Through all this time I wasn’t sure where these attacks were coming from, as the source was doing a great job of concealing themselves.

One day, I went to the movies with my wife. Everything seemed fine, but when the lights went off, I started to feel a pressure at my chest, as if I was loosing my breath. Then I felt a sharp pain and I thought i was going to have a heart attack. I had to leave the theater and go to the restroom with my wife’s help. Once there, I relaxed and my body automatically started to vomit this negative energy, and then I felt better.

Trying to inquire with my brother into the nature of this attack, we finally were able to pierce the veil and one of the gray ETs of the Yukonadious Race revealed himself- He was the one attacking me all the time. My brother was in Thailand, but that land is well guarded and the ET’s didn’t dare to go there. I being in South America, it was like open season there, as those lands are their territory. Not even the Zeta Reticulan dare to enter their frontiers. The Yukonadius are a vile, almost evil race and the worst treat for the planet. But we will talk about them in another letter.

This ugly ET told us to erase all the information from our computers and hard drives or the attack against me were to be intensify. As they can easily kill a human being with the mental power, there is a Universal Law that prevents something like that from happening. But anyone with the ability to harm has be taken into serious consideration. So we decided to comply and for the first time, I slept all night long.

When I told my wife about what was going on, she thought to herself “Who the hell they do think they are doing this against my hubby and worst to humanity and still wanted to remain anonymous?” She told me later that just after she thought that, a sharp intense pain was felt in the side of her head. Later we found out that a type of etheric implant was placed on her in that part of the head.)

Continue from before………………

The Zeta’s internal path between their minds and their hearts is very narrow, and without the heart it is very hard to understand Reality. Even though, they have great minds, they have no imagination, but they do posses a sense of precognition that replaces it. They are very psychic, but not in the same way we human are as seeing auras, chakras and astral planes etc, but in the capacity to transmit mental waves. They constantly transmit these mental waves in the form of microwaves with the purpose of controlling humanity. It may sound strange, but with this transmission, they are trying to change us to be just like them (the perfect design in their minds)

The effects that these waves have on humans are many, but especially they are designed to close the heart of humanity, pushing us to be more mental and analytical and losing many of the qualities of the heart, like love, compassion, the feeling of brotherhood and more.

They use these waves many times on us trying to change the vibration of the upper chakras and the heart to stop the flow of information we were getting about them. The best strategy of the enemy is to make others believe that they don’t exist, but in time, humanity will know what is going on behind the veil.

The Zetas are extremely physically strong (although their thin bodies appear to be fragile). Besides mental control, they use their strength to subdue abductees once they have the humans inside their ships. Our recommendation to the reader is that if they see a UFO (the typical dish form)- just hide. We don’t recommend having images, drawings or figures of these beings, because- believe it or not- these forms allow them to establish a connection with you and forward their mental waves to reach their goals. [for parents who are reading this, you should avoid getting T-shirts, stickers, or action figures of aliens for your kids..Ken]

Spiritually speaking with the New Age lingo, the Zeta’s are afraid that Planet Earth is going to ascend towards a Golden Age (which has happened to them in the past,) leaving them behind in many ways, (especially at the spiritual level, even though they may seem not to care about that). Their natural pride can’t conceive that humanity may leap forward beyond them. This makes them even more controlling and jealous. The last Golden Age that their civilization experienced was 1.2 billions of years ago and they cannot comprehend why humanity has had 3 Golden Ages in the past 500.000 years and we are at the doorsteps of the 4th one. That’s why they think that there most be something very special about this planet, so they seek the means to control it. All of their evil plans have been disassembled by other higher Extraterrestrial beings with more advanced technologies.

The Zetas have a great base in the middle of what is named the Bermuda Triangle. They were drawn to open a base of operations there as it was the place for an ancient Atlantis Temple of great Power, where anchored the power of the seven rays in those days. The Zetas don’t know this and are not in that place for spiritual reasons, but they were drawn by the great electromagnetic fields that are generated at that point. They use that base to transform the electromagnetic waves into pure energy. There is a great antenna, the biggest on the planet (all invisible by the use of electromagnetic technologies) designed exclusively to mentally control humanity.

They transmit many subliminal messages that attack the human instincts, making us act with very specific behaviors. (it’s possible that the cell phone antennas, used for mind control, may be linked to theirs. Or they use them too or maybe the technology comes from them. We are not sure because we learned about the cell antennas after reading about them on the Educate yourself page). In short, they want to control the human race and if possible make us their slaves or worst- destroy us.

(more to come...)

Willy and Andy

*****

Zeta Reticulan (continued)

Part 3 (Sep. 21, 2005)

The Zeta Reticulim already have several slave planets in different galaxies of the Universe. All civilizations with lesser technologies and mentally inferior to them. Most of the slaves beings are made to work in mining. The Zeta’s have an slave race called the Linenaris Tubilurus , that are of blue complexion, with small but strong and resistant bodies, that travel with them in their space ships. This last ones can better resist Earth atmosphere and can manage to breathe air. The Zetas can do it too but not for long as it may become poisonous for them.- These blue beings are the ones that actually do the abductions and bring the human beings into their ships. The Linenaris were races scientifically more advanced than ours, but were totally controlled by the superior Zeta race, and now are being controlled by the powerful Zetas mind waves.

After the human beings are taken inside the ships, many weird scientific procedures are practiced on them. They include probing and medical tests. Once the tests are done, the Zetas inject a chemical substance behind the human’s ears. This substance is extracted directly from the Zeta’s own brains and affects the areas of the human brain that are related to short term memory.

Because this examinations are so intense, painful, and invasive, and because the human brain is bombarded with so much information through the senses, it is very difficult to erase from the human mind these intense events and experiences. It is like a direct attack against the brain. So, this chemical substance is the only way to block the memories of these events. (Although there has been cases, as many of you know, that under hypnosis some of the memories of these events have been recovered).- If a laboratory were to know what specific substance to look for, it could be identified very easily and with some tests, determine an antidote for it.

In an unknown location, the Zeta Reticulim have a factory designed for the sole purpose of fabricating androids. These androids look exactly like us and their function is to act as Zeta eyes among our society so they can accelerate the culmination of their evil plans. These androids also serve as transmission antennas of their mental waves that are designed to manipulate and control the weak human minds that surround them. Even though these androids are perfect in every way to look like us and can mix with us in our daily life, they can’t really be part of our society and customs (let’s see one of them pass a physical exam for example).

For that reason the Zeta’s have created at the genetic level, human being-like creatures that are so perfect that they can easily pass any physical examination. The only difference between these clone-like creations and us is the way the neuropath channels are connected. They are specifically designed so the pathway won’t be able to change at the base of the brain function, no matter what activity the clone is involved with at the moment- This is the easiest way to control their creations rather than using implants in real human beings- These creature’s neuro-pathways serve also as antennas that can receive instructions from the Zeta, but the clone perceive them only as neuronal impulses and act on them. Meaning that many times not even the clones know that they are being used for Zeta purposes. A clever way to maintain a complete cover up.

As the reader can begin to see, we don’t formally call this pseudo human creations “ clones”, because they are not exact copies of a human being, but are unique creations that are made possible due to the more advanced science of the Zetas working with the most basic substances that are the building blocks of a human being- Although we couldn’t’t confirm what I’m about to write, we feel that these creations are destined to even more sinister ends as we will explain in another letter.

(Even though the Yukonadius told us to erase all the information we received about them in order to leave me alone, they only complied until we actually erased the files from our computers. The following day, the attacks began again, but even stronger. Well, what do you expect from a morbid, sadistic race that see us as little lab rats?

Because in this instance we are dealing with human beings.(I use the term “human” to describe any being that has the 5 elements in them and are endowed with intelligence/intellect) and not astral beings or demons, there was nothing that I could do to banish them like rituals, or use salt or garlic ,etc. So I decided to use some extraterrestrial technologies that we learned from a race of Golden beings who are not from the 3rd dimension, but higher {We may talk about them in another letter if people are interested, as the information is not as physical as with these other races, but more spiritual}.

So this technology involves toning (a whale/dolphin-like sound) that helps ground higher frequencies. Every time I did a toning session, the mind waves stopped, but just to be change to another frequency. They found a way around my toning by changing the mind wave attacks to different levels. It was very stressful, and designed to drive me crazy.- It was only my ability to maintain my attention in Pure Consciousness; the Ground of Being as my true reality and perfect Realization beyond the mind, that kept me sane.

Also my extremely gifted brother gave me wise guidance and support even though he was so far away- I also made them uncomfortable I bet, trying to keep a Love feeling and pure thoughts most of the time, because that (I believe) causes them to feel uncomfortable as well. But by this time, many weeks had passed by and I was tired.

After my experience at the American Embassy {as I wrote in my first letter}, I decided to fly to America as soon as possible- Once here, I gave instructions to some of our students in South America to try to rescue some of the information from the computer hard drives. Thank God they found a computer expert that was able to retrieve most of the information that we thought had been lost)

(more to come...)

Willy and Andy.

***

Zeta Reticulan (continued)

Part 4 (Sep. 22, 2005)

Subject: Zeta Reticuli (Final Part) but new chapter on other race to come

The Zetas are relentless in their mission and goals. Their own race in going through a delicate period, in which it is becoming more difficult for them to sustain as a species. The way they propagate is by cloning themselves as they do not have a working sexual apparatus. This cloning has gone on for so long that Nature itself is placing obstacles in their path by making it more difficult to continue this practice. Also, it seems that their genetic make up has somehow changed as we will explain later. Although their bodies may last a millennia (or more), for a proud race like the Zetas, it is important for their aspirations that they become god-like.

By now, the reader may understand the seriousness of the situation we are living today, as these Extraterrestrials represent the biggest treat to humanity. At the beginning, their plans were to work alone behind the veils, but they had to change tactics once their presence became more obvious, following the famous Roswell incident when one of their ships crashed, revealing undisputed proof of their existence. Then certain key people in governments and organizations had to be included in their plans, something that has worked for their advantage anyway.

We didn’t try to look more into these human organizations and groups, so as not to lose focus of what we were doing. Also, it seems more difficult to obtain information about them as they have many psychic wards and black magic. But, after reading the page Educate-yourself that Ken so bravely maintains, we learned about the N.W.O. and the Illuminati and we are sure these are the organizations working at many levels with the Zetas.

Also, the government has contact with them, but not by physical contact as one may imagine, but rather by telepathy. The government has a group of psychics called the Omega 12 that are in contact with them and also are used for many other purposes of remote viewing and more. The government built a special building of specific metals that raise the magnetic vibrations of the environment (probably Zeta technology) which raises their psychic powers tremendously. (On one occasion, we briefly got in touch with them and they told us that the government knew, because of them, about the 9/11, but did nothing.)

So the Zetas plan of conquest involves many tactics which also includes the genetic fabrication of diseases to wipe out big portions of the population. We are sure that AIDS is just one of a few experiments they have created and unleashed on us. Thank God humanity has been able to control this plague and stop the intended mass destructive purpose that it originally had. Also, the Zetas have been experimenting in creating a hybrid species between them and us; combining our DNA. The purpose is unknown to us, but may be a better suitable race to inhabit this planet or who knows what unholy end. ( It’s good to point now that most of abductions occurs outside the big cities as all main cities are protected by vibrational fields created by higher ET beings, that prevents the Zetas from making their abductions. A few years back, the Zetas created big power black-outs in some mayor cities to quickly abduct some key individuals)

Now sit tight because things get more bizarre from here.

The Zeta Reticuli are also being controlled by another race of Extraterrestrial beings. We will talk more about them in another letter, but we can tell you that this ET being have the appearance of giant Insects (called the Ferget Melangus, much like a Praying Mantis). As you can imagine, these ETs are even more mentally powerful than the Zetas. They not only control the Zeta’s by mind waves, but also by using chemical substances that they produce in their own bodies. So that’s were the Zetas learn how to use those chemical substances on humans as we explained before.

So fragile is the Zetas connection to the heart, that their proud race felt slave to another race. But this control is not a justification for the Zeta Reticulan’s actions, because their true nature remains the same, and even though they are controlled for certain specific purposes by the insect-like race, they still manage to follow their own agenda as we explained before.

Anyway, the Insect-like race do not have the technology that the Zetas have (not even close), but have superior mental control, so they are using the advanced Zeta technology to reach their highest purpose, which is to conquer the universe. (I hope humanity never gets to the point of being so proud of their technology and achievements as to believe that they can rule the universe too. But there are some egos out there that already think they are the rulers of all).

The interaction with this Insect-like beings chemicals has caused the Zetas to begin to change a little in their genetic make up. That’s the reason why the Zeta reticulan eyes are Insect-like, (there were much like ours before); meaning that the insect ET group not only are mentally controlling them, but are chemically somehow changing the Zetas as well.

(While we where trying to tune into these insects, they tried to mentally block our vision. My brother was writing to me in the chat some information he was getting, when all of the sudden, the font of the letters changed to a symbol, and my brother began to write extremely fast….” Don’t do it – Beware- Don’t do it- “

After a while he stop and he said: “I don’t know what happened- I heard a buzz like sound inside my head and lost connection with my body for a while”- When we translated the font to regular times it said: – Don’t it – Beware- Don’t do it-. The insects somehow were trying to communicate with us, trying to stop us from writing about them)

Hold unto your chairs because this is getting more intense and deeper than you can imagine.

The ET Insects are also being controlled by invisible hands and are the true evil power behind the insects who control the Zetas, who in turn control certain human organizations. A chain of evil if we may say so. This is like a great web of deception, being created behind the veil. These last beings that we mention controlling all, are not physical beings, but rather what we may term fourth dimensional beings. And they are not extraterrestrial. There is only one word used to describe them: Demons.

Demons
The Demons have found a way of using the Zeta Reticuli technologies and make use of the experiments that the Zetas use on Human beings for the whole purpose of conquest, dominion, control, and power. The Zetas are capable of killing a human being and then revive him/her. But when the body is revived the body has no soul. The Demons see that the Astral and higher bodies can’t re-attach to the physical vehicle. Instead of a soul, one of this fourth dimensional demons descend and enters the body, making it his own to use them for their own evil plans.

These Soulless humans are truly Evil. We are beginning to talk almost in Biblical terms of the Anti-Christ, but not just one, but hundreds maybe thousands of these beings. (We are not sure, but we think that the human creations that the Zetas fabricate may be used to become vehicles for these demons, but we are not sure of this. The Demons may need real humans for this to work).

(Some people in Mexico have reported seeing Zetas, but with red eyes and little tiny horns. We believe that even some Zetas may be also possessed by their true masters, but this is just a theory). The demons are also being supported by satanic orders that belong to a world wide network. Powerful sorcerers, extremely psychic, that performs satanic ritual and sacrificial ceremonies. This is what opens the doors for the demons to act freely in our world. A whole book can be written about this, but that’s another story.-

So this is as much as we can resume about the Zetas reticulim activities on this planet. In another letter, we will write more about the ET insect-like race named the Ferget Melangus. –

We know this information is very intense and extremely scandalous. But humanity must not fear because we are not alone. There are good ETS helping us and we will write about them in the future. In the end, the Ascended Masters told us that the real battle is fought in the hearts of humanity. By following the white path of Love, Truth, and Service we can achieve victory- That’s the most powerful weapon in our arsenal-

Love and Light …Willy and Andy.

Source

War is a Racket

Something about wars:

War is a Racket

[Editor’s Note: Smedley Butler is my idea of a true American patriot. Born into an upper class Quaker family from Pennsylvania, he dropped out of the elite Haverford School at age 16 in order to join the Marines with the outbreak of the Spanish American War against Spain (Cuba) in 1898. He lied about his age and was commissioned a second lieutenant. He was first wounded at Guantanamo; then fighting the Boxer Rebellion in China in 1900, in Hondurans in 1903 protecting  the American consulate, at the Battle of Veracruz, Mexico in 1914 and in Haiti in 1915. His bravery under fire earned him the Congressional Medal of Honor twice, along with top medals from the Marine Corps and the government of France (First World War).

His father, Thomas S. Butler, was a judge who became a US congressman for 31 years and was chairman of the House Naval Affairs Committee during the Harding and Coolidge administrations. Smedley’s high ranking within the military and his father’s high position within the government gave him the opportunity to see the Big Picture and the Money Boys behind the scenes. He learned in the first half of the twentieth century what I had only learned in the closing decade of that century. Simply stated : modern wars are maneuvered and engineered into existence in order to generate obscene profits for behind-the-scenes corporate manipulators whose sons and daughters never serve or die in those wars.

Regardless of age, after having served in the military (and especially in a war zone), you feel a sense of connectedness and camaraderie with all who have served or are currently serving. It’s frustrating to get derogatory mail from service personnel who are under the same delusions about the government and our “mission” that I had once assumed. Smedley Butler published this short book in order to SAVE the lives of young American military personnel, to SAVE the unnecessary tax yoke placed on the American citizen, and to preserve the sovereignty of this nation. He was a true patriot because he could recognize the truth from the mountain of lies that we are fed by the government and their stooges in the press. He wasn’t about to sit back in silence while the manipulators were setting the stage for World War Two.

In the six years prior to his death in 1940 (at age 58), he was actively trying to expose a plot by wealthy industrialists to take over control of the administration of Franklin D. Roosevelt in a military coup. Today, we know that such a ‘takeover’ of the country did occur during the Roosevelt administration, albeit in a silent and bloodless manner. Today we live with the legacy of that takeover and face the same daunting task of educating the American public to the misadventure of war and the reality of the betrayal at the Top…Ken Adachi]

By USMC Major General Smedley D. Butler (1881-1940)
http://educate-yourself.org/cn/smedleywarisracket.shtml
Published 1935

http://www.lexrex.com/enlightened/articles/warisaracket.htm

Chapter One

Maj. General Smedley Butler, USMCWar is a racket. It always has been.

It is possibly the oldest, easily the most profitable, surely the most vicious. It is the only one international in scope. It is the only one in which the profits are reckoned in dollars and the losses in lives.

A racket is best described, I believe, as something that is not what it seems to the majority of the people. Only a small “inside” group knows what it is about. It is conducted for the benefit of the very few, at the expense of the very many. Out of war a few people make huge fortunes.

In the [First] World War, a mere handful garnered the profits of the conflict. At least 21,000 new millionaires and billionaires were made in the United States during the World War. That many admitted their huge blood gains in their income tax returns. How many other war millionaires falsified their tax returns, no one knows.

How many of these war millionaires shouldered a rifle? How many of them dug a trench? How many of them knew what it meant to go hungry in a rat-infested dug-out? How many of them spent sleepless, frightened nights, ducking shells and shrapnel and machine gun bullets? How many of them parried a bayonet thrust of an enemy? How many of them were wounded or killed in battle?

Out of war, nations acquire additional territory, if they are victorious. They just take it. This newly acquired territory promptly is exploited by the few – the selfsame few who wrung dollars out of blood in the war. The general public shoulders the bill.

And what is this bill?

This bill renders a horrible accounting. Newly placed gravestones. Mangled bodies. Shattered minds. Broken hearts and homes. Economic instability. Depression and all its attendant miseries. Back-breaking taxation for generations and generations.

For a great many years, as a soldier, I had a suspicion that war was a racket; not until I retired to civil life did I fully realize it. Now that I see the international war clouds gathering, as they are today, I must face it and speak out.

Again they are choosing sides. France and Russia met and agreed to stand side by side. Italy and Austria hurried to make a similar agreement. Poland and Germany cast sheep’s eyes at each other, forgetting for the nonce [one unique occasion], their dispute over the Polish Corridor.

The assassination of King Alexander of Jugoslavia [Yugoslavia] complicated matters. Jugoslavia and Hungary, long bitter enemies, were almost at each other’s throats. Italy was ready to jump in. But France was waiting. So was Czechoslovakia. All of them are looking ahead to war. Not the people – not those who fight and pay and die – only those who foment wars and remain safely at home to profit.

There are 40,000,000 men under arms in the world today, and our statesmen and diplomats have the temerity to say that war is not in the making.

Hell’s bells! Are these 40,000,000 men being trained to be dancers?

Not in Italy, to be sure. Premier Mussolini knows what they are being trained for. He, at least, is frank enough to speak out. Only the other day, Il Duce in “International Conciliation,” the publication of the Carnegie Endowment for International Peace, said:

“And above all, Fascism, the more it considers and observes the future and the development of humanity quite apart from political considerations of the moment, believes neither in the possibility nor the utility of perpetual peace… War alone brings up to its highest tension all human energy and puts the stamp of nobility upon the people who have the courage to meet it.”

Undoubtedly Mussolini means exactly what he says. His well-trained army, his great fleet of planes, and even his navy are ready for war – anxious for it, apparently. His recent stand at the side of Hungary in the latter’s dispute with Jugoslavia showed that. And the hurried mobilization of his troops on the Austrian border after the assassination of Dollfuss showed it too. There are others in Europe too whose sabre rattling presages war, sooner or later.

Herr Hitler, with his rearming Germany and his constant demands for more and more arms, is an equal if not greater menace to peace. France only recently increased the term of military service for its youth from a year to eighteen months.

Yes, all over, nations are camping in their arms. The mad dogs of Europe are on the loose. In the Orient the maneuvering is more adroit. Back in 1904, when Russia and Japan fought, we kicked out our old friends the Russians and backed Japan. Then our very generous international bankers were financing Japan. Now the trend is to poison us against the Japanese. What does the “open door” policy to China mean to us? Our trade with China is about $90,000,000 a year. Or the Philippine Islands? We have spent about $600,000,000 in the Philippines in thirty-five years and we (our bankers and industrialists and speculators) have private investments there of less than $200,000,000.

Then, to save that China trade of about $90,000,000, or to protect these private investments of less than $200,000,000 in the Philippines, we would be all stirred up to hate Japan and go to war – a war that might well cost us tens of billions of dollars, hundreds of thousands of lives of Americans, and many more hundreds of thousands of physically maimed and mentally unbalanced men.

Of course, for this loss, there would be a compensating profit – fortunes would be made. Millions and billions of dollars would be piled up. By a few. Munitions makers. Bankers. Ship builders. Manufacturers. Meat packers. Speculators. They would fare well.

Yes, they are getting ready for another war. Why shouldn’t they? It pays high dividends.

But what does it profit the men who are killed? What does it profit their mothers and sisters, their wives and their sweethearts? What does it profit their children?

What does it profit anyone except the very few to whom war means huge profits?

Yes, and what does it profit the nation?

Take our own case. Until 1898 we didn’t own a bit of territory outside the mainland of North America. At that time our national debt was a little more than $1,000,000,000. Then we became “internationally minded.” We forgot, or shunted aside, the advice of the Father of our country. We forgot George Washington’s warning about “entangling alliances.” We went to war. We acquired outside territory. At the end of the World War period, as a direct result of our fiddling in international affairs, our national debt had jumped to over $25,000,000,000. Our total favorable trade balance during the twenty-five-year period was about $24,000,000,000. Therefore, on a purely bookkeeping basis, we ran a little behind year for year, and that foreign trade might well have been ours without the wars.

It would have been far cheaper (not to say safer) for the average American who pays the bills to stay out of foreign entanglements. For a very few this racket, like bootlegging and other underworld rackets, brings fancy profits, but the cost of operations is always transferred to the people – who do not profit.

Chapter Two

WHO MAKES THE PROFITS?

The World War, rather our brief participation in it, has cost the United States some $52,000,000,000. Figure it out. That means $400 to every American man, woman, and child. And we haven’t paid the debt yet. We are paying it, our children will pay it, and our children’s children probably still will be paying the cost of that war.

The normal profits of a business concern in the United States are six, eight, ten, and sometimes twelve percent. But war-time profits – ah! that is another matter – twenty, sixty, one hundred, three hundred, and even eighteen hundred per cent – the sky is the limit. All that traffic will bear. Uncle Sam has the money. Let’s get it.

Of course, it isn’t put that crudely in war time. It is dressed into speeches about patriotism, love of country, and “we must all put our shoulders to the wheel,” but the profits jump and leap and skyrocket – and are safely pocketed. Let’s just take a few examples:

Take our friends the du Ponts, the powder people – didn’t one of them testify before a Senate committee recently that their powder won the war? Or saved the world for democracy? Or something? How did they do in the war? They were a patriotic corporation. Well, the average earnings of the du Ponts for the period 1910 to 1914 were $6,000,000 a year. It wasn’t much, but the du Ponts managed to get along on it. Now let’s look at their average yearly profit during the war years, 1914 to 1918. Fifty-eight million dollars a year profit we find! Nearly ten times that of normal times, and the profits of normal times were pretty good. An increase in profits of more than 950 per cent.

Take one of our little steel companies that patriotically shunted aside the making of rails and girders and bridges to manufacture war materials. Well, their 1910-1914 yearly earnings averaged $6,000,000. Then came the war. And, like loyal citizens, Bethlehem Steel promptly turned to munitions making. Did their profits jump – or did they let Uncle Sam in for a bargain? Well, their 1914-1918 average was $49,000,000 a year!

Or, let’s take United States Steel. The normal earnings during the five-year period prior to the war were $105,000,000 a year. Not bad. Then along came the war and up went the profits. The average yearly profit for the period 1914-1918 was $240,000,000. Not bad.

There you have some of the steel and powder earnings. Let’s look at something else. A little copper, perhaps. That always does well in war times.

Anaconda, for instance. Average yearly earnings during the pre-war years 1910-1914 of $10,000,000. During the war years 1914-1918 profits leaped to $34,000,000 per year.

Or Utah Copper. Average of $5,000,000 per year during the 1910-1914 period. Jumped to an average of $21,000,000 yearly profits for the war period.

Let’s group these five, with three smaller companies. The total yearly average profits of the pre-war period 1910-1914 were $137,480,000. Then along came the war. The average yearly profits for this group skyrocketed to $408,300,000.

A little increase in profits of approximately 200 per cent.

Does war pay? It paid them. But they aren’t the only ones. There are still others. Let’s take leather.

For the three-year period before the war the total profits of Central Leather Company were $3,500,000. That was approximately $1,167,000 a year. Well, in 1916 Central Leather returned a profit of $15,000,000, a small increase of 1,100 per cent. That’s all. The General Chemical Company averaged a profit for the three years before the war of a little over $800,000 a year. Came the war, and the profits jumped to $12,000,000. a leap of 1,400 per cent.

International Nickel Company – and you can’t have a war without nickel – showed an increase in profits from a mere average of $4,000,000 a year to $73,000,000 yearly. Not bad? An increase of more than 1,700 per cent.

American Sugar Refining Company averaged $2,000,000 a year for the three years before the war. In 1916 a profit of $6,000,000 was recorded.

Listen to Senate Document No. 259. The Sixty-Fifth Congress, reporting on corporate earnings and government revenues. Considering the profits of 122 meat packers, 153 cotton manufacturers, 299 garment makers, 49 steel plants, and 340 coal producers during the war. Profits under 25 per cent were exceptional. For instance the coal companies made between 100 per cent and 7,856 per cent on their capital stock during the war. The Chicago packers doubled and tripled their earnings.

And let us not forget the bankers who financed the great war. If anyone had the cream of the profits it was the bankers. Being partnerships rather than incorporated organizations, they do not have to report to stockholders. And their profits were as secret as they were immense. How the bankers made their millions and their billions I do not know, because those little secrets never become public – even before a Senate investigatory body.

But here’s how some of the other patriotic industrialists and speculators chiseled their way into war profits.

Take the shoe people. They like war. It brings business with abnormal profits. They made huge profits on sales abroad to our allies. Perhaps, like the munitions manufacturers and armament makers, they also sold to the enemy. For a dollar is a dollar whether it comes from Germany or from France. But they did well by Uncle Sam too. For instance, they sold Uncle Sam 35,000,000 pairs of hobnailed service shoes. There were 4,000,000 soldiers. Eight pairs, and more, to a soldier. My regiment during the war had only one pair to a soldier. Some of these shoes probably are still in existence. They were good shoes. But when the war was over Uncle Sam has a matter of 25,000,000 pairs left over. Bought – and paid for. Profits recorded and pocketed.

There was still lots of leather left. So the leather people sold your Uncle Sam hundreds of thousands of McClellan saddles for the cavalry. But there wasn’t any American cavalry overseas! Somebody had to get rid of this leather, however. Somebody had to make a profit in it – so we had a lot of McClellan saddles. And we probably have those yet.

Also somebody had a lot of mosquito netting. They sold your Uncle Sam 20,000,000 mosquito nets for the use of the soldiers overseas. I suppose the boys were expected to put it over them as they tried to sleep in muddy trenches – one hand scratching cooties on their backs and the other making passes at scurrying rats. Well, not one of these mosquito nets ever got to France!

Anyhow, these thoughtful manufacturers wanted to make sure that no soldier would be without his mosquito net, so 40,000,000 additional yards of mosquito netting were sold to Uncle Sam.

There were pretty good profits in mosquito netting in those days, even if there were no mosquitoes in France. I suppose, if the war had lasted just a little longer, the enterprising mosquito netting manufacturers would have sold your Uncle Sam a couple of consignments of mosquitoes to plant in France so that more mosquito netting would be in order.

Airplane and engine manufacturers felt they, too, should get their just profits out of this war. Why not? Everybody else was getting theirs. So $1,000,000,000 – count them if you live long enough – was spent by Uncle Sam in building airplane engines that never left the ground! Not one plane, or motor, out of the billion dollars worth ordered, ever got into a battle in France. Just the same the manufacturers made their little profit of 30, 100, or perhaps 300 per cent.

Undershirts for soldiers cost 14¢ [cents] to make and uncle Sam paid 30¢ to 40¢ each for them – a nice little profit for the undershirt manufacturer. And the stocking manufacturer and the uniform manufacturers and the cap manufacturers and the steel helmet manufacturers – all got theirs.

Why, when the war was over some 4,000,000 sets of equipment – knapsacks and the things that go to fill them – crammed warehouses on this side. Now they are being scrapped because the regulations have changed the contents. But the manufacturers collected their wartime profits on them – and they will do it all over again the next time.

There were lots of brilliant ideas for profit making during the war.

One very versatile patriot sold Uncle Sam twelve dozen 48-inch wrenches. Oh, they were very nice wrenches. The only trouble was that there was only one nut ever made that was large enough for these wrenches. That is the one that holds the turbines at Niagara Falls. Well, after Uncle Sam had bought them and the manufacturer had pocketed the profit, the wrenches were put on freight cars and shunted all around the United States in an effort to find a use for them. When the Armistice was signed it was indeed a sad blow to the wrench manufacturer. He was just about to make some nuts to fit the wrenches. Then he planned to sell these, too, to your Uncle Sam.

Still another had the brilliant idea that colonels shouldn’t ride in automobiles, nor should they even ride on horseback. One has probably seen a picture of Andy Jackson riding in a buckboard. Well, some 6,000 buckboards were sold to Uncle Sam for the use of colonels! Not one of them was used. But the buckboard manufacturer got his war profit.

The shipbuilders felt they should come in on some of it, too. They built a lot of ships that made a lot of profit. More than $3,000,000,000 worth. Some of the ships were all right. But $635,000,000 worth of them were made of wood and wouldn’t float! The seams opened up – and they sank. We paid for them, though. And somebody pocketed the profits.

It has been estimated by statisticians and economists and researchers that the war cost your Uncle Sam $52,000,000,000. Of this sum, $39,000,000,000 was expended in the actual war itself. This expenditure yielded $16,000,000,000 in profits. That is how the 21,000 billionaires and millionaires got that way. This $16,000,000,000 profits is not to be sneezed at. It is quite a tidy sum. And it went to a very few.

The Senate (Nye) committee probe of the munitions industry and its wartime profits, despite its sensational disclosures, hardly has scratched the surface.

Even so, it has had some effect. The State Department has been studying “for some time” methods of keeping out of war. The War Department suddenly decides it has a wonderful plan to spring. The Administration names a committee – with the War and Navy Departments ably represented under the chairmanship of a Wall Street speculator – to limit profits in war time. To what extent isn’t suggested. Hmmm. Possibly the profits of 300 and 600 and 1,600 per cent of those who turned blood into gold in the World War would be limited to some smaller figure.

Apparently, however, the plan does not call for any limitation of losses – that is, the losses of those who fight the war. As far as I have been able to ascertain there is nothing in the scheme to limit a soldier to the loss of but one eye, or one arm, or to limit his wounds to one or two or three. Or to limit the loss of life.

There is nothing in this scheme, apparently, that says not more than 12 per cent of a regiment shall be wounded in battle, or that not more than 7 per cent in a division shall be killed.

Of course, the committee cannot be bothered with such trifling matters.

Chapter Three

WHO PAYS THE BILLS?

Who provides the profits – these nice little profits of 20, 100, 300, 1,500 and 1,800 per cent? We all pay them – in taxation. We paid the bankers their profits when we bought Liberty Bonds at $100.00 and sold them back at $84 or $86 to the bankers. These bankers collected $100 plus. It was a simple manipulation. The bankers control the security marts. It was easy for them to depress the price of these bonds. Then all of us – the people – got frightened and sold the bonds at $84 or $86. The bankers bought them. Then these same bankers stimulated a boom and government bonds went to par – and above. Then the bankers collected their profits.

But the soldier pays the biggest part of the bill.

If you don’t believe this, visit the American cemeteries on the battlefields abroad. Or visit any of the veteran’s hospitals in the United States. On a tour of the country, in the midst of which I am at the time of this writing, I have visited eighteen government hospitals for veterans. In them are a total of about 50,000 destroyed men – men who were the pick of the nation eighteen years ago. The very able chief surgeon at the government hospital; at Milwaukee, where there are 3,800 of the living dead, told me that mortality among veterans is three times as great as among those who stayed at home.

Boys with a normal viewpoint were taken out of the fields and offices and factories and classrooms and put into the ranks. There they were remolded; they were made over; they were made to “about face”; to regard murder as the order of the day. They were put shoulder to shoulder and, through mass psychology, they were entirely changed. We used them for a couple of years and trained them to think nothing at all of killing or of being killed.

Then, suddenly, we discharged them and told them to make another “about face” ! This time they had to do their own readjustment, sans [without] mass psychology, sans officers’ aid and advice and sans nation-wide propaganda. We didn’t need them any more. So we scattered them about without any “three-minute” or “Liberty Loan” speeches or parades. Many, too many, of these fine young boys are eventually destroyed, mentally, because they could not make that final “about face” alone.

In the government hospital in Marion, Indiana, 1,800 of these boys are in pens! Five hundred of them in a barracks with steel bars and wires all around outside the buildings and on the porches. These already have been mentally destroyed. These boys don’t even look like human beings. Oh, the looks on their faces! Physically, they are in good shape; mentally, they are gone.

There are thousands and thousands of these cases, and more and more are coming in all the time. The tremendous excitement of the war, the sudden cutting off of that excitement – the young boys couldn’t stand it.

That’s a part of the bill. So much for the dead – they have paid their part of the war profits. So much for the mentally and physically wounded – they are paying now their share of the war profits. But the others paid, too – they paid with heartbreaks when they tore themselves away from their firesides and their families to don the uniform of Uncle Sam – on which a profit had been made. They paid another part in the training camps where they were regimented and drilled while others took their jobs and their places in the lives of their communities. The paid for it in the trenches where they shot and were shot; where they were hungry for days at a time; where they slept in the mud and the cold and in the rain – with the moans and shrieks of the dying for a horrible lullaby.

But don’t forget – the soldier paid part of the dollars and cents bill too.

Up to and including the Spanish-American War, we had a prize system, and soldiers and sailors fought for money. During the Civil War they were paid bonuses, in many instances, before they went into service. The government, or states, paid as high as $1,200 for an enlistment. In the Spanish-American War they gave prize money. When we captured any vessels, the soldiers all got their share – at least, they were supposed to. Then it was found that we could reduce the cost of wars by taking all the prize money and keeping it, but conscripting [drafting] the soldier anyway. Then soldiers couldn’t bargain for their labor, Everyone else could bargain, but the soldier couldn’t.

Napoleon once said,

“All men are enamored of decorations…they positively hunger for them.”

So by developing the Napoleonic system – the medal business – the government learned it could get soldiers for less money, because the boys liked to be decorated. Until the Civil War there were no medals. Then the Congressional Medal of Honor was handed out. It made enlistments easier. After the Civil War no new medals were issued until the Spanish-American War.

In the World War, we used propaganda to make the boys accept conscription. They were made to feel ashamed if they didn’t join the army.

So vicious was this war propaganda that even God was brought into it. With few exceptions our clergymen joined in the clamor to kill, kill, kill. To kill the Germans. God is on our side…it is His will that the Germans be killed.

And in Germany, the good pastors called upon the Germans to kill the allies…to please the same God. That was a part of the general propaganda, built up to make people war conscious and murder conscious.

Beautiful ideals were painted for our boys who were sent out to die. This was the “war to end all wars.” This was the “war to make the world safe for democracy.” No one mentioned to them, as they marched away, that their going and their dying would mean huge war profits. No one told these American soldiers that they might be shot down by bullets made by their own brothers here. No one told them that the ships on which they were going to cross might be torpedoed by submarines built with United States patents. They were just told it was to be a “glorious adventure.”

Thus, having stuffed patriotism down their throats, it was decided to make them help pay for the war, too. So, we gave them the large salary of $30 a month.

All they had to do for this munificent sum was to leave their dear ones behind, give up their jobs, lie in swampy trenches, eat canned willy (when they could get it) and kill and kill and kill…and be killed.

But wait!

Half of that wage (just a little more than a riveter in a shipyard or a laborer in a munitions factory safe at home made in a day) was promptly taken from him to support his dependents, so that they would not become a charge upon his community. Then we made him pay what amounted to accident insurance – something the employer pays for in an enlightened state – and that cost him $6 a month. He had less than $9 a month left.

Then, the most crowning insolence of all – he was virtually blackjacked into paying for his own ammunition, clothing, and food by being made to buy Liberty Bonds. Most soldiers got no money at all on pay days.

We made them buy Liberty Bonds at $100 and then we bought them back – when they came back from the war and couldn’t find work – at $84 and $86. And the soldiers bought about $2,000,000,000 worth of these bonds!

Yes, the soldier pays the greater part of the bill. His family pays too. They pay it in the same heart-break that he does. As he suffers, they suffer. At nights, as he lay in the trenches and watched shrapnel burst about him, they lay home in their beds and tossed sleeplessly – his father, his mother, his wife, his sisters, his brothers, his sons, and his daughters.

When he returned home minus an eye, or minus a leg or with his mind broken, they suffered too – as much as and even sometimes more than he. Yes, and they, too, contributed their dollars to the profits of the munitions makers and bankers and shipbuilders and the manufacturers and the speculators made. They, too, bought Liberty Bonds and contributed to the profit of the bankers after the Armistice in the hocus-pocus of manipulated Liberty Bond prices.

And even now the families of the wounded men and of the mentally broken and those who never were able to readjust themselves are still suffering and still paying.

Chapter Four

HOW TO SMASH THIS RACKET!

WELL, it’s a racket, all right.

A few profit – and the many pay. But there is a way to stop it. You can’t end it by disarmament conferences. You can’t eliminate it by peace parleys at Geneva. Well-meaning but impractical groups can’t wipe it out by resolutions. It can be smashed effectively only by taking the profit out of war.

The only way to smash this racket is to conscript capital and industry and labor before the nations manhood can be conscripted. One month before the Government can conscript the young men of the nation – it must conscript capital and industry and labor. Let the officers and the directors and the high-powered executives of our armament factories and our munitions makers and our shipbuilders and our airplane builders and the manufacturers of all the other things that provide profit in war time as well as the bankers and the speculators, be conscripted – to get $30 a month, the same wage as the lads in the trenches get.

Let the workers in these plants get the same wages – all the workers, all presidents, all executives, all directors, all managers, all bankers –

yes, and all generals and all admirals and all officers and all politicians and all government office holders – everyone in the nation be restricted to a total monthly income not to exceed that paid to the soldier in the trenches!

Let all these kings and tycoons and masters of business and all those workers in industry and all our senators and governors and majors pay half of their monthly $30 wage to their families and pay war risk insurance and buy Liberty Bonds.

Why shouldn’t they?

They aren’t running any risk of being killed or of having their bodies mangled or their minds shattered. They aren’t sleeping in muddy trenches. They aren’t hungry. The soldiers are!

Give capital and industry and labor thirty days to think it over and you will find, by that time, there will be no war. That will smash the war racket – that and nothing else.

Maybe I am a little too optimistic. Capital still has some say. So capital won’t permit the taking of the profit out of war until the people – those who do the suffering and still pay the price – make up their minds that those they elect to office shall do their bidding, and not that of the profiteers.

Another step necessary in this fight to smash the war racket is the limited plebiscite to determine whether a war should be declared. A plebiscite not of all the voters but merely of those who would be called upon to do the fighting and dying. There wouldn’t be very much sense in having a 76-year-old president of a munitions factory or the flat-footed head of an international banking firm or the cross-eyed manager of a uniform manufacturing plant – all of whom see visions of tremendous profits in the event of war – voting on whether the nation should go to war or not. They never would be called upon to shoulder arms – to sleep in a trench and to be shot. Only those who would be called upon to risk their lives for their country should have the privilege of voting to determine whether the nation should go to war.

There is ample precedent for restricting the voting to those affected. Many of our states have restrictions on those permitted to vote. In most, it is necessary to be able to read and write before you may vote. In some, you must own property. It would be a simple matter each year for the men coming of military age to register in their communities as they did in the draft during the World War and be examined physically. Those who could pass and who would therefore be called upon to bear arms in the event of war would be eligible to vote in a limited plebiscite. They should be the ones to have the power to decide – and not a Congress few of whose members are within the age limit and fewer still of whom are in physical condition to bear arms. Only those who must suffer should have the right to vote.

A third step in this business of smashing the war racket is to make certain that our military forces are truly forces for defense only.

At each session of Congress the question of further naval appropriations comes up. The swivel-chair admirals of Washington (and there are always a lot of them) are very adroit lobbyists. And they are smart. They don’t shout that “We need a lot of battleships to war on this nation or that nation.” Oh no. First of all, they let it be known that America is menaced by a great naval power. Almost any day, these admirals will tell you, the great fleet of this supposed enemy will strike suddenly and annihilate 125,000,000 people. Just like that. Then they begin to cry for a larger navy. For what? To fight the enemy? Oh my, no. Oh, no. For defense purposes only.

Then, incidentally, they announce maneuvers in the Pacific. For defense. Uh, huh.

The Pacific is a great big ocean. We have a tremendous coastline on the Pacific. Will the maneuvers be off the coast, two or three hundred miles? Oh, no. The maneuvers will be two thousand, yes, perhaps even thirty-five hundred miles, off the coast.

The Japanese, a proud people, of course will be pleased beyond expression to see the united States fleet so close to Nippon’s shores. Even as pleased as would be the residents of California were they to dimly discern through the morning mist, the Japanese fleet playing at war games off Los Angeles.

The ships of our navy, it can be seen, should be specifically limited, by law, to within 200 miles of our coastline. Had that been the law in 1898 the Maine would never have gone to Havana Harbor. She never would have been blown up. There would have been no war with Spain with its attendant loss of life. Two hundred miles is ample, in the opinion of experts, for defense purposes. Our nation cannot start an offensive war if its ships can’t go further than 200 miles from the coastline. Planes might be permitted to go as far as 500 miles from the coast for purposes of reconnaissance. And the army should never leave the territorial limits of our nation.

To summarize: Three steps must be taken to smash the war racket.

We must take the profit out of war.

We must permit the youth of the land who would bear arms to decide whether or not there should be war.

We must limit our military forces to home defense purposes.

Chapter Five

TO HELL WITH WAR!

I am not a fool as to believe that war is a thing of the past. I know the people do not want war, but there is no use in saying we cannot be pushed into another war.

Looking back, Woodrow Wilson was re-elected president in 1916 on a platform that he had “kept us out of war” and on the implied promise that he would “keep us out of war.” Yet, five months later he asked Congress to declare war on Germany.

In that five-month interval the people had not been asked whether they had changed their minds. The 4,000,000 young men who put on uniforms and marched or sailed away were not asked whether they wanted to go forth to suffer and die.

Then what caused our government to change its mind so suddenly?

Money.

An allied commission, it may be recalled, came over shortly before the war declaration and called on the President. The President summoned a group of advisers. The head of the commission spoke. Stripped of its diplomatic language, this is what he told the President and his group:

“There is no use kidding ourselves any longer. The cause of the allies is lost. We now owe you (American bankers, American munitions makers, American manufacturers, American speculators, American exporters) five or six billion dollars.

If we lose (and without the help of the United States we must lose) we, England, France and Italy, cannot pay back this money…and Germany won’t. So...

“Had secrecy been outlawed as far as war negotiations were concerned, and had the press been invited to be present at that conference, or had radio been available to broadcast the proceedings, America never would have entered the World War. But this conference, like all war discussions, was shrouded in utmost secrecy. When our boys were sent off to war they were told it was a “war to make the world safe for democracy” and a “war to end all wars.”

Well, eighteen years after, the world has less of democracy than it had then. Besides, what business is it of ours whether Russia or Germany or England or France or Italy or Austria live under democracies or monarchies? Whether they are Fascists or Communists? Our problem is to preserve our own democracy.

And very little, if anything, has been accomplished to assure us that the World War was really the war to end all wars.

Yes, we have had disarmament conferences and limitations of arms conferences. They don’t mean a thing. One has just failed; the results of another have been nullified. We send our professional soldiers and our sailors and our politicians and our diplomats to these conferences. And what happens?

The professional soldiers and sailors don’t want to disarm. No admiral wants to be without a ship. No general wants to be without a command. Both mean men without jobs. They are not for disarmament. They cannot be for limitations of arms. And at all these conferences, lurking in the background but all-powerful, just the same, are the sinister agents of those who profit by war. They see to it that these conferences do not disarm or seriously limit armaments.

The chief aim of any power at any of these conferences has not been to achieve disarmament to prevent war but rather to get more armament for itself and less for any potential foe.

There is only one way to disarm with any semblance of practicability. That is for all nations to get together and scrap every ship, every gun, every rifle, every tank, every war plane. Even this, if it were possible, would not be enough.

The next war, according to experts, will be fought not with battleships, not by artillery, not with rifles and not with machine guns. It will be fought with deadly chemicals and gases.

Secretly each nation is studying and perfecting newer and ghastlier means of annihilating its foes wholesale. Yes, ships will continue to be built, for the shipbuilders must make their profits. And guns still will be manufactured and powder and rifles will be made, for the munitions makers must make their huge profits. And the soldiers, of course, must wear uniforms, for the manufacturer must make their war profits too.

But victory or defeat will be determined by the skill and ingenuity of our scientists.

If we put them to work making poison gas and more and more fiendish mechanical and explosive instruments of destruction, they will have no time for the constructive job of building greater prosperity for all peoples. By putting them to this useful job, we can all make more money out of peace than we can out of war – even the munitions makers.

So…I say,

TO HELL WITH WAR!

Source

How to Vanquish Fear

Hi! I think that most people fight with fear sometime in his life and I have noticed that if you want to conquer your fears the best practice is to face them. If you have an situation you don’t want to be you just have to face it. So build up your courage and step right in to the hell. I have done this many times and the ending is always the same… no fear anymore, so just do it my friends… face your worst fears and be free. Here is an article about fear:

How to Vanquish Fear

[Editor’s Note: This title of this piece was provided by Justin, the person who sent this excerpted conversation between Carlos Castenedas and don Juan, the Yaqui shaman who explains to Carlos the nature of the hidden fourth dimensional predators who plague humanity. Don Juan calls them the “flyers.” The name refers to the darting shadows that some people can notice from the corner of their eyes when in a dark room. I’m not an expert on Carlos Castenedas books, but I think he wrote them in the 1940’s and 50’s. I’m greatly impressed by the information being relayed here. This information would have been very hard to accept at that time, as we were only starting to become aware of UFOs and an alien presence. In 2007, we now possess much more information about the alien manipulators that control the leaders of all major governments and are, in fact, the driving force behind the implementation of the New World Order nightmare. I remind readers of a comment that Phil Schneider made to a question from someone in his audience at his last lecture given in September of 1995 in Seattle, Washington. He said that “the alien agenda and the New World Order agenda are one and the same.”

Don Juan explains that these aliens think of (and treat) humans as a food source and can overlay the human psyche in order to keep us dumbed down and unaware of their influence, however, it’s possible, he says, to dislodge them through discipline. By allowing ourselves to be immersed in destructive emotions: fear, anxiety, anger, strife, jealousy, competitiveness, the dog-eat-dog mentality (just think of the daily fare on TV-Court TV, Survival shows, Reality shows, Apprentice  shows,  violent cartoons, Jerry Springer type shows, etc.) we hold at minimum our “shining coat of awareness”, thus serving the alien agenda. We can rebuild our “shining coat” and no longer be under the influence of those dark forces by removing the “self” from our focus of existence.

There is much food for thought here. I encourage you to read this piece and ponder what is being discussed. Our thanks to Justin for sending it….Ken]

http://educate-yourself.org/cn/howtovanquishfear23may07.shtml
May 23, 2007

How to Vanquish Fear (Don Juan & Carlos Castenedas) May 23, 2007

Subject: How to vanquish fear
From: Justin
Date: Wed, May 23, 2007
To:   Editor

Dear Ken,

Thanks for your great site, thought you might appreciate this.

How to vanquish the predator’s foreign installation of fear = Bravely, courageously, facing infinity with inner silence.

Please keep up the good work, your site promotes awareness.

Sincerely,

Justin


A conversation between Carlos Castenedas and Yaqui shaman don Juan

“They discovered that we have a companion for life,” he said, as clearly as he could. “We have a predator that came from the depths of the cosmos, and took over the rule of our lives. Human beings are its prisoners. The predator is our lord and master.

“It has rendered us docile; helpless. If we want to protest, it suppresses our protest. If we want to act independently, it demands that we don’t do so.”

It was very dark around us, and that seemed to curtail any expression on my part. If it had been daylight, I would have laughed my head off. In the dark, I felt quite inhibited.

“It’s pitch black around us,” don Juan said, “but if you look out of the corner of your eye, you will still see fleeting shadows jumping all around you.”

He was right. I could still see them. Their movement made me dizzy. Don Juan turned on the light, and that seemed to dissipate everything.

Don Juan said, “You have arrived, by your effort alone, to what the shamans of ancient Mexico called the topic of topics.

“I have been beating around the bush all this time, insinuating to you that something is holding us prisoner. Indeed we are held prisoner! This was an energetic fact for the sorcerers of ancient Mexico.”

“Why has this predator taken over in the fashion that you’re describing, don Juan?” I asked. “There must be a logical explanation.”

“There is an explanation,” don Juan replied, “which is the simplest explanation in the world.

“They took over because we are food for them, and they squeeze us mercilessly because we are their sustenance.

“Just as we rear chickens in chicken coops, gallineros, the predators rear us in human coops, humaneros. Therefore, their food is always available to them.”

I felt that my head was shaking violently from side to side. I could not express my profound sense of unease and discontentment, but my body moved to bring it to the surface. I shook from head to toe without any volition on my part.

I heard myself saying, “No, no, no, no. This is absurd, don Juan. What you’re saying is something monstrous. It simply can’t be true, for sorcerers, or for average men, or for anyone.”

“Why not?” don Juan asked calmly. “Why not? Because it infuriates you?”

“Yes, it infuriates me,” I retorted. “Those claims are monstrous!”

“Well,” he said, “you haven’t heard all the claims yet. Wait a bit longer and see how you feel.

“I’m going to subject you to a blitz. That is, I’m going to subject your mind to tremendous onslaughts; and you cannot get up and leave because you’re caught. Not because I’m holding you prisoner, but because something in you will prevent you from leaving while another part of you is going to go truthfully berserk. So brace yourself!”

There was something in me which I felt was a ‘glutton for punishment’. He was right. I wouldn’t have left the house for the world; and yet I didn’t like one bit the inanities he was spouting.

Don Juan said, “I want to appeal to your analytical mind. Think for a moment, and tell me how you would explain the contradiction between the intelligence of man the engineer, and the stupidity of his systems of beliefs; or the stupidity of his contradictory behavior.

“Sorcerers believe that the predators have given us our systems of beliefs; our ideas of good and evil; our social mores. The predators are the ones who set up our hopes and expectations, and dreams of success or failure. They have given us covetousness, [* covetousness- an envious eagerness to possess something] greed, and cowardice. It is the predators who make us complacent, routinary, and egomaniacal.”

“But how can they do this, don Juan?” I asked, somehow angered further by what he was saying. “Do they whisper all that in our ears while we are asleep?”

“No, they don’t do it that way. That’s idiotic!” don Juan said, smiling. “They are infinitely more efficient and organized than that.

“In order to keep us obedient, meek and weak, the predators engaged themselves in a stupendous maneuver- stupendous, of course, from the point of view of a fighting strategist; a horrendous maneuver from the point of view of those who suffer it.

“They gave us their mind! Do you hear me? The predators give us their mind which becomes our mind. The predators’ mind is baroque, contradictory, morose, and filled with the fear of being discovered any minute now.

“I know that even though you have never suffered hunger,” he went on, “you have food anxiety which is none other than the anxiety of the predator who fears that any moment now its maneuver is going to be uncovered, and its food is going to be denied.

“Through the mind, which after all is their mind, the predators inject into the lives of human beings whatever is convenient for them. The predators ensure in this manner a degree of security to act as a buffer against their fear.”

“It’s not that I can’t accept all this at face value, don Juan,” I said. “I could, but there’s something so odious about it that it actually repels me. It forces me to take a contradictory stand.

“If it’s true that they eat us, how do they do it?”

Don Juan had a broad smile on his face. He was as pleased as punch.

He explained that sorcerers see infant human beings as strange, luminous balls of energy covered from the top to the bottom with a glowing coat something like a plastic cover that is adjusted tightly over their cocoon of energy.

He said that that glowing coat of awareness was what the predators consumed, and that when a human being reached adulthood, all that was left of that glowing coat of awareness was a narrow fringe that went from the ground to the top of the toes. That fringe permitted mankind to continue living, but only barely.

As if I were in a dream, I heard don Juan explaining that, to his knowledge, man was the only species that had the glowing coat of awareness outside that luminous cocoon. Therefore, he became easy prey for an awareness of a different order; such as the heavy awareness of the predator.

He then made the most damaging statement he had made so far. He said that this narrow fringe of awareness was the epicenter of self-reflection where man was irremediably caught.

By playing on our self-reflection, which is the only point of awareness left to us, the predators create flares of awareness that they proceed to consume in a ruthless, predatory fashion.

They give us inane problems that force those flares of awareness to rise, and in this manner they keep us alive in order for them to be fed with the energetic flare of our pseudo-concerns.

There must have been something in what don Juan was saying which was so devastating to me that at that point I actually got sick to my stomach.

After a moment’s pause long enough for me to recover, I asked don Juan, “But why is it that the sorcerers of ancient Mexico and all sorcerers today, although they see the predators, don’t do anything about it?”

“There’s nothing that you and I can do about it,” don Juan said in a grave, sad voice. “All we can do is discipline ourselves to the point where they will not touch us.

“How can you ask your fellow men to go through those rigors of discipline? They’ll laugh and make fun of you; and the more aggressive ones will beat the shit out of you- and not so much because they don’t believe it.

“Down in the depths of every human being, there is an ancestral, visceral [* visceral- obtained through intuition rather than from reasoning or observation] knowledge about the predators’ existence.”

My analytical mind swung back and forth like a yo-yo. It left me and came back, and left me and came back again. Whatever don Juan was proposing was preposterous, incredible.

At the same time, it was a most reasonable thing; so simple. It explained every kind of human contradiction I could think of.

But how could one have taken all this seriously? Don Juan was pushing me into the path of an avalanche that would take me down forever.

I felt another wave of a threatening sensation. The wave didn’t stem from me, yet it was attached to me. Don Juan was doing something to me, mysteriously positive and terribly negative at the same time. I sensed it as an attempt to cut a thin film that seemed to be glued to me.

His eyes were fixed on mine in an unblinking stare. He moved his eyes away, and began to talk without looking at me anymore.

“Whenever doubts plague you to a dangerous point,” he said, “do something pragmatic about it. Turn off the light. Pierce the darkness; find out what you can see.”  He got up to turn off the lights. I stopped him.

“No, no, don Juan,” I said, “don’t turn off the lights. I’m doing okay.”

What I felt then was a most unusual, for me, fear of the darkness. The mere thought of it made me pant. I definitely knew something viscerally, [* visceral- relating to or affecting internal organs collectively rather than from reasoning or observation] but I wouldn’t dare touch it, or bring it to the surface, not in a million years!

“You saw the fleeting shadows against the trees,” don Juan said, sitting back against his chair. “That’s pretty good. I’d like you to see them inside this room. You’re not seeing anything. You’re just merely catching fleeting images. You have enough energy for that.”

I feared that don Juan would get up anyway and turn off the lights, which he did. Two seconds later, I was screaming my head off. Not only did I catch a glimpse of those fleeting images, I heard them buzzing by my ears.

Don Juan doubled up with laughter as he turned on the lights.

“What a temperamental fellow!” he said. “A total disbeliever, on the one hand; and a total pragmatist on the other.

“You must arrange this internal fight, otherwise you’re going to swell up like a big toad and burst.”

Don Juan kept on pushing his barb deeper and deeper into me. “The sorcerers of ancient Mexico,” he said, “saw the predator. They called it the flyer because it leaps through the air. It is not a pretty sight. It is a big shadow, impenetrably dark, a black shadow that jumps through the air. Then, it lands flat on the ground.

“The sorcerers of ancient Mexico were quite ill at ease with the idea of when it made its appearance on Earth. They reasoned that man must have been a complete being at one point, with stupendous insights and feats of awareness that are mythological legends nowadays. And then everything seems to disappear, and we have now a sedated man.”

I wanted to get angry and call him a paranoiac, but somehow the righteousness that was usually just underneath the surface of my being wasn’t there.

Something in me was beyond the point of asking myself my favorite question: What if all that he said is true? At the moment he was talking to me that night, in my heart of hearts, I felt that all of what he was saying was true, but at the same time and with equal force, I felt that all that he was saying was absurdity itself.

“What are you saying, don Juan?” I asked feebly. My throat was constricted. I could hardly breathe.

“What I’m saying is that what we have against us is not a simple predator. It is very smart and organized. It follows a methodical system to render us useless. Man, the magical being that he is destined to be, is no longer magical. He’s an average piece of meat. There are no more dreams for man but the dreams of an animal who is being raised to become a piece of meat: trite, conventional, imbecilic.”

Don Juan’s words were eliciting a strange, bodily reaction in me comparable to the sensation of nausea. It was as if I were going to get sick to my stomach again. But the nausea was coming from the bottom of my being, from the marrow of my bones. I convulsed involuntarily.

Don Juan shook me by the shoulders forcefully. I felt my neck wobbling back and forth under the impact of his grip. The maneuver calmed me down at once. I felt more in control.

“This predator,” don Juan said, “which, of course, is an inorganic being, is not altogether invisible to us as other inorganic beings are. I think as children we do see it, but we decide it’s so horrific that we don’t want to think about it.

“Children, of course, could insist on focusing on the sight, but everybody else around them dissuades them from doing so.

Continuing, he said, “The only alternative left for mankind is discipline. Discipline is the only deterrent.

“But by discipline I don’t mean harsh routines. I don’t mean waking up every morning at five-thirty and throwing cold water on yourself until you’re blue.

“Sorcerers understand discipline as the capacity to face with serenity odds that are not included in our expectations. For sorcerers, discipline is an art; the art of facing infinity without flinching; not because they are strong and tough, but because they are filled with awe.”

“In what way would the sorcerers’ discipline be a deterrent to the flyers?” I asked.

Don Juan scrutinized my face as if to discover any signs of my disbelief. He said,”Sorcerers say that discipline makes the glowing coat of awareness unpalatable to the flyer.

“The result is that the predators become bewildered. An inedible glowing coat of awareness is not part of their cognition, I suppose. After being bewildered, they don’t have any recourse other than refraining from continuing their nefarious [* nefarious- extremely wicked] task.

He continued, saying, “If the predators don’t eat our glowing coat of awareness for a while, it will keep on growing. Simplifying this matter to the extreme, I can say that sorcerers, by means of their discipline, push the predators away long enough to allow their glowing coat of awareness to grow beyond the level of the toes. Once it goes beyond the level of the toes, it grows back to its natural size.

“The sorcerers of ancient Mexico used to say that the glowing coat of awareness is like a tree. If it is not pruned, it grows to its natural size and volume. As awareness reaches levels higher than the toes, tremendous maneuvers of perception become a matter of course.

“The grand trick of those sorcerers of ancient times,” don Juan continued, “was to burden the flyers’ mind with discipline.

“Sorcerers found out that if they taxed the flyers’ mind with inner silence, the foreign installation would flee, and give any one of the practitioners involved in this maneuver the total certainty of the mind’s foreign origin.

“The foreign installation comes back, I assure you, but not as strong; and a process begins in which the fleeing of the flyers’ mind becomes routine until one day it flees permanently.

“That’s the day when you have to rely on your own devices which are nearly zero. A sad day indeed! There’s no one to tell you what to do. There’s no mind of foreign origin to dictate the imbecilities you’re accustomed to.

“My teacher, the nagual Julian, used to warn all his disciples,” don Juan continued,”that this was the toughest day in a sorcerer’s life for the real mind that belongs to us.

“The sum total of our experience after a lifetime of domination has been rendered shy, insecure, and shifty.

“Personally, I would say that the real battle of sorcerers begins at that moment. The rest is merely preparation.”

I became genuinely agitated. I wanted to know more, and yet a strange feeling in me clamored for me to stop. It alluded to dark results and punishment, something like the wrath of God descending on me for tampering with something veiled by God himself. I made a supreme effort to allow my curiosity to win.

I heard myself say, “What-what-what do you mean, by taxing the flyers’ mind?”

“Discipline taxes the foreign mind no end,” he replied. “So, through their discipline, sorcerers vanquish the foreign installation.”

I was overwhelmed by his statements. I believed that don Juan was either certifiably insane or that he was telling me something so awesome that it froze everything in me.

I noticed, however how quickly I rallied my energy to deny everything he had said. After an instant of panic, I began to laugh, as if don Juan had told me a joke. I even heard myself saying, “Don Juan, don Juan, you’re incorrigible!” [* incorrigible- not capable of being affected by correction or punishment]

Don Juan seemed to understand everything I was experiencing. He shook his head from side to side, and raised his eyes to the heavens in a gesture of mock despair.

He said, “I am so incorrigible, that I am going to give the flyers’ mind which you carry inside you one more jolt. I am going to reveal to you one of the most extraordinary secrets of sorcery. I am going to describe to you a finding that took sorcerers thousands of years to verify and consolidate.”

He looked at me, smiled maliciously, and said, “The flyers’ mind flees forever when a sorcerer succeeds in grabbing on to the vibrating force that holds us together as a conglomerate of energy fields. If a sorcerer maintains that pressure long enough, the flyers’ mind flees in defeat. And that’s exactly what you are going to do; hold on to the energy that binds you together.”

I had the most inexplicable reaction I could have imagined. Something in me actually shook, as if it had received a jolt. I entered into a state of unwarranted fear, which I immediately associated with my religious background.

Don Juan looked at me from head to toe.

“You are fearing the wrath of God, aren’t you?” he said. “Rest assured, that’s not your fear. It’s the flyers’ fear, because it knows that you will do exactly as I’m telling you.”

His words did not calm me at all. I felt worse. I was actually convulsing involuntarily, and I had no means to stop it.

“Don’t worry,” don Juan said calmly. “I know for a fact that those attacks wear off very quickly. The flyer’s mind has no concentration whatsoever.”

After a moment, everything stopped as don Juan had predicted. To say again that I was bewildered is a euphemism. [* euphemism- an inoffensive expression that is substituted for one that is considered offensive]

This was the first time in my life ever, with don Juan or alone, that I didn’t know whether I was coming or going.

I wanted to get out of the chair and walk around, but I was deathly afraid. I was filled with rational assertions, and at the same time I was filled with an infantile fear.

I began to breathe deeply as a cold perspiration covered my entire body. I had somehow unleashed on myself a most godawful sight: black, fleeting shadows jumping all around me wherever I turned.

I closed my eyes and rested my head on the arm of the stuffed chair. “I don’t know which way to turn, don Juan,” I said. “Tonight, you have really succeeded in getting me lost.”

Don Juan said, “You’re being torn by an internal struggle.

“Down in the depths of you, you know that you are incapable of refusing the agreement that an indispensable part of you, your glowing coat of awareness, is going to serve as an incomprehensible source of nourishment to, naturally, incomprehensible entities.

“And another part of you will stand against this situation with all its might.

“The sorcerers’ revolution,” he continued, “is that they refuse to honor agreements in which they did not participate.

“Nobody ever asked me if I would consent to being eaten by beings of a different kind of awareness. My parents just brought me into this world to be food, like themselves, and that’s the end of the story.”

Don Juan stood up from his chair and stretched his arms and legs. “We have been sitting here for hours. It’s time to go into the house. I’m going to eat. Do you want to eat with me?”

I declined. My stomach was in an uproar.

“I think you’d better go to sleep,” he said. “The blitz has devastated you.”

I didn’t need any further coaxing. I collapsed onto my bed, and fell asleep like the dead.

At home, as time went by, the idea of the flyers became one of the main fixations of my life. I got to the point where I felt that don Juan was absolutely right about them. No matter how hard I tried, I couldn’t discard his logic.

The more I thought about it, and the more I talked to and observed myself, and my fellow men, the more intense the conviction that something was rendering us incapable of any activity or any interaction or any thought that didn’t have the self as its focal point.

My concern, as well as the concern of everyone I knew or talked to, was the self.

Since I couldn’t find any explanation for such universal homogeneity, I believed that don Juan’s line of thought was the most appropriate way of elucidating the phenomenon.

I went as deeply as I could into readings about myths and legends. In reading, I experienced something I had never felt before: Each of the books I read was an interpretation of myths and legends. In each one of those books, a homogeneous mind was palpable.

The styles differed, but the drive behind the words was homogeneously the same: Even though the theme was something as abstract as myths and legends, the authors always managed to insert statements about themselves. The homogeneous drive behind every one of those books was not the stated theme of the book. Instead, it was self-service. I had never felt this before.

I attributed my reaction to don Juan’s influence. The unavoidable question that I posed to myself was: Is he influencing me to see this, or is there really a foreign mind dictating everything we do?

I lapsed, perforce, into denial again, and I went insanely from denial to acceptance to denial. Something in me knew that whatever don Juan was driving at was an energetic fact; but something equally important in me knew that all of that was guff.

The end result of my internal struggle was a sense of foreboding; the sense of something imminently dangerous coming at me.

I made extensive anthropological inquiries into the subject of the flyers in other cultures, but I couldn’t find any references to them anywhere. Don Juan seemed to be the only source of information about this matter.

The next time I saw him, I instantly jumped to talk about the flyers.

I said, “I have tried my best to be rational about this subject matter, but I can’t. There are moments when I fully agree with you about the predators.”

“Focus your attention on the fleeting shadows that you actually see,” don Juan said with a smile.

I told don Juan that those fleeting shadows were going to be the end of my rational life. I saw them everywhere.

Since I had left his house, I was incapable of going to sleep in the dark. To sleep with the lights on did not bother me at all. The moment I turned the lights off, however, everything around me began to jump. I never saw complete figures or shapes. All I saw were fleeting black shadows.

“The flyers’ mind has not left you,” don Juan said. “It has been seriously injured. It’s trying its best to rearrange its relationship with you. But something in you is severed forever. The flyer knows that. The real danger is that the flyers’ mind may win by getting you tired and forcing you to quit by playing the contradiction between what it says and what I say.

“You see, the flyers’ mind has no competitors,” don Juan continued. “When it proposes something, it agrees with its own proposition, and it makes you believe that you’ve done something of worth.

“The flyers’ mind will say to you that whatever Juan Matus is telling you is pure nonsense, and then the same mind will agree with its own proposition, ‘Yes, of course, it is nonsense,’ you will say. That’s the way they overcome us.

“The flyers are an essential part of the universe,” he went on, “and they must be taken as what they really are- awesome, monstrous. They are the means by which the universe tests us.

“We are energetic probes created by the universe,” he continued as if he were oblivious to my presence, “and it’s because we are possessors of energy that has awareness that we are the means by which the universe becomes aware of itself.

“The flyers are the implacable [* implacable- incapable of being more favourably inclined, or gaining the good will of] challengers. They cannot be taken as anything else. If we succeed in doing that, the universe allows us to continue.”

I wanted don Juan to say more. But he said only, “The blitz ended the last time you were here. There’s only so much to be said about the flyers.

Source

Prelude to Afternoon of an Alien

What happens when “They” arrive?:

‘Prelude to Afternoon of an Alien’
(Composed by the Olympians, with orchestration by the Tavistock Institute,
under the generous sponsorship of the Royal Institute of International Affairs)

[Editor’s Note: I’ve already mentioned ‘The Aliens are Coming, The Aliens are Coming!’ scenario in previous articles that touched on the hoaxed alien invasion scenario or its friendly counterpart, ‘Aliens Landing on the White House lawn’, or even more likely, ‘The Really Big Show in the Sky’ variation of alien spacecraft seen by millions around the world and shown on TV everywhere (as indicated in the disinformation piece reprinted below). Matthew also mentioned this very routine in one of his recent messages. All of these aliens-in-your-face scenarios are scripted deceptions by the Illuminati to dupe us. As usual, the Illuminati wants to control both sides of their concocted conflicts, so we will either get the ‘aliens as our buddies who will help save us from ourselves’ scenario (as suggested below) OR we will be given the ‘aliens are a deadly mortal threat to all of humanity; requiring that we all ban together under one world governemnt and accede to military control over our lives – or a combinations of the two. The plan to use the ‘disclosure’ of aliens as a set up for eventually getting humanity to band together under a One World government (for our mutual ‘protection and defense’ of course) was laid out in Project Blue Beam over 50 years ago. These plans have been in the making for a long time. Isn’t it about time that you came up to speed on this hoax? Also see the linked articles posted at the bottom of this page. …Ken]. ,

http://educate-yourself.org/cn/aliensarecomingprelude16apr05.shtml
April 16, 2005

—– Original Message —–
From: george.z
To: Editor@educate-yourself.org
Sent: Saturday, April 16, 2005
Subject: From my village to yours

Dear Ken,

Have you seen this: http://www.geocities.com/meetetnow/Changetheworld1.htm

I would be interested in your opinion.

Best regards,

George Ziegler


Change the World!
Decide Whether We Should Show Up!

http://www.geocities.com/meetetnow/Changetheworld1.htm

Whoever transmitted this translated message to you is irrelevant, and should remain anonymous in your mind. It is what you will do with this message which matters !

Each one of you wishes to exercise her/his free will and experience happiness.

These are attributes that were shown to us and to which we now have access. Your free will depends upon the knowledge you have of your own power. Your happiness depends upon the love that you give and receive.

Like all conscious races at this stage of progress, you may feel isolated on your planet. This impression makes you sure of your destiny. Yet, you are at the brink of big upheavals that only a minority is aware of.

It is not our responsibility to modify your future without you choosing it. Consider this message as a worldwide referendum! And your answer as a ballot!

Who are we?
Neither your scientists nor your religious representatives speak unanimously about the unexplained celestial events that mankind has witnessed for thousands of years. To know the truth, one must face it without the filter of one’s beliefs, however respectable they may be.

A growing number of anonymous researchers of yours are exploring new knowledge paths and are getting very close to reality. Today, your civilisation is flooded with an ocean of information of which only a tiny part, the less upsetting one, is notably diffused.

What in your history seemed ridiculous or improbable has often become possible, then realised, in particular in the last fifty years. Be aware that the future will be even more surprising. You will discover the worst as well as the best.

Like billions others in this galaxy, we are conscious creatures that some name “extra-terrestrials”, even though reality is subtler.

There is no fundamental difference between you and us, save for the experience of certain stages of evolution. Like in any other organised structure, hierarchy exists in our internal relationships. Ours is based upon the wisdom of several races. It is with the approval of this hierarchy that we turn to you.

Like most of you, we are in the quest of the Supreme Being. Therefore we are not gods or lesser gods but virtually your equals in the Cosmic Brotherhood.

Physically, we are somewhat different from you but for most of us humanoid-shaped.

Our existence is a reality but the majority of you does not perceive it yet. We are not mere observations, we are consciences just like you. You fail to apprehend us because we remain invisible to your senses and measure instruments most of the time.

We wish to fill this void at this moment in your history. We made this collective decision but this is not enough. We need yours. Through this message, you become the decision-makers ! You personally.

We have no human representative on Earth who could guide your decision.

Why aren’t we visible?
At certain stages of evolution, cosmic “humanities” discover new forms of science beyond the apparent control of matter. Structured dematerialisation and materialisation are part of them. This is what your humanity has reached in a few laboratories, in close collaboration with other “extra-terrestrial” creatures at the cost of hazardous compromises that remain purposedly hidden from you by some of your representatives.

Apart from the aerial or spatial objects or phenomena known about by your scientific community, that you call ‘UFOs, there are essentially multidimensional manufactured spaceships that apply these capacities.

Many human beings have been in visual, auditory, tactile or psychic contact with such ships, some of which are under occult powers that “govern” you. The scarcity of your observations is due to the outstanding advantages provided by the dematerialised state of these ships.

By not witnessing them by yourself, you cannot believe in their existence. We fully understand this.

The majority of these observations are made on an individual basis so as to touch the soul and not to modify any organised system. This is deliberate from the races that surround you but for very different reasons and results.

For negative multidimensional beings that play a part in the exercise of power in the shadow of human oligarchy, discretion is motivated by their will to keep their existence and seizure unknown.

For us, discretion is motivated by the respect of the human free will that people can exercise to manage their own affairs so that they can reach technical and spiritual maturity on their own. Humankind’s entrance into the family of galactic civilisations is greatly expected.

We can appear in broad daylight and help you attain this union. We haven’t done it so far, as too few of you have genuinely desired it, because of ignorance, indifference or fear, and because the emergency of the situation did not justify it. Many of those who study our appearances count the lights in the night without lighting the way. Often they think in terms of objects when it is all about conscious beings.

Who are you?
You are the offspring of many traditions that throughout time have been mutually enriched by each others’ contributions. The same applies to the races at the surface of the Earth. Your goal is to unite in the respect of these roots to accomplish a common project. The appearance of your cultures seems to keep you separated because you substitute it to your deeper being. Shape is now more important than the essence of your subtle nature. For the powers in place, this prevalence of the shape constitutes the ramparts against any form of jeopardy.

You are being called on to overcome shape while still respecting it for its richness and beauty. Understanding the conscience of shape makes us love men in their diversity. Peace does not mean not making war, it consists in becoming what you are in reality: a same Fraternity.

To understand this, the number of solutions within your reach are decreasing. One of them consists in contact with another race that would reflect the image of what you are in reality.

What is your situation?
Except for rare occasions, our interventions always had very little incidence on your capacity to make collective and individual decisions about your own future. This is motivated by our knowledge of your deep psychological mechanisms.

We reached the conclusion that freedom is built every day as a being becomes aware of himself and of his environment, getting progressively rid of constraints and inertias, whatever they may be. Despite the numerous, brave and willing human consciences, those inertias are artificially maintained for the profit of a growing centralising power.

Until recently, mankind lived a satisfying control of its decisions. But it is losing more and more the control of its own fate because of the growing use of advanced technologies, which lethal consequences on the earthly and human ecosystems become irreversible. You are slowly but surely losing your extraordinary capacity to make life desirable. Your resilience will artificially decrease, independently of your own will. Such technologies exist that affect your body as well as your mind. Such plans are on their way.

This can change as long as you keep this creative power in you, even if it cohabits with the dark intentions of your potential lords. This is the reason why we remain invisible. This individual power is doomed to vanish should a collective reaction of great magnitude not happen. The period to come is that of rupture, whichever it may be.

But should you wait for the last moment to find solutions ? Should you anticipate or undergo pain ?

Your history has never ceased to be marked by encounters between peoples who had to discover one another in conditions that were often conflictual. Conquests almost always happened to the detriment of others. Earth has now become a village where everyone knows everyone else but still conflicts persist and threats of all kinds get worse in duration and intensity.

Although a Human being as an individual, yet having many potential capacities, cannot exercise them with dignity. This is the case for the biggest majority of you for reasons that are essentially geopolitical.

There are several billion of you. The education of your children and your living conditions, as well as the conditions of numerous animals and much plant life are nevertheless under the thumb of a small number of your political, financial, military and religious representatives.

Your thoughts and beliefs are modelled after partisan interests to turn you into slaves while at the same time giving you the feeling that you are in total control of your destiny, which in essence is the reality.

But there is a long way between a wish and a fact when the true rules of the game at hand are unknown. This time, you are not the conqueror. Biasing information is a millenary strategy for human beings. Inducting thoughts, emotions or organisms that do not belong to you via ad hoc technologies is an even older a strategy.

Wonderful opportunities of progress stand close to big subdual and destruction threats. These dangers and opportunities exist now. However, you can only perceive what is being shown to you. The end of natural resources is programmed whereas no long-term collective project has been launched.

Ecosystem exhaustion mechanisms have exceeded irreversible limits. The scarcity of resources and their unfair distribution – resources which entry price will rise day after day – will bring about fratricide fights at a large scale, but also at the very heart of your cities and countrysides.

Hatred grows bigger but so does love. That is what keeps you confident in your ability to find solutions. But the critical mass is insufficient and a sabotage work is cleverly being carried out.

Human behaviours, formed from past habits and trainings, have such an inertia that this perspective leads you to a dead end. You entrust these problems to representatives, whose conscience of common well-being slowly fades away in front of corporatist interests, with those difficulties. They are always debating on the form but rarely on the content.

Just at the moment of action, delays will accumulate to the point when you have to submit rather than choose. This is the reason why, more than ever in your history, your decisions of today will directly and significantly impact your survival of tomorrow.

What event could radically modify this inertia that is typical of any civilisation ? Where will a collective and unifying awareness come from, that will stop this blind rushing ahead ?

Tribes, populations and human nations have always encountered and interacted with one another. Faced with the threats weighing upon the human family, it is perhaps time that a greater interaction occurred.

A great roller wave is on the verge of emerging. It mixes very positive but also very negative aspects.

Who are the “third party”?
There are two ways to establish a cosmic contact with another civilisation: via its standing representatives or directly with individuals without distinction. The first way entails fights of interests, the second way brings awareness.

The first way was chosen by a group of races motivated by keeping mankind in slavery, thereby controlling Earth resources, the gene pool and human emotional energy.

The second way was chosen by a group of races allied with the cause of the Spirit of service. We have, at our end, subscribed to this disinterested cause and introduced ourselves a few years ago to representatives of the human power who refused our outstretched hand on the pretext of incompatible interests with their strategic vision.

That is why today individuals are to make this choice by themselves without any representative interfering. What we proposed in the past to those whom we believed were in a capacity to contribute to your happiness, we propose it now to … you!

Most of you ignore that non-human creatures took part in the exercise of those centralising powers without them being neither suspected nor accessible to your senses. This is so true that they have almost very subtly taken control. They do not necessarily stand on your material plan, and that is precisely what could make them extremely efficient and frightening in the near future. However, be aware that a large number of your representatives are fighting this danger ! Be aware that not all abductions are made against you. It is difficult to recognize the truth !

How could you under such conditions exercise your free will when it is so much manipulated ? What are you really free of ?

Peace and reunification of your peoples would be a first step toward the harmony with civilisations other than yours.

That is precisely what those who manipulate you behind the scenes want to avoid at all cost because, by dividing, they reign! They also reign over those who govern you. Their strength comes from their capacity to distillate mistrust and fear into you. This considerably harms your very cosmic nature.

This message would be of no interest if these manipulators’ tutorate did not reach its peak and if their misleading and murderous plans did not materialise in a few years from now. Their deadlines are close and mankind will undergo unprecedented torments for the next ten cycles.

To defend yourselves against this aggression that bears no face, you need at least to have enough information that leads to the solution.

As is also the case with humans, resistance exists amongst those dominant races. Here again, appearance will not be enough to tell the dominator from the ally. At your current state of psychism, it is extremely difficult for you to distinguish between them. In addition to your intuition, training will be necessary when the time has come.

Being aware of the priceless value of free will, we are inviting you to an alternative.

What can we offer?
We can offer you a more holistic vision of the universe and of life, constructive interactions, the experience of fair and fraternal relationships, liberating technical knowledge, eradiction of suffering, controlled exercise of individual powers, the access to new forms of energy and, finally, a better comprehension of consciousness.

We cannot help you overcome your individual and collective fears, or bring you laws that you would not have chosen, work on your own selves, individual and collective effort to build the world you desire, the spirit of quest to new skies.

What would we receive?
Should you decide that such a contact takes place, we would rejoice over the safeguarding of fraternal equilibrium in this region of the universe, fruitful diplomatic exchanges, and the intense Joy of knowing that you are united to accomplish what you are capable of. The feeling of Joy is strongly sought in the universe for its energy is divine.

What is the question we ask you?

“DO YOU WISH THAT WE SHOW UP ?”

How to can you answer this question?
The truth of soul can be read by telepathy. You only need to clearly ask yourself this question and give your answer as clearly, on your own or in a group, as you wish. Being in the heart of a city or in the middle of a desert does not impact the efficiency of your answer, YES or NO, IMMEDIATELY AFTER ASKING THE QUESTION! Just do it as if you were speaking to yourself but thinking about the message.

This is a universal question and these mere few words, put in their context, have a powerful meaning. You should not let hesitation in the way. This is why you should calmly think about it, in all conscience. In order to perfectly associate your answer with the question, it is recommended that you answer right after another reading of this message.

Do not rush to answer. Breathe and let all the power of your own free will penetrate you. Be proud of what you are ! The problems that you may have weaken you. Forget about them for a few minutes to be yourselves. Feel the force that springs up in you. You are in control of yourselves !

A single thought, a single answer can drastically change your near future, in one way as in another.

Your individual decision of asking in your inner self that we show up on your material plan and in broad daylight is precious and essential to us.

Even though you can choose the way that best suits you, rituals are essentially useless. A sincere request made with your heart and your own will will always be perceived by those of us whom it is sent to.

In your own private polling booth of your secret will, you will determine the future.

What is the lever effect ?
This decision should be made by the greatest number among you, even though it might seem like a minority. It is recommended to spread this message, in all envisageable fashions, in as many languages as possible, to those around you, whether or not they seem receptive to this new vision of the future.

Do it using in a humorous tone or derision if that can help you. You can even openly and publicly make fun of it if it makes you feel more comfortable but do not be indifferent for at least you will have exercised your free will.

Forget about the false prophets and the beliefs that have been transmitted to you about us. This request is one of the most intimate that can be asked to you.
Making a decision by yourself, as an individual, is your right as well as your responsibility !

Passivity only leads to the absence of freedom. Similarly, indecision is never efficient. If you really want to cling to your beliefs, which is something that we understand, then say NO. If you do not know what to choose, do not say YES because of mere curiosity. This is not a show, this is real daily life, WE ARE ALIVE ! And living !

Your history has plenty of episodes when determined men and women were able to influence the thread of events in spite of their small number.

Just like a small number is enough to take temporal power on Earth and influence the future of the majority, a small number of you can radically change your fate as an answer to the impotence in face of so much inertia and hurdles ! You can ease the mankind’s birth to Brotherhood.

One of your thinkers once said: “Give me a hand-hold and I’ll raise the Earth”.

Spreading this message will then be the hand-hold to strengthen, we will be the light-years long lever, you will be the craftsmen to … raise the Earth as a consequence of our appearance.

What would be the consequences of a positive decision ?

For us, the immediate consequence of a collective favourable decision would be the materialisation of many ships, in your sky and on Earth.

For you, the direct effect would be the rapid abandoning of many certitudes and beliefs.

A simple conclusive visual contact would have huge repercussions on your future. Much knowledge would be modified forever. The organisation of your societies would be deeply upheaved for ever, in all fields of activity. Power would become individual because you would see for yourself that we are living. Concretely, you would change the scale of your values !

The most important thing for us is that humankind would form a single family in front of this “unknown” we would represent !

Danger would slowly melt away from your homes because you would indirectly force the undesirable ones, those we name the “third party”, to show up and vanish. You would all bear the same name and share the same roots: Mankind !

Later on, peaceful and respectful exchanges would be thus possible if such is your wish. For now, he who is hungry cannot smile, he who is fearful cannot welcome us. We are sad to see men, women and children suffering to such a degree in their flesh and in their hearts when they bear such an inner light.

This light can be your future. Our relationships could be progressive.

Several stages of several years or decades would occur: demonstrative appearance of our ships, physical appearance beside human beings, collaboration in your technical and spiritual evolution, discovery of parts of the galaxy.

Every time, new choices would be offered to you. You would then decide by yourself to cross new stages if you think it necessary to your external and inner well-being. No interference would be decided upon unilaterally. We would leave as soon as you would collectively wish that we do.

Depending upon the speed to spread the message across the world, several weeks, or even several months will be necessary before our “great appearance”, if such is the decision made by the majority of those who will have used their capacity to choose, and if this message receives the necessary support.

The main difference between your daily prayers to entities of a strictly spiritual nature and your current decision is extremely simple :

we are technically equipped to materialise!

Why such a historical dilemma?
We know that “foreigners” are considered as enemies as long as they embody the “unknown”. In a first stage, the emotion that our appearance will generate will strengthen your relationships on a worldwide scale.

How could you know whether our arrival is the consequence of your collective choice ? For the simple reason that we would have otherwise been already there for a long time at your level of existence ! If we are not there yet, it is because you have not made such a decision explicitely.

Some among you might think that we would make you believe in a deliberate choice of yours so as to legitimate our arrival, though this would not be true. What interest would we have to openly offer you what you haven’t got any access to yet, for the benefit of the greatest number of you ?

How could you be certain that this is not yet another subtle manoeuvre of the “third party” to better enslave you ? Because one always more efficiently fights something that is identified than the contrary. Isn’t the terrorism that corrodes you a blatant example ?

Whatever, you are the sole judge in your own heart and soul ! Whatever your choice, it would be respectable and respected ! In the absence of human representatives who could potentially seduce into error you ignore everything about us as well as from about those who manipulate you without your consent.

In your situation, the precautionary principle that consists in not trying to discover us does no longer prevail. You are already in the Pandora’s box that the “third party” has created around you. Whatever your decision may be you will have to get out of it.

In the face of such a dilemma, one ignorance against another, you need to ask your intuition. Do you want to see us with your own eyes, or simply believe what your thinkers say ? That is the real question!

After thousands of years, one day, this choice was going to be inevitable: choosing between two unknowns.

Why spread such a message among yourselves?
Translate and spread this message widely. This action will affect your future in an irreversible and historical way at the scale of milleniums, otherwise, it will postpone a new opportunity to choose to several years later, at least one generation, if it can survive.

Not choosing, stands for undergoing other people’s choice. Not informing others stands for running the risk of obtaining a result that is contrary to one’s expectations. Remaining indifferent means giving up one’s free will.

It is all about your future. It is all about your evolution.

It is possible that this invitation does not receive your collective assent and that, because of a lack of information, it will be disregarded. Nevertheless no individual desire goes unheeded in the universe.

Imagine our arrival tomorrow. Thousands of ships. A unique cultural shock in today’s mankind’s history. It will then be too late to regret about not making a choice and spreading the message because this discovery will be irreversible. We do insist that you do not rush into it, but do think about it ! And decide !

The big medias will not be necessarely interested in spreading this message. It is therefore your task, as an anonymous yet an extraordinary thinking and loving being, to transmit it.

You are still the architects of your own fate…

“DO YOU WISH THAT WE SHOW UP ?”


Related

Project Blue Beam
http://educate-yourself.org/cn/projectbluebeam25jul05.shtml

The Coming “Official” Announcement of the Alien Presence on Earth
http://educate-yourself.org/cn/fakedalieninvasion.shtml

Cosmic Deception: The Hoaxed Alien Invasion Scenario
http://educate-yourself.org/cn/cosmicdeception04apr03.shtml

The Aliens Are Coming! The Aliens Are Coming! Show to Begin This Year?
http://educate-yourself.org/lte/aliensarecomingshow08jul04.shtml

The Aliens Are Here! The Aliens Are Here!
http://educate-yourself.org/cn/aliensarehere07jul05.shtml

Alien Invasion Herald?
http://educate-yourself.org/lte/alieninvasionherald18jul04.shtml

The Alien Invasion Scenario & Other Insights from Matthew Ward (June 3, 2003)
http://educate-yourself.org/mw/mw1message31may03.shtml

The Long Awaited ‘Study’ Exposing ET Infiltration of Military, Intelligence, and Government Departments (June 3, 2003)
http://educate-yourself.org/cn/studycitesetinfiltration03jun03.shtml

Source

Dowsing

Many of you may have used pendulum or such to ask questions from Higher Self or find out the gender of baby with a ring attached to a string. Here is some information about dowsing:

By Ken Adachi <Editor@educate-yourself.org>
http://educate-yourself.org/dow/index.shtml
June 6, 2003

Introduction
We can access higher frequency vibrational planes of consciousness through varied means- meditation, psychedelic drugs, clairvoyance, medium ship, remote viewing, etc. Some means may be harmful or dangerous for some people, while other techniques require natural gifts, and yet others require a lot of training to become competent in.

Dowsing, on the other hand, is one of the easiest ways to access a repository of unlimited knowledge, referred to by Carl Jung as the “collective unconscious” or the “super conscious mind”. Based on the books I’ve studied and the workshops I’ve taken with master dowser Walt Woods, I get the idea that you are gaining access to this library of unlimited knowledge through your Higher Self – with the least amount of time invested in study and training. Many people think that dowsing is only used for the purpose of finding water or minerals, but dowsing can be used to obtain ANSWERS and information about anything, providing you frame the question correctly.

When you dowse, you are engaged in a dialog with your Higher Self and other spirit guides who are trying to assist you in obtaining the information you seek. You are asking a question in your mind that is most often framed with a ‘yes’ or ‘no’ answer. When you learn more advanced dowsing skills, you can ask for answers that go beyond this framework, but most dowsing questions are answered using the ‘yes’ or ‘no’ format. We use very simple indicator tools in dowsing to help us accurately recognize the information we are trying do obtain. The three most common dowsing tools are 1) the pendulum, 2) the “L” rod, and 3) the “Y” rod. There are other types of dowsing tools beyond these three, but these three are the ones most often used.

1) The pendulum is nothing more than some sort of weighted object hung from a thread, a string, a piece of fishing line, or a light chain. You can tie a paper clip to a short length of sewing thread and Voila, you have a pendulum. You could also tie a threaded nut to a length of light monofilament fishing line and you have yourself a dowsing pendulum. Most dowsers like to use something for a pendulum that’s more fancy looking like a turned brass bob or a crystal pendant, but it’s not necessary. There is nothing magical about the pendulum itself. It’s merely an indicator tool, and nothing more. I will add, however, that certain pendulums (made of certain materials) can be more responsive than an ordinary pendulum (and therefore are preferred for that reason), but all pendulums will respond to your questions, regardless of what they are made of.

2) The “L” rod is usually a length of stiff wire shaped like the letter “L”. Usually, we place tubing on the short leg of the “L” so it will rotate freely when we hold the L rod in our lightly clenched hands. The long leg of the “L” is held in a horizontal position out n front of us and it will swing to the left or right in response to the answers we are seeking.

I was nudged into attending a Dowser’s meeting a few years ago by Merlin Wolf and I thought that I was going to be bored out of my mind, but I couldn’t have been more mistaken. It turned out to be very interesting and highly stimulating. I was learning about things at that meeting that I had no idea existed. Curt Kobylarz, the president of the Orange County dowser’s chapter, was one of the brightest guys I’ve ever met in my life. He seemed to know everything about everything. I also met Dr. Bob Beck there for the first time and he had a lot of fascinating things to say as well. All in all, I loved it! And I looked forward to the next meeting each month.

At Dowser meetings, we occasionally talk about dowsing, but more often the subject is Radionics, Bio-medicine, the Kaballah, Psychic Development, Color Therapy, or similar topics. But I digress…

Let’s talk Dowsing 101

Anyone who’s ever seen someone dowse for water, will typically see a dowser walking along the land with a “Y” shaped thin branch or flexible plastic rod firmly grasped in both hands. When the pointer of the “Y” rod suddenly points downs (or up), that is suppose to indicate where the water is.

Does it really work? You bet it does!

What you don’t see, or more accurately ‘hear’, is what’s going on inside the dowser’s mind. He’s repeatedly saying to himself as he walks along: “indicate if there is water here” or “”point down when I walk over a water vein” or “respond when I reach water”, or something close to that. Who’s he talking to? He’s communicating with a boundless information source known as the “super conscious” which is connected with all living things though the subconscious. Dowsing instruments, such as the pendulum , the aura meter, “L” rods, or the “Y” rod cited above provide a communication interface with our subconscious. Some prefer to think of it as a dialog with the Higher Self or Spirit Guides.

I’ve recently attended my sixth weekend-long workshop with Walter Woods, one of the most amazing men that I’ve ever had the good fortune to meet. Walt is an extraordinary dowser and  researcher. He’s also a highly gifted healer who has helped many people release themselves from physical and emotional suffering. Walt’s humble appearance and soft spoken demeanor completely  belie the range of knowledge, experiences, and powers that this advanced soul has acquired over the years.

Walt has experienced things that you and I only can read about in esoteric books and articles (and other things that we’ve never read about). He has clearly demonstrated that the power of using the mind alone to heal and fix ANYTHING is LIMITLESS. I have at least 8 notebooks crammed with Walt’s astounding lectures. When you read this stuff, it will knock you over (there are more things under the stars and sun than you can possibly imagine). Many more articles on the research efforts  of Walt Woods will appear at this web site in the very near future. Stay tuned!

If you contact the American Society of Dowsers (PO Box 24, Danville, VT 05828-0024) web site: http://www.dowsers.org/
Tel (802) 684-3417; E-Mail: ASD@dowsers.org), they will tell you the location of a Dowsers chapter that is nearest to you. I strongly urge you to go, look, and listen. If you decide to join and become a member, please mention my name (Ken Adachi) on the application form as the person who recommended you to the ASD (and let me know as well).

I mentioned above that I was practically dragged- kicking and screaming- to my first dowsers meeting many years ago by my good friend, Merlin Wolf. I was quite sure that I was going to be bored out of my mind. But surprise, surprise, I quickly realized that I was missing out on some of the best and most advanced “stuff” out there!

I have about 15 books on dowsing, but the best dowsing “course” that I’ve ever taken was contained within a 24 page booklet put together by Walt called Letter to Robin.  This incredible booklet can teach anyone to be an accomplished dowser. Highly recommended.

Dowsing Pendulums

I was contacted by a man named Chris Gozdzik who makes unique and attractive pendulums. He asked me if I would check his pendulum out, so I did and found it to respond very well. If you are interested in checking one out yourself, you can find them all described at the link below. I have no financial arrangement with Chris and told him that I don’t sell advertising space at my web site, but if I liked his pendulum, I would give him a plug on this page.

http://diviningmind.com (“Dowsing Tools with a Difference”) .

Articles

Geobiology/Geopathic Stress and its effect on Human Health Problems and Solutions (Apr. 2, 2004)
http://educate-yourself.org/cn/geobiology29mar04.shtml

Source

The greatest brainwashing organization to ever exist in the course of human history

Some information which no-one knows nothing. I just want to point out that everything is planned and organized:

The Tavistock Institute of Human Relations

 From Ken Adachi <Editor>
http://educate-yourself.org/cn/tavistockarticlesindex04jun04.shtml
June 4, 2004

The authoritative expose of the greatest brainwashing organization to ever exist in the course of human history is now revealed in Dr. John Coleman’s latest book, The Tavistock Institute of Human Relations: Shaping the Moral, Cultural, Political, and Economic Decline of the United States of America. The Tavistock Institute is located in the City of London and at Sussex University in England.

Dr. John Coleman, Dr. John Coleman, the author of 15 books, the best known of which is Conspirators Hierarchy, The Committee of 300, was one of the the first writers to bring the world’s attention to the existence of Tavistock, hitherto unknown to press and pundits alike, in a monograph published in 1969. Since his initial 1969 revelations concerning the pivotal role that Tavistock plays in shaping political, social, educational, and economic ‘opinions’, especially in the United States, more than a few writers of global conspiracy have attempted to place laurels upon their shoulders for revelations about Tavistock’s key influence as the Mother of all Propaganda Ministries, while ignoring the fact that this pioneering work was first published  by John Coleman. Dr. Coleman’s new book, however, leaves no doubt as to who is the master and who are the students when it comes to the subject of Tavistock.

The book is stunning in the new knowledge that it reveals about the hidden role of British oligarchs to shape and control public opinion in order to manipulate the British public (and later the American public) into accepting the notion that war with Germany was necessary in order “to secure a lasting peace.”

The plan to ‘create’ public opinion began in 1913 as a propaganda factory centered at Wellington House in London. Sir Edward Grey, the British Foreign Secretary at the time, installed Lord Northcliffe (Britain’s most influential newspaper magnate) as its director. Lord Northcliffe’s position was over sighted by Lord Rothmere on behalf of the British Crown. The operational staff of Wellington House consisted of Lord Northcliffe, Arnold Toynbee (future director of studies at the Royal Institute of International Affairs), and the Americans, Walter Lippmann and Edward Bernays (nephew to Signund Freud).

Funding was initially provided by the Royal family, but soon to include the Rothchilds (related to Lord Northcliffe by marriage) and the Rockefellers. Wellington House would grow into the Tavistock Institute in 1921 after the propaganda “victories” of the First World War and the Federal Reserve banking system (created in 1913) had been secured.

(The Forward to the book is re-peinted below from Dr. Coleman’s web site)

Ken Adachi

Tavistock cover300w


The Tavistock Institute of Human Relations Shaping the Moral, Spiritual, Cultural, Political and Economic Decline of The United States of America

FORWARD.

The Tavistock Institute of Human Relations was unknown to the people of the United States before Dr. Coleman exposed its existence in his monograph, The Tavistock Institute of Human Relations: Britain’s Control of the United States. Up to that time, Tavistock had successfully retained its secretive role in shaping the affairs of the United States, its government and its people since its early beginning in London, in 1913 at Wellington House.

Since Dr. Coleman’s original article exposing this ultra-secret organization, others have come forward with claims of authorship, which they were unable to substantiate.

Tavistock began as a propaganda creating and disseminating organization centered at Wellington House, which was where the original organization was put together with intent of shaping a propaganda outlet that would break down the stiff public resistance being encountered to the looming war between Britain and Germany.

The project was given to Lords Rothmere and Northcliffe and their mandate was to produce an organization capable of manipulating public opinion and directing that manufactured opinion down the desired pathway to support for a declaration of war by Great Britain against Germany.

Funding was provided by the British royal family, and later by the Rothschilds to whom Lord Northcliffe was related through marriage. Arnold Toynbee was selected as Director of Future Studies. Two Americans, Walter Lippmann and Edward Bernays were appointed to handle the manipulation of American public opinion in preparation for the entry of the United States into WWI, and to brief and direct President Woodrow Wilson.

From a somewhat crude beginning at Wellington House, grew an organization that was to shape the destiny of Germany, Britain and more especially the United States in manner that became a highly sophisticated organization to manipulate and create public opinion, what is commonly termed, “mass brainwashing.”

During the course of its evolvement, Tavistock expanded in size and ambition, when in 1937, a decision was made to use the German author Oswald Spengler’s monumental work, Untergange des Abenlandes (The Decline of Western Civilization ) as a model.

Previously, Wellington House board members Rothmere, Northcliffe, Lippmann, and Bernays had read and proposed as a guide the writings of Correa Moylan Walsh, in particular, the book The Climax of Civilization (1917) as corresponding closely to conditions that had to be created before a New World Order in a One World Government could be ushered in.

In this endeavor the members of the board consulted with the British royal family and obtained the approval of the “Olympians” (the inner core of the Committee of 300) to formulate a strategy. Funding was provided by the monarchy, the Rothschilds, the Milner Group and the Rockefeller family trusts.

In 1936, Spengler’s monumental work had come to the attention of what had become the Tavistock Institute. In preparation for changing and reshaping public opinion for the second time in less than twelve years, by unanimous consent of the board, Spengler’s massive book was adopted as the blueprint for a new working model to bring about the decline and fall of Western civilization necessary to create and establish a New World Order inside a One World Government.

Spengler held it bound to happen that alien elements would be introduced into Western civilization in increasing numbers, and that the West would fail at that time to expel the aliens, thereby sealing its fate, a society, whose inward beliefs and sound convictions would become at variance with its outward profession and thus Western civilization would fall by the wayside in the manner of the ancient civilizations of Greece and Rome.

Tavistock thinking was that Spengler had indoctrinated Western civilization to believe that it would err on the side of Roman civilization, and expel the aliens. The genetic loss that has fallen upon Europe-and especially on Scandinavia, England, Germany, France- (the Anglo-Saxon, Nordic Alpine Germanic races) that began just before the Second World War is already so great as to be beyond expectations, and continues at an alarming pace under the skilled guidance of the Tavistock managers.

What was a very rare instance became a common occurrence, a black man married to a white women or vice-versa.

The two World Wars cost the German nation almost one quarter of its population. Most of the intellectual energies of the German nation were diverted into war channels in defense of the Fatherland at the expense of science, arts, literature, music and the cultural, spiritual and moral advancement of the nation. The same could be said of the British nation. The blaze kindled by the British under the direction of Tavistock set all of Europe on fire, and did incalculable damage according to the Tavistock blueprint that matched Spengler’s predictions.

Classical and Western are the only two civilizations that could bring a modern renaissance to the world. They had flourished and progressed just as long as these civilizations remained under the control of the Anglo-Saxon Nordic Alpine, Germanic races. The unsurpassed beauty of their literature, art, their classics, spiritual and moral advancement of the female sex with a very large corresponding degree of protection, was what distinguished Western and Classic civilizations from others.

It was this bastion that Spengler saw coming under increasing attack and the thinking at Tavistock ran on parallel tracks, but with a totally different goal. Tavistock saw this civilizations a stumbling block to ushering a New World Order, as did the emphasis on protection and elevation of the female sex to a place of high respect and honor.

Thus the whole thrust of Tavistock was to “democratize” the West by an attack on womanhood, and the racial, moral, spiritual and religious foundation upon which Western civilization rested.

As Spengler suggested, the Greeks and Romans were devoted to the social, religious, moral and spiritual advancement and the preservation of womanhood and they were successful for just as long as they were in control and could arrange matters so that government was carried out by a limited number of responsible citizens supported by the general populace below them, all being of the same pure unadulterated race. The planners at Tavistock saw that the way to upset the balance of Western civilization was to force unwelcome changes in the race by removing control from the deserving to the undeserving in the manner of ancient Roman leaders who were supplanted by their former slaves and aliens, whom they had permitted to come and dwell among them.

Tavistock, by 1937, had come a long way from its Wellington House beginnings and the successful propaganda campaign that had turned the British public from being strongly anti-war in 1913 to willing participants through the arts of manipulation with the willing cooperation of news communications media.

The technique was carried across the Atlantic in 1916 to manipulate the American people to support of the war in Europe. In spite of the fact that the vast majority, including at least 50 U.S. Senators were adamantly opposed to the U.S. getting dragged into what they perceived was essentially a quarrel between Britain and France on the one hand, and Germany on the other, largely over trade and economics, the conspirators were undeterred. At that point Wellington House introduced the word, “Isolationists” as a derogatory description of those Americans who opposed U.S. participation in the war. The use of such words and phrases has proliferated under the expert brainwashing of the Social sciences scientists at Tavistock. Terms like “regime change,” “collateral damage” became almost new English language.

With the Tavistock plan modified to suit American conditions, Bernays and Lippmann led President Woodrow Wilson to set up the very first Tavistock methodology techniques for polling (manufacturing) so-called public opinion created by Tavistock propaganda. They also taught Wilson to set up a secret body of “managers” to run the war effort and a body of “advisors” to assist the President in his decision-making. The Creel Commission was the first such body of opinion-makers set up in the United States.

Woodrow Wilson was the first American president to publicly proclaim himself in favor of a Socialist New World Order inside a Socialist One World Government. His remarkable acceptance of the New World Order is found in his book The New Freedom.

We say “his” book, but actually, it was written by Socialist William B. Hayle. Wilson denounced capitalism. “It is contrary to the common man and it has brought stagnation to our economy,” Wilson wrote.

Yet, at the time, the United States economy was enjoying prosperity and industrial expansion as it had never experienced before in its history:

“We stand in the presence of a revolution—not a bloody revolution, America is not given to spilling blood—but a silent revolution, whereby America will insist upon recovering to practice those ideals which she has always professed, upon securing a government devoted to the general and not the special interests. We are upon the threshold of a time when the systematic life of the country will be sustained or at least supplemented at every point by government activity. And now we have to determine what kind of a government activity it shall be; whether, in the first place, it shall be directed from government itself, or whether it shall be indirect, through instrumentalities which have already constituted themselves and which stand ready to supersede government.”

The United States, harried, hounded, pushed and shoved is headed on a fast track to the New World Order, propelled along by the Radical Republicans of the War Party who have been taken over by the scientists at the Tavistock Institute for Human Relations.

Just recently I was asked by a subscriber “where do we find the Tavistock Institute?” My response was: “Look around the U.S. Senate, the House of Representatives, the White House, the State Department, the Defense Department, Wall Street, Fox T.V. (Faux T.V.) and you will see their change agents in every one of these places.”

President Wilson was the first U.S. president to “manage” the war through a civilian committee guided and directed by the Bernays and Lippmann from Wellington House, to which we have already made mention.

The resounding success of Wellington House and its enormous influence on the course of American history began before that in 1913. Wilson had spent almost a year tearing down the protective trade tariffs that had defended the American domestic markets from being overwhelmed by “Free Trade,” essentially the practice of allowing cheap British goods made with cheap labor in India to flood the American market. On October 12, 1913 Wilson signed the bill that was the beginning of the end of the unique American middle class, long the target of the Fabian Socialists. The bill was described as a measure to “adjust tariffs,” but it would have been accurate to describe it as a bill to “destroy tariffs.”

Such was the hidden power of Wellington House that the vast majority of the American people accepted this lie, not knowing or realizing that it was a death knell for American commerce that would lead to NAFTA, GATT and the World Trade Organization (WTO). Even more astonishing was the acceptance of the Federal Income Tax Act that was passed on September 5, 1913, to replace trade tariffs as the source of revenue for the Federal Government. Income Tax is a Marxist doctrine not found in the U.S. Constitution anymore than the Federal Reserve Bank is found in the Constitution. Wilson called his twin blows against the Constitution, “a fight for the people, and for free business,” and said he was proud to have taken “part in the completion of a great piece of business…” The Federal Reserve Act, explained by Wilson as “reconstructing the Nation’s banking and currency system” was rushed through on a flood-tide of propaganda emanating from Wellington House, just in time for the hostilities that began the horror of WWI.

Most historians are agreed that without passage of the Federal Reserve Bank Act, Lord Grey would not have been able to start that terrible conflagration.

The deceptive language of the Federal Reserve Act was under the guidance of Bernays and Lippman who set up a “National Citizen’s League” with the notorious Samuel Untermeyer as its chairman, to promote the Federal Reserve Bank, that secured control of the people’s money and currency and transferred it to a private monopoly without the victim’s consent.

One of the most interesting pieces of history surrounding the imposition of the foreign financial slavery measure was that before it was sent to Wilson for his signature, a copy was given to the sinister Colonel Edward Mandel House as the representative of Wellington House and the British oligarchy represented by the banker, J.P. Morgan.

As to the American people, in whose name the disastrous measure was instituted, they had not the faintest idea how they had been connived, cheated, lied to and utterly deceived. An instrument of slavery was fastened around their necks without the victims ever becoming aware of it.

Wellington House methodology was at its height when Wilson was coached in how to persuade Congress to declare war on Germany, although he had won election on the solemn promise to keep America out of the war then raging in Europe, a great triumph for the new art of public opinion making. It was just that – the poll questions were shaded in such away that the answers reflected the opinions of the public; not their understanding of the questions, nor their understanding of the processes of political science.

Source

Mind Control The Ultimate Terror

Always fascinating topic MIND CONTROL:

The topic of mind control is elaborate, multifaceted, and multi layered. For the casual reader, it can quickly become numbing, overwhelming the senses and creating a desire to exit the topic, but avoiding this subject is the most foolish thing you could possibly do since your only chance of surviving this hideous and insidious enslavement agenda, which today threatens virtually all of humanity, isto understand how it functions and take steps to reduce your vulnerability.

The plans to create a mind controlled workers society have been in place for a long time. The current technology grew out of experiments that the Nazis started before World War II and intensified during the time of the Nazi concentration camps when an unlimited supply of children and adults were available for experimentation. We’ve heard about the inhumane medical experiments performed on concentration camp prisoners, but no word was ever mentioned by the media and the TV documentaries of the mind control experiments. That was not to be divulged to the American public. Mind control technologies can be broadly divided into two subsets: trauma-based or electronic-based.

The first phase of government mind control development grew out of the old occult techniques which required the victim to be exposed to massive psychological and physical trauma, usually beginning in infancy, in order to cause the psyche to shatter into a thousand alter personalities which can then be separately programmed to perform any function (or job) that the programmer wishes to”install”. Each alter personality created is separate and distinct from the front personality. The ‘front personality’ is unaware of the existence or activities of the alter personalities. Alter personalities can be brought to the surface by programmers or handlers using special codes, usually stored in a laptop computer. The victim of mind control can also be affected by specific sounds, words, or actions known as triggers.

The second phase of mind control development was refined at an underground base below Fort Hero on Montauk , Long Island (New York) and is referred to as the Montauk Project. The earliest adolescent victims of Montauk style programming, so called Montauk Boys, were programmed using trauma-based techniques, but that method was eventually abandoned in favor of an all-electronic induction process which could be “installed” in a matter of days (or even hours) instead of the many years that it took to complete trauma-based methods.

Dr. Joseph Mengele of Auschwitz notoriety was the principle developer of the trauma-basedMonarch Project and the CIA’sMK Ultra mind control programs. Mengele and approximately 5, 000 other high ranking Nazis were secretly moved into the United States and South America in the aftermath of World War II in an Operation designated Paperclip. The Nazis continued their work in developing mind control and rocketry technologies in secret underground military bases. The only thing we were told about was the rocketry work with former Nazi star celebrities like Warner Von Braun. The killers, torturers, and mutilators of innocent human beings were kept discretely out of sight, but busy in U.S. underground military facilities which gradually became home to thousands upon thousands of  kidnapped American children snatched off the streets (about one million per year) and placed into iron bar cages stacked from floor to ceiling as part of the ‘training’. These children would be used to further refine and perfect Mengele’s mind control technologies. Certain selected children (at least the ones who survived the ‘training’) would become future mind controlled slaves who could be used for thousands of different jobs ranging anywhere from sexual slavery to assassinations. A substantial portion of these children, who were considered expendable, were intentionally slaughtered in front of (and by) the other children in order to traumatize the selected trainee into total compliance and submission.

Mind Control ‘Programmed’ Individuals
The lone gunman that we hear about in assassinations, assassination attempts, school shootings,  etc. are mind controlled individuals who had been ‘programmed’ to carry out those missions. Ted Bundy, the ‘Son of Sam’ serial killer David Berkowitz, Oswald, Timothy McVeigh, the Columbine shooters, Chapman, Sirhan Sirhan, etc. were mind controlled individuals who were programmed to perform these killings. Tens of thousands of young teenage boys were kidnapped and forced into the mind control training program called The Montauk Project starting around 1976. Al Bielek, under mind control, was involved in many areas of the secret Montauk Project. After slowly recovering his memories beginning in the late 1980’s, he came to realize that there were at least 250,000 mind controlled “Montauk Boys’ produced at 25 different facilities similar to the underground base at Montauk, Long Island. Many of these boys were to become ‘sleepers’ who are individuals who were programmed to go into action at a later date when properly “triggered” to engage in some sort of destructive or disruptive conduct. Other Montauk Boys were woven into the fabric of mainstream American life as journalists, radio & TV personalities, businessmen, lawyers, medical professionals, judges, prosecutors, law enforcement, military men, etc.

Worldwide Electronic Mind Control via ‘Cell Phone’ Towers
OCC elf tower The day is now approaching in which government mind control technologies will be directed at you, your neighbors, and your loved ones. Every single day, equipment is being erected and installed in this country with the hidden purpose of exerting mind control over the entire population.  Everywhere in this country (and overseas), ELF/microwave transmission towers are being erected. The antennae usually look like four slightly curved vertical plates about 2 feet in length and located in either 3 or 4 quadrants around the tower,  two thirds up from the ground. Just look around, you’ll see them. And you’ll also notice more of them going up once you begin to pay attention. No one is saying anything, but you’re expected to presume that they’re for cell phones. (Do you really think that we need that much ‘cell phone’ transmission capability, every few blocks? Do you realize how very little energy is used by genuine cell phone usage? Yet these towers are capable of putting out levels of power that exceed cell phone requirements by a wide margin) These mind control technologies have been in place for a long time. It’s not an accident that the frequency band chosen for cell phone use just happens to match the second order waves that Wilhelm Reich discovered in the late1940’s to effect thought transmission and allow the mind to be manipulated without the victim realizing it. Reich worked on this project secretly for the CIA for over 5 years, from 1947-1952,  until he realized who the CIA was planning to use the mind control on -the American people. He was outraged that he was deceived and used for such a treasonous motive and swore never to cooperate with the CIA, FDA, etc. again. Reich was covertly murdered in Federal prison in 1957, just a few weeks before he was due to be released, having been in prison for 2 years on a trumped up charge leading to a contempt of court citation. He was reported to have had a ‘heart attack’. He was strong as an ox. He was murdered two weeks before his parole board hearing. His last book, written in prison, was found to be ‘missing’ after his death and never returned to his family.

A method was discovered to disable these ELF towers from exerting their mind control functions by placing a simple device known as an orgone generator within a radius of 1,300 feet of these towers. These microwave towers are used in conjunction with HAARP based technology to not only affect subliminal mind control influences, but also to control the weather (currently {2007}, the creation of artificially induced drought conditions are also greatly influenced by the population-reduction chemtrail spraying operations which take place daily over the skies in America and in many other countries) .

Patrick Flannagan also recorded an interview with talk show host Jeff Rense on June 30, 2003 and offered important insights on how to counter electronic mind control being beamed to us from the electric wiring within our homes and from microwave towers (promising information that should be studied).

Brice Taylor

Brice Taylor is the pseudonym for Susan Ford, one of the highest level MK Ultra mind controlled victims to ever come forward and reveal her story. It took her nearly 13 years to recover the memories of the events that she reveals in her book, Thanks for The Memories (published in May 1999). Her memories began to return in sporadic fragments in1985, following a car accident that threw her through the windshield of her car after hitting a tree. It wasn’t really an accident as much as a result of mind control programming which compelled her to commit suicide if she began to recover critical memories about her role as a top level NASA/CIA mind controlled ‘asset’ who was used as a sex slave and message (or drug) courier for every president from Kennedy to Clinton and was Henry Kissinger‘s personal secretary/human computer (file storage and retrieval) for over 19 years. Her ‘owner/handler’ was comedian Bob Hope and she was ‘loaned out’ to many famous and well known entertainment personalities in order to oblige them to be beholding to and manipulated by Hope and his Illuminati pals so they could be used as “worker bees’ to help usher in the Luciferian, New World Order. Her book is probably the most revealing account to date of well known, national personalities in both politics and the entertainment industry who are involved in the handling, programming, control, manipulation, and abuse of Illuminati/government created human robots like Brice or other, well known celebrity/mind control victims such as Barbara Striesand and Barbara Mandrel. The book’s Table of Contents alone will give you an idea of the incredible number of nationally known names that Brice had been involved with from childhood into adulthood as a mind controlled slave. In my opinion, Thanks for The Memories and the two co-authored Illuminati Formula books of Cisco Wheeler and Fritz Springmeir (see below) are the three most important and revealing books in print on the subject of Illuminati mind control and should be read by every concerned and thinking human being on this planet, for they reveal how the Illuminati mind control programs are accomplished and how they can be broken, allowing the victim to escape from its control.

I encourage you to examine the remarkable book review of Thanks for The Memories written by Uri Dowbenko at this link: http://educate-yourself.org/mc/nwomcbturireview.shtml ). It’s truly ironic and a perfect example of karmic justice when the total recall of a mind control victim whose brain stem was scarred in order to produce a photographic memory, is now turned back on her abusers to reveal in the most exquisite and precise detail their despicable and monstrous conduct. Thanks for The Memories is a well written book that gives you a front row seat into the real world activities of the Secret Government- the ‘government’ that’s really in charge behind the scenes (those scenes being created by the mainstream Media Propaganda Ministry whose job is to deceive you into thinking that the headline news, ‘cover story’ government is the real deal; believe me, it isn’t. It’s an illusion from top to bottom.

It’s a dog and pony show. All show, and no substance. The presidential election snafu, the interminable talk show debates, propaganda hacks like Rush Limbaugh, Sean Hannity, etc., etc., all designed to keep you preoccupied and bewildered from the steady enslavement and erosion of constitutionally guaranteed liberties that is taking place daily. The Sept. 11 “attack” was planned and launched to provide an excuse for passing  fascist, totalitarian ‘laws’ designed to enslave us and strip the populace of the few remaining freedoms that we still enjoy. National ID ‘smart’ cards that will contain your entire medical, financial history, DNA information, etc. will be required to engage in any sort of normal consumer activity like getting on a plane or even going from state to state after military border guards become a common scene in this once freedom loving land. Spend your cash now while you still have cash, because soon all financial transactions will be conducted using plastic cards. And just like Nazi Germany, our people will be encouraged to report any ‘suspicious’ activity of their neighbors. In fact, life in the United States will soon become a carbon copy of Nazi Germany of the late 1930’s, just a lot more high tech and much more lethal.

We will post articles below that will give you greater insight into the methodology of mind control and its strong connections to Satanism and satanic rituals. Al Bielek has revealed a great deal of prime information on the government’s secret mind control capabilities and plans in a 1992 underground video made with Vladimir Terziski.

Are you ready to live in Orwell’s nightmare world of Big Brother and mind control slavery? The New Fourth Reich of Hitler’s demonic dream where perverted and promiscuous sexuality is promoted as ‘normal’ and ‘healthy’ while satanism with its rituals of human sacrifice is the only ‘religion’ to be allowed? Well, it’s just around the corner if we remain passive and unwilling to engage these demonic manipulators.

Source

MIND CRIMES: DEADLY MISTAKES EP RELEASED!!!

Finally long waited MIND CRIMES: DEADLY MISTAKES EP IS OUT!!!

mind_crimes_deadly_mistakes_etuvihko_300x300

>> Front Covers (300dpi)

1. Deadly Mistakes (Rautio, M. Welsh) 4:23

2. Trapped (Sealed With The Fist) (Rautio) 3:34*

3. World Is A Rigged Game (Rautio, Mikkola) 5:37*

4. Alone (Rautio, M. Welsh) 4:05

Total Running time 17:40

* Lead Guitars played By Ville Mikkola


 

Mind Crimes are:

Mari Welsh, vocals

Ari Rautio, guitars

Ville Mikkola, bass & Keys

Ryan Welsh, drums

 


 

Ville Mikkola, recording

Ville Mikkola & Ari Rautio, mixing

All songs composed, written and arranged by Mind Crimes

Cover concept, logo, art & design by Ari Rautio

Recorded at Hellhound Studios during Winter 2014

© Mind Crimes Holdings 2014

Homepit Releases

 

Here is the Soundcloud link to Trapped single from this EP:

If you want your copy. Contact band here (5€ pcs+shipping 2€, Finland only).

order_now

Transfer of Energy Through Time and Coupling of Parallel Universes

Some interesting infromation:

Transfer of Energy Through Time and Coupling of Parallel Universes

(Date: unknown; Source: Matrix III)

Leading Edge Research, P.O. Box 481-MU58, Washington State, C.F. 98597 C.F

V: Would you explain your theories about time and energy?

H: When I was in France, I was part of a group looking into theories of entropy states and the general thermodynamics of plasmas. The natural rate of entropy increase in a closed system defines the flow of what is perceived as time. We were trying to develop a better insight into the process of synchronization between apparently uncoupled systems, in other words to explain how time manages to flow at the same rate in different parts of the universe. We ended up deriving a set of mathematical expressions that interrelated entropy functions, quantum energy states, and spacetime coordinates of quantum events. In particular, certain variables that could be interpreted as time and energy turned out to be covariant.

V: Do you mean there was some kind of equivalence relationship?

H: Not quite. But you could almost think of it in that way. It meant that the universe could be represented by an ensemble of “events’, each characterized by a set of energy states and spacetime numbers; nothing more. In such a representation of the universe, the idea of conservation of mass-energy did not hold; it was replaced by a conservation of the product of that quantity with spacetime. By means of math transforms, it was possible to transform one universe into another in which the quantity varied inversely with the other. If you made all the spatial variables constant, the spacetime functions reduced to pure time; you could transform energy to time and vice versa. We had no idea at that time what that meant.

V: What did it eventually mean?

H: What it seemed to say was that energy could be extracted from the universe, which is where ordinary conservation breaks down, and injected into another version of that universe in which the time coordinates of all the ‘events” were shifted by some amount. The more energy you transformed, the greater the time shift would be. If that was interpreted as taking place within the same universe, it seemed to suggest that-energy could be transferred through time. We must conclude that all versions of the universe in which we exist, interpreted linearly as “Past”, “future” etc. are equally real. Thus we have a continuum. The only model I can think of is a complex serial one in which altering the events in a past universe affects not only the future of that particular universe as it evolves in time, but also the “presents” of all the other universes that lie ahead of it. In other words, there is a mechanism of casual connection through the continuum that the simple serial model does not address.

V: Could you expand on that concept?

H: Everything we have discovered so far seems to add up to two things. First, the universe that we see around us and which forms part of us is simply one of many, equally real universes that appear to be strung sequentially along a single timeline. Second, events that happen in this universe affect not only its “future”, but the situations in all the other universes that lie ahead of it. That,-of course, suggests a continuity throughout the system; the “future” universes ahead of us form a progression of states that are evolving from the present state. We need to ask ourselves what the mechanism is that provides that continuity. That same mechanism will enable an event in one universe to alter events in another universe. The continuity follows from the fact that objects, being mass, don’t vanish; they endure in time.

V: Unless, of course, they are deliberately withdrawn from the coordinates they occupy.

H: Yes. Mass arranges itself into different patterns to produce the changes we associate with the passage of time, but in doing so it provides the connection and continuity that enables one universe to evolve from another. For example, if a candle has burned down, in the universe “behind” us it is still intact; in the universe ahead it probably does not exist at all in that form. The whole candle is the sum of all of them. I have a drawing here that will assist in an explanation. Try thinking of a two-dimensional analogy. Imagine that the universe is flat and everything it contains is flat. Now form a solid continuum by stacking an infinite number of zerothickness planes like that together, like the pages of an infinitely thick book. Every page is one universe. Mass continues through these pages in a thread-like manner. Anybody inside one of those universes will see mass patterns change sequentially.

Look at the diagram I drew. Each universe consists of a space containing objects and inhabitants that are all made up of particles, or at least that is what it looks like if you happen to live inside one of them.

We, in our privelaged position as superobservers looking in from the outside, can see that every particle of mass is really an infinitesimally thin slice of a thread that passes through all the universes. As the universe moves along the threads in some kind of supertime, the particles or slices appear to move through space. That gives a visible rate of change that is observed as .. normal time” within the universe. From our position we can see that all the universes are equally real, only the one that you happen to be part of and moving with gives the illusion of appearing more real to you then the rest of them.

V: So you would be able to send signals or transport mass from one universe to the other.

H: Exactly.

V: If you send a signal from one universe to another which changes an event pattern, I assume that the memory of having a reason to change that event is erased as soon as the event is changed?

H: Yes, because our memories consist of electrochemical and DNA pattern changes. Everything that formed any record of the original pattern was reset. Hence, our memories are consistent with the new pattern that now exists. In actuality, causes and effects exist not on a series on a unidirectional time line, but the system is dynamic in that time loops exist, and these loops make it possible, in effect, for effects to be detected before the cause of the effect exists.

V: I think the holographic model of the universe would explain it, because of the interconnectedness of everything through hyperspacial formats. The superobserver that you are talking about is in fact consciousness itself – all wave and particle interchanges are, in actuality, consciousness as viewed from different perspectives. Access to what are perceived as different “spacetime” coordinates can ultimately be accomplished through the manipulations of consciousness, so any devices that are devised to accomplish this purpose simply mimic the mental operations in consciousness of more evolved beings. There are many transitionary instances where alien equipment is tuned to the specific patterns of a particular being, and the equipment functions as a modulator or transductor of consciousness. Time flow, as you mention it, applies within certain boundaries, and everything hyperspacial to those boundaries functions in terms of that which makes up the conceptual loops that you speak of. All in all, it makes for an interesting discussion.

Source

Check also:

>> http://www.auricmedia.net/orion-technology-and-other-secret-projects/

Interview with Duncan Cameron and Preston Nichols

If you are familiar with Montauk project this interview may intrest you. But here is my post about Montauk Project if you want to check it out first:

>> http://www.auricmedia.net/the-montauk-project-experiments-in-time/

Preston_Nichols1.jpg
Preston B. Nichols

Duncan_Cameron.jpg

Duncan Cameron

And here is the interview:

Interview with Duncan Cameron and Preston Nichols

DC = Duncan Cameron
PN = Preston Nichols
SS = Sovereign Scribe

SS: Regarding the Montauk experiments, you said the tunnel was large enough to drive a truck through; where did they drive the truck?

DC: Where did they drive the truck? Well it’s a figure of speech that you can drive a truck through. There are all sorts of associated phenomena that pass through whether it be information or people or such.

PN: But first of all, get the truck underground.

DC: … Something that wasn’t ground level. It was underground. it was underground. All the time-space stuff was underground.

PN: It was at the summit with the Delta T structure.

SS: How far down was it?

PN: 1/4 of a mile, maybe somewhere between a thousand feet and 1/4 of a mile. It was way underground. This is according to our recollection. We have no proof of it of course.

SS: Could there be a reason for it being underground?

PN: The reason was essentially they built, see the Montauk time and space portal was essentially an artifact that came out of what we call a Delta T antenna. You have a picture of a big thing made out of wood with wires shaped like this. That’s what we call the Delta-T antenna. The portal actually appears in the center of that. If you pump this thing right. They had trouble building this above ground because when they started to test above ground the fields from the transmitting equipment were so strong that they had to locate it low enough below ground that there would be a neutral point between the fields of the equipment and the building above ground and the fields from the antenna way below ground because at that neutral point sat the chair that he [Duncan] sat in.

So I have to point out also that they did not want any of the raw pulse. See this antenna took the raw pulse from the pulse modulators of the radar transmitter and essentially put it into Del Cross F Cross E Cross B Cross G function. Which means they were essentially generating gravitational waves that would enfold into space-time waves in itself. And you could make a time-space portal; only one end of it was controllable, such, in ’83 you could make an extension of it anywhere in the past, present or future you wished. If I took this antenna here and added in pulses from a pulse modulator in a radar transmitter it would probably wipe out every TV set within about 50 miles of it. But they had to keep this thing far enough under ground so that the EMR electromagnetic interference would not be radiated. Also they wanted to make it big enough, I think it was 250 feet, this one was 10 foot. I think the one we had at Montauk was 250 feet to 300 feet – something like that. This one, the actual portal might be that big (a few inches) but if you’ve got one that’s 10 times the size and is like that you could literally have a portal… I believe the portal size was 10 to 20 feet that they were actually able to create. I could make a portal maybe 2 inches here cause the antenna’s small.

Of course above ground there would have been certain construction problems. With making the thing below ground where they have the undergrounders making holes in the floor and pass the pipe and the wires through the floor and the thing up and you don’t have to worry the wind’s going to blow it down and this sort of thing. There’s a number of reasons that it was underground.

SS: And also you said it would be harder to detect?

PN: Yeah, who’s going to see it from the air?

SS: Wouldn’t they’d pick it up?

PN: Also the Hertizan leakage would be way down if it’s underground. It wouldn’t wipe out TV in Montauk. Montauk is so far out they have huge power and rotary beams that they can look at Boston or they can look at Rhode Island or Connecticut or New York with. And the signal strength at Montauk is very weak so it lakes nothing to interfere with the TV in Montauk. They don’t want to get the Town up in arms.

SS: Did they use that to build the legendary city on Mars?

PN: This is the information we have. We have not been able to back it up. It is only memories of Mr. Cameron and Mr. Bielek. I was not involved with that part of it myself. It wasn’t that they built the big city. They found an ancient earlier civilization that was abandoned. They first got to Mars and realized that yes, there had been a civilization there at one time and the above ground of it was crumbled back into dust. But they did detect huge underground installations which were still making magnetic fields and this sort of thing that they could detect and they realized that there was still machinery running underground and of course they first went all around Mars and they couldn’t figure out how to get down underground without bringing boring equipment and cutting a tunnel right down in. When Montauk had the working capability it would be nothing to target the other end of the vortex from ’83 through to whatever time they wanted to inside Mars itself and this is what they did. And Duncan himself can talk of stuff he saw on Mars.

SS: What did you we?

DC: Something that has recently come up — both Preston and myself were in a private meeting in Long Island with a man who was known in the UFO field. He spoke; he was giving some pictures regarding UFO’s. He came up with some photographs having to do with the moon Phobos. I reacted to that strongly. When I recall physically, there is a physical reaction and I’m startled. After spending a little bit of time with that — investigating it, it now seems from my own investigating and outside reading per se. When I say I am reading, I am basically sensitive to electro-magnetics and can access information zones whether they be on a local scale, the Akashic which is in domain systems or out of domain, higher evolved and such.

Information that I got from the outside information zone is that there is a system which still is on Mars. It originally was an electronic crystal type system which was part of the defense structure for the solar system that has been turned off. Defense meaning to keep for ones self. In that sense we all have energy fields about us and there is a defense posture to keep outside influences away. If you think on a planetary scale in a solar system, if such defenses were set down, if that were one of the stations per se, to keep out nasties or to keep the intelligence within the solarsystem alive and dynamically moving, if that were to be shut off there would be all sorts of obtrusions that would not ordinarily come through.

Whether that was one of the directives involved in the Mars project or if that was one of their aims as such or by products, the defense system on Mars is down and there are all sorts of associated troubles and disturbances because of that. It’s a linked system that we haven’t quite figured out the other aspects of. I could go on, it’s just a quick brief thing. Both myself and Al, according to recall, have been there mostly on a directed mission, per se. Sort of like a ‘seeing eye’. Part of my duties at Montauk were to basically to be in sort of a trance-type system and have something pass through me which would be — how do I say — for information’s sake going places or something. It was one directive system so I can only tell you on very linear function what happened. Basically I was there just to see about. Basically it would be 300 or 400 feet underground plus the cavern type systems. There are all sorts of symbolical references there. Tonal frequencies. It wasn’t necessarily a generator per se, but all sorts of frequencies that were very much alive -almost as though some kind of intelligence, per se. It was part of my duty to go and investigate and see what occurred. So that was more or less the two things that I saw.

SS: Did you see traveling back in time, did you see a civilization on Mars?

DC: No, not I. Not myself. Possibly with Al. I only had 5 or 6 specific missions that I was involved in, as part of my recall. Having to do with Al I don’t know. Until recently I have been denying any associations having to do with the Philadelphia Experiment or Montauk or associated problems because of a denial system within myself so now I am moving ahead and trying to learn and reeducate myself so I am looking out for more information even as we speak.

SS: Did the face on Mars have a function beyond decoration?

DC: That’s a good question. I’ve never looked at that. In that sense I could only be speculating.

Montauk was responsible for conditioning and influencing the consciousness of the earth. That was one of the priorities, possibly, tools to work with to condition and control people.

PN: The information source from what I remember your reading said that it was essentially a defense for our whole solar system. The Mars system would be protecting us well. That’s the first thing they would do was to shut that off so they could get in.

DC: That would make sense.

SS: So if they had it on before Montauk then Montauk went up and shut it off…

PN: Somebody went from Montauk through the portal that was from space point A to space point B probably in real time. The first thing they would do was shut that switch off. They had to somehow sneak into the defenses and turn the switch off. Maybe they had the key to shut it off. I don’t know. I wasn’t part of that project. I was the guy that did the electronics on the project. I was not involved with who went where. I don’t believe I went anywhere particular place in time.

SS: Do you know who is using that kind of equipment now?

PN: Undoubtedly the secret government still has some more equipment. I can’t believe that they’re leaving it alone. I don’t think the monster in ’83 scared them off completely. They slowed it down some but I’m sure it’s back on line running full force right now somewhere.

SS: Is there any way to detect that?

PN: I pick up signals from similar projects all the time. But signals that Montauk sent out sounded very much like the Buzzsaw that was sawing the microphone in half that you talk about in your magazine in your first article (Vol. 1 #131). The Montauk function sounds very similar, in fact it’s been speculated that they’re playing Montauk tapes in these other transmitters and that’s what we hear as the Buzzsaw. Because the function is the same. It’s the same kind of function. It’s just a different emulation of the system. Montauk ran at 450 to 470 megahertz. What we’re talking of today is 3 to 30 megahertz. But the modulations are the same as far as I can see.

SS: And that includes the tunneling effect?

PN; No, I’m talking about the mind control aspect of Montauk.

SS: How about the tunneling?

PN: Tunneling — that would work the same because it is all thought forms. But you would have to go in to an actual time warping function such as the Delta T antenna.

DC: We somehow by chance or design ran into some girl in Long Island who I had some association with. She was troubled for a number of reasons and I followed her information basis back on a psychic read type system. and it seems like she was hooked up to something called ‘Freedom Riders’. She had some degree of clairvoyance.

How the thing works: when the DOR sensor is connected it sends out a reverse of the DOR patternings and since you have an exact reverse oscillation being built by the transmitter, it cancels the real DOR oscillation. It cancels it right out. Then they transmit the orgone function in phase so it replaces the DOR function with the orgone function that’s picked up by the orgone sensor. That is simply in a nutshell how this thing works.

In the ’40’s, ’50’s, and ’60’s, they sent up thousands of these things. There were 200 to 300 of these in the air each day. Now the interesting point to notice here is, if we look at all these different devices, they all have a bottle shape on the bottom– that’s the transmitter. And you notice they have roughly the same shape up at the top. This says that there is something estoteric here in the upper part of the unit, which we don’t understand to this day.

Now if you look here, you’ll see this is the modulator coil as outlayed in the diagram. It’s got the same modulator coil inside this housing her.

SS: What’s the power source?

PN: In this case, it’s batteries. In the Biosonde it’s AC.

SS: How long could they stay up there?

PN: A couple of days maybe. They’ll float around until the balloon bursts and they had a parachute that slowly carried them back to earth. They can only transmit for about 3 to 4 hours. You could pressurize the balloon so that it rises to a point and breaks and comes down. Or you could pressurize it where it would float for days.

SS: Is that an actual orgone detector instrument?

PN: Well the thing is, the orgone and DOR output of these things is in the subtle energy realm. I don’t know of any receiver that can detect the actual energetic function that is coming out of here, the actual modulation. You listen to this, you only hear a group of impulses. The DOR and orgone is inside those impulses and how to detect what’s inside the impulses. I admit I don’t know how to do it. I haven’t had a chance to analyze it but I got a Radiosonde Receptor which is a receiver built to receive these things. It’s a very strange circuit. The answer may be there, how to detect what this is sending, but I don’t understand it at this point.

SS: But it’s detecting what’s there.

PN: You’re talking about the actual detector itself.

SS: Yes. It [orgone] exists. The government hasn’t said that it exists.

PN: No, they haven’t. In Radiosonde circles this flat plate with the black stuff on it, they call a humidity detector. This is what detects the orgone. This little white rod here, this is a temperature sensing resistor, it detects the DOR. But also, this will detect humidity changes. The problem with this is as you dampen the thing, dry it, dampen ii, it goes out of calibration. After about 10 minutes of flight these things are useless. These things will hold their calibration for maybe weeks at a time.

But still it was lucky that they sent this up so someone picked up one of these things came down on the ground. They would see the white thermistor between these two thing-a-ma-bobs here and this plate down here. Now the plates sits between these two clips and these aluminum covers go over it. If you follow Reichian technology, aluminum lends to have a focuser for orgone. So they have the orgone sensor here with the aluminum plate over it, the aluminum plate will help pull the orgone to the orgone sensor. Copper focuses DOR. This is why Reich made the original orgone boxes out of steel or aluminum foil, but not copper.

Now this device here is a transmitter. After Duncan did his readings on these things, I realized what I had was a radionics transmitter. Whatever I put in would be sent out. Any of you people sensitive? All you do is take this and hold it. You’ll feel your energies build up in it. It might get warm or it might get cool to you. That’s essentially a resonator of hyperspacial energies, the psychic energy. And that design can be traced right to Wilhelm Reich through Brookhaven National Laboratories.

See, after Reich developed this package, he called up the government and told them that he had a device that could knock the violence out of thunderstorms and asked if they were interested. The government said, “Yes. We’re interested!” They requested Mr. Reich to mail a prototype to Brookhaven on Long Island.

So they waited for a thunderstorm to approach and they sent it up into the clouds. As it approached, the thunderhead broke up and went around Brookhaven. Al Brookhaven there was a nice gentle sunlit shower while the area around was having a thunderstorm. So of course they were very interested. They worked with Mr. Reich to replicate the thing.

Now this transmitter, the silver box here, is a nice packaged AC device. We had to have a device that would sense; that’s the input well. The first mode we played with was we took the orgone sensor from the Radiosonde and just plugged it directly into the transmitter. And now you can transduce your orgone. You hold this [sensor], you plug it in and turn it on. It’s like sitting in an orgone box. This is picking up your orgone and building it up. We wanted to have a fancy witness coil so Mr. Cameron turned on his psychic sense, talked to someone in one of the higher domains, and he said we wanted to build a witness well. [A “witness” is anything that would carry the vibrations of the thing or place you want to sense or contact, such as, clothing or a possession would be witness to a person.] How do we go about doing it? And he channeled the whole design of this device including the well receiver, the circuit board and we made this input well. This input well turns out to be vastly superior to the input well of the Kelly box or an Heironymous box or any of those devices.

Now what this will do for you simply: you plug the wire into the transmitter. Whatever you dump in here [input well] this array of coils and receiver will pick up the electromagnetic component just as the chair picks up Duncan’s electromagnetic component, and will transduce it to be broadcasted by the transmitter. This is essentially a miniature Montauk. Not of the power that they had. And if you put your hand in the well, turn the device on, it would start building up your energies.

How you use Radionics equipment, them am three ways. You can do a diagnosis with a radionics tuner where you get the rates, that where you put the witness in the witness well, you rub the rub plate and you tune the tuner until you get a maximum stick. (As you turn a tuner knob with one hand, you are rubbing a small ‘plate’ with the other hand; when you get a feeling of stickiness on the plate the tuner is at the right setting.) All that’s telling you is whatever you’re conceptualizing in your mind scans from low to high on the dial is in resonance when you get the “stick”. You get several rate number systems you’re using, you get the rates [from the position of the tuner knob], you go to the phone book of rates, took it up and see [what the diagnosis is.]

Now over on another column they’ll be reversing rates the antirates. So you set the device to those rates, you throw the switch that says ‘broadcast’, and what it does it feeds the thing back so it oscillates and transmits to the person the reverse rates.

Now what is actually happening here? All the device is doing, it’ a concentration point that’s connecting you the operator to the mind of the subject. As you’re scanning through, you’re interrogating the subject’s mind as to what’s wrong with the body. Then when you do the treatment, you’re actually instructing the person’s subconscious mind what to do. As we all know, the subconscious mind is what directly controls the physical body, and if our conscious mind and subconscious mind stays in touch with each other, our subconscious mind has a foothold in the reality that can regulate the body correctly. As we get more paranoic and more upset and more bent out of shape and more crazy, the subconscious mind looses touch with the conscious mind. It means now the subconscious mind loose its foothold into reality. It doesn’t know how to direct the body anymore. That’s when we get sick. This is one of the major theories.

Now, if someone comes over and hits your leg with a sledge hammer it’s going to break your leg. That’s not caused by the subconscious mind loosing touch with reality. But disease that develop from outside influences such as germs and such, can be traced, it’s believed by this group of people, to the subconscious mind not running the immune system properly to eliminate that irritant, and you get sick.

So what they try to do is find out, be interrogating the subconscious mind, what is wrong and telling the subconscious mind how to heal the body. The device itself doesn’t heal. This is not a healing machine, this is just a broadcaster, what ever you put in the well for the primary witness, you can put any agent, thought form or whatever in the well just as you would with the radionics device. The energetic component of that stuff that you put in will tag along with the witness to the person and you can actually talk to the person’s subconscious mind through this.

How you treat people — there are three means essentially. The most common means is the reversing rate, which works psychically, by the people who designed the equipment. That’s why you get the large book with all the rates and reverse rates in it.

Another way is through reagents such as homeopathic remedies, herbs, etc. which work on the subconscious mind and the subtle body. If the herb or reagent is purely an energetic effect, this will transmit the energetic effect to the person without using up the reagent.

Another mode they use was designed by Malcolm Ray in Britain. He made a box with two wells — the reagent goes in one and distilled water in the other. He had cards that had geometric patterns or messages on them. The cards would contain thought forms. And as energy flowed from one well to the other well, it would impress the thought forms on the target well. The well does nothing with the writing or the ink on the paper, but it picks up and senses the thought that you put on the paper and transmits the thought to the subconscious mind.

……..

SS: You mentioned in your talk about Montauk and the old universe

DC: There were a number of survivors, if my information is correct, of the old universe. If Montauk was as good and as manipulating as we believe, the concept was, those people who had a connection into an old Earth function — we call it the old universe — if they were coming from a system that was highly chaotic and had come into here into this framework, if those people had a connection with such a system that was basically going to the more chaotic side and if Montauk was trying to bring in a great chaotic system, and somehow the control group got wind of this, there could be and what we have information on was an attempt to try to bring in this high disruptive value. There’s all sorts of associated other rumors in regards to this. It hasn’t been factual; we don’t have a lot of information per se. But there is some evidence to support some of what appeared in Star Wars, indeed is a fairly good account of an old system that was basically failing apart and is growing more and more chaotic.

SS: Old in terms of time and space, or are we talking about a parallel universe?

PN: It seems like to me it’s a parallel universe thing. The legend base essentially that a long time ago there was a parallel universe. Probably most of mankind was in that old universe. it evolved into a totally despotic form of government that took hold and held for millenniums, which is essentially what the One World Government has here. They will be starling up a despotic form of government and through their technology base they’re able to hold the population pretty much the way the mind control here is heading. And what happened was a small rebel group that were fighting this, and the right continued. It went on and on and on just as in Star Wars.

But somewhere along the line another group of beings entered the old universe. They came in and did something terrible. The legend has it that they were a life form, essentially ape-mind energies of sentient beings, but they would suck the life energy out of you. They came in and there was nothing they could do to stop them. At that point a small group of what was left put all of the technology that they had into breaking the dimensional barrier and broke into this universe, but sealed the hole up enough so that this other life form could not come into this universe. There have been suggestions at Montauk that they were trying to bring this other life form in. We have very little data to back that up at all. This is pure legend at this point.

SS: There’s a lot of science fiction like that.

PN: Yes. That probably is based on almost like a racial memory from a long long time ago.

SS: What were you referring to when you spoke of the Montauk chairs?

PN: There were two generations of the Montauk chair. The original generation was built in a site know as ITT World-Wide Communications / Makay [sp?] Marine in Southampton Long Island. That one looked almost like a multi-pyramid structure with three coils. With that one they were able to use a more standard receiver structure. They use the ITT Makay Radio. what they call an ISB receiver which was based on a 1950 Hamilin [sp?] short wave receiver, the same receiver I used to listen to the “Buzzsaw”. They made a very special carrier synchronizer system in what we call ISB detectors which is upper and lower side band. So it means you have two outputs and one input for your receiver. What the outputs would look like would be an imaginary carrier and then an upper and lower information band. They would tune the to three of the hyperspacial window frequency channels. So you would have an upper part of the window and a lower part of the window. So they actually had six outputs from the three receivers, two for each receiver.

Now the carrier processing –they would take– lets say you were detecting the X coil, they would take the Y and Z coil summon and then use that to modulate the X coil and do the same thing for the Y and the same thing for the Z. And the synchronizing system that they’d come up with on the suppressed carrier ISB reception was such that it was what we call a phantom-phase-lock-loop system where you don’t even need a carrier to lock. The thing locked on white noise. So that means the thing would lock itself on the Delta white noise in the window frequency.

That’s how the first chair was built. That had to be a distances away because that was subject to the incoming fields. They had to locate that far enough away so the transmitter didn’t interfere with it. It was microwave length from Southampton to Montauk.

Now they had problems with it because if the information was being sent and the reality glitch or a reality shift happened it was a glitch in the information. You’ve got to remember the Cray-Computer at Montauk. was working on timing functions so the timing of the six data streams was very critical. For some reason they did not want to move the Cray-I to the Southampton installation then send the two channels of digital information on the microwave length. May be there was configurations in the Cray-I that were much more secret than the chair was at that point. The Southampton’s installation of course wasn’t as high a security installation as Montauk was.

They went with RCA for the second chair. RCA built the second chair. RCA had receivers which were already designed on the Delta T function. So it means instead of having the Delta T and the coil structure. the Delta T function was now in the receivers. So now they’re able to use standard XYZ Helmholz [sp?] coils.. Then the new chair was underground at Montauk and sat in a small room where the coils were close to the chair. In other words, let’s say Duncan was sitting in the chair. There would be coils on both sides of him, around the head and around the feet, then more coils on the top and the bottom. They were hooked to three very specialized receivers designed in the 30’s by Nikola Tesla which had Delta coil structures in the receiver stages. Then they used the same type of IF detection with the synchronized oscillation. They used the ITT Makay-phantom-lock design on the RCA receivers. In other words, RCA combined the lockup system of the ITT with their Delta T receivers, so the receiver looked almost identical in design. It had the same six channels of output, had the same upper and lower side bands.

SS: But much better design.

PN: The front end was a Delta T design. They didn’t need Delta T in the coil. Now the Helmholz coil structure can be… the coils can be phased where they’re insensitive to outside influences. So that means they’re able to operate at Montauk directly and they didn’t have the data problem of going over a 20 mile microwave length and getting timing glitches every so often that would throw the whole thought for in transmission helter skelter.

There also is believed that there is a third chair set up in Britain on the on the Thames River. We call that the Thames Chair we don’t know exactly where on t he Thames River it is. That comes up in readings. The other two chain I have direct memories of ’cause I was involved in designing the RF equipment that was used with both chairs. So I did see and I do recall both coil structures and both receiver setups at this point.

SS: You said you could tell somebody who had been through Montauk by their aura?

DC: Yes I do.

SS: How? What do you see?

DC: Basically there’s a color attachment to it. It’s a yellow-green nauseous attachment, if I could use the word. That’s the only thing that comes to mind directly. It’s the fading as though someone had that aura of leprosy, so to speak. He was an outcast, that had this strange queerness about them which was as though they were, let’s say, buried underground for years alive, having that sense of strangeness or queerness about them. It’s very distinct. If you’ve been exposed to it and had the sensitivity to see it it’s really around them.

SS: When you say attachment, does that mean it’s just on one area?

DC: It’s within the auric structure and there’s also attachments that go outside. It’s also associated strings attached to the people, as the psychic type energy function that are in association with a person and outside. All sorts of tag-along are associated to it.

SS: And these attachments are still attached to something on the other end?

DC: Oh sure. It’s not a healthy energetic structure of the body which, if the system is working correctly, it does clean itself back to its original process. It’s an indicate of things that am askew, for sure.

SS: We’ve heard of putting magnets on your body to increase the energy. Are there ways to do this by magnetics besides by using electronic devices?

PN: Well the thing you can say about magnetic fields is that a magnetic field is the portal or window into the shell function or the anti-matter world. So a magnet definitely is a multidimensional window. Magnetic fields are pure potential energy, they’re a pure potential structure. Unless you move them. they don’t do any work. if you move them they do work. This of course is normal physics at this point.

So the body is needing the magnetic potentials that are good and vitalize you. I’ve also seen people I hat magnets have a tendency to drag down instead of build up.

SS: Someone we know experienced that. He was unknowingly sleeping beside some heavy magnets and woke up drained of energy. Perhaps the magnets were facing the wrong way, if there’s a difference.

PN: Yes, there is a difference. There’s also another kind of ray that comes off the sides of the magnet between the north and south pole. It’s almost like a ray emanating into a black hole, is the only way I can think to express it.

DC: It’s something that we’ve recently been exposed to by a fellow named Jerry in Staton Island, New York.

PN: He’s a psychic that sees magnetic fields. Those plates we put in the Biosonde yesterday were from Jerry. There is a coating of, in black point, of magnetic powders that somehow he’s witnessing to the Earth through the telluric field of the earth. And all it’s doing was transducing the orgone field of the earth into the room. That’s why you got the cool breeze going through the room. And that’s tied directly into magnetism.

SS: At the lecture you mentioned “entrainment”….

PN: The esoteric database that we subscribe to believes you can entrain 10% of a system you can entrain the other 90% of the system. Which means if you can raise the consciousness of 10% of the population the other 90% will fall into the pattern sooner or later. They’ll fall in just on the fact that 10% are there. This can be backed up… we have what we call the museum, which is a whole stack of radio receivers. We found that if you can tune up 10% of them, the other 90% of them will fall into the pattern, no matter where they’re tuned. The level seems to be 10%. If you’re like at 8% there’s partial entrainment. 10% is full entrainment. So the plateau seems to be 10% from the viewpoint of physics. Why that is we can’t explain. it has something to do with frequency transformed and this sort of thing and we can’t express it at this point.

SS: Does the frequency make a difference?

DC: What is the prerequisite is the intent into the tuning. To have intent and follow that intent as you go along. And when you start resonating with that intent you get a vibratory pattern which is gracious to it and falls into it. Then you follow that along and get 10% then the rest fall along behind it. But it’s the intent for sure.

This interview provided courtesy of QUANTUM COMMUNICATIONS.

Source

Conversations With Researchers on Mind Control

Something info about Mind Control. Have a nice weekend folks:

Conversations With Researchers on Mind Control

December 1991, Introduction

The following is an extract from a taped interview with several researchers in the general area of mind control. It has never been published before. The interview, like many others that have been done, is done in an open question and answer format to protect the identities of the parties. The Orion Technology Report in Appendix 4 contains supplementary information that relates to this report.

X: Let’s move along to things that are psycho-active in nature and things that people should know about.

Y: We now have discussed the early Phoenix Project. In about 1969 they wrote the final report for Phoenix I. In that report it stated that “since we now have studied the electromagnetic effects on human beings, we believe it is now possible to influence the way people think with electromagnetics”. Of course when Congress read the report, they hit the ceiling, saying essentially, “we don’t want you doing this!” Congress was afraid that someone would use this technology to control them. They said, in effect, “no, don’t do this”. The people who wanted to continue this went to the military and said, in effect, “we can make you a nice little-weapon that will make the enemy lay down their arms.” How many people believe that the military doesn’t want this? The military then offered them the use of the old base at Montauk. Then came Phoenix II and the Montauk project. Let’s review that. They had three steps in the project. The first step in the project was something I like to call the “microwave oven” step. They wanted to see what the output of the multi-gigawatt transmitter would have on human beings in front of it. They took a subject and sat them in where they could be focused on and threw the switch. Of course, the subjects were cooked. We don’t know how many people they killed this way, but we do know there were a lot of them. Finally, someone got the idea, “hey, we don’t want the burning rays, we want the non-hertzian rays”. They turned the antenna around and they aimed the gain horn through the reflector at the target person. Now they were getting somewhere. They were able to direct mood control from a distance by ELF modulating the transmitter and changing the mood.

This was a great success. Someone then came to them from the US Government and told them that they would provide them with sensors that would pick up thoughts directly from a persons’ mind. So, they brought the system of sensors and installed them in a chair. This is the famous Montauk chair.

What they did then is that they connected the output of the sensors to computers that would decode the sensors output into a digital code that represented the thought patterns. Those went to another computer which would store the thought patterns and to another computer which would generate the pulse modulations that went out the antenna. What they had actually built was a mind amplifier.

X: What would they do with this chair?

Y: They would take a subject, train him so that his conscious mind would be diverted to the “serpent in the Kundalini”. The primitive mind would come up to the surface – they would blank that out and put in his primitive mind a concept that he would concentrate on. The concept would be picked by the sensors and transmitted out of the antenna. This was the second phase of Montauk. They were targeting whole populations and individuals. The subject could think of squelching electrical activity and all activity would stop where they focused the antenna.

X: What else where they able to do?

Y: They were able to change the way in which the animals in the area were moving. Once they programmed the animals to charge out of the woods into the town. They changed the way birds flew, fish swam and a dozen other things. They could take the crime statistics in Montauk and run it up and down like a yo-yo. They programmed crime waves for one period where they would occur,for four hours each night for a week. This drove the police crazy. There was one time, according to the Montauk police, when all the kids descended on the beach – all the kids in town. Two or three hours later, the kids all left the beach in mass unison. Another time, all the residents of the town decided to drive up to the state park. When asked, some of them said that it seemed like a “good thing to do”.

X: So what they had developed was …

Y: They developed wholly operational mind control. Based upon the effect that they had to cancel out the fields at the chair, which was located underground, they noticed that conceptual effects would happen out of synch with real time. They realized that they had the capability of bending time. At that point, conferences were held to discuss how they would modify the equipment to more effectively bend time. They developed something called a Delta-T antenna. It consisted of three loops describing a delta-function; it was referred to as the pyramid antenna. It essentially was three magnetic pickups/transmitters at right angles to each other; three orthogonal loops. Orthorotation is, of course, how you get access to hyperspace. It means you have tensor stress orthorotations. If you drive the three parts of the antenna correctly, you get what is essentially a space-time portal in the center. The antenna looks like a pyramid with an inverted pyramid on top.

X: Could you go into the operation of the chair a little more?

Y: yes. The output of the chair went into a Cray computer that would decode the digital representation of the thoughtform. That drove the IBM computer and the output from that went into the AIL computer…

X: AIL? Is that the Airborne Instrument Labs?

Y: Yes. The AIL computer generated the pulse modulation. It was a frequency-hopping signal source. It would change frequencies in a matter of nano-seconds. There were five synchro-dyne amplifier stages, cascaded. Each one had a separate pulse modulator. The final input was the amplitron, which had a big pulse modulator.

X: How did this thing work?

Y: They would take a portion of the thoughtform and put it into the first stage, and pulse the first stage on and load it into the second stage,etc. After the fifth stage it would go into the IPA’s, be pulsed again and then into the amplitron, which would be pulsed and then the signal would go into the above ground antenna. Each time the signal would go from stage to stage, more complex information would be put into the thoughtform that was being cycled through. What does all this remind us of? The radiosonde. This is essentially a big radiosonde.

X: How did they figure the time aspect into all of this?

Y: They used the delta-t antenna, which was situated underground immediately under the christmas-tree antenna on top of the building. The chair was located underground between the delta-t antenna and the above-ground antenna. The delta-t generated time-stress tensors which were coupled with the electric field to generate the full time tensor control. It was great. They had a working time machine. They used twistor and spinor fields in order to form a portal. They could go anywhere in space-time, and they used it once to get access to the underground facilities on Mars.

X: To Mars? How did that work’?

Y: First, the subject projected himself psychically through space to Mars. They set the computers to solidify the vortex between Montauk and the point on Mars and the vortex would be established. They only needed to do it once, because they taped it and could then run the tape to establish the vortex. There was a project called Project Phobos, part of which was concerned with the investigation of the underground caverns. There were other project initiatives that had to do with a defense posture for the solar system. It was a directive of the people in command at Montauk to physically and psychically approach this defense mechanism, in order to find a way to turn the system off. It was done. If it were turned back on, the system would in effect become more “conscious” and able to reject outside intrusion.

X: I’m not sure I understand what you are really talking about with all this… does it have anything to do with the planetary grid?

Y: Yes, to a degree. There are planetary grid nodes on almost every military base. What we’re talking about with the earth is putting the earth to sleep in order to prevent any geological changes of any great magnitude from occurring. We’re pumping signals into the grid points, which you might compare to human chakras. It is mind control, in a way, that is also being done to the planetary mind of the earth.

X: What has happened since the Montauk project crashed in 1983?

Y: Well, after the Montauk project was discovered and ITT was taken apart, the government didn’t leave it alone. They left ELF alone and they moved up to VLF through HF today. HF is 3-30MHz, MF is 300KHZ to 3Mhz and VLF is 3KHz to 300KHz. If you tune across these spectrums, you are going to hear all sorts of pulse modulated signals that sound like the old Montauk signals. You’ll hear signals similar but not identical to the Soviet woodpecker signals; you’ll hear video buzzes on these bands- they don’t have synch or chromo references on them. On VLF, you can tune into 15.75KHz horizontal rate and you hear phase modulation. I have receiving equipment that has dispersive IF filters that convert phase modulation to amplitude modulation so I can hear it. All your TV networks the National Bureau of Standards (NBS) supplies free-of-charge the reference frequency to all TV stations. This is what they phase modulate. Does anyone believe the government gives anything away for nothing? I just discovered that this is part of the videodrome system. I have been tracking this for quite a while and wondered what it was. If you tune up to 31.4 KHz, which is twice the horizontal rate, and up to other multiples of the horizontal rate, you’ll find other carriers which are similar to video but don’t have the synch information accompanying them; they correlate to the horizontal rate and the phase modulation. In the Long Island area, these carriers are coming from the state parks. There are Tittle VLF transmitter sites in the state parks; they are all run from satellite. We had psychics check this out on their level and they came up with the information that this VLF was in effect a softening up procedure to make the public susceptible to other mind control experiments.

The “American Buzzsaw” is the US equivalent of the Russian woodpecker signal. This a psycho-active signal which is designed to interface with the mind of the human being by way of the mind-brain connection. The government has been quite active, designing systems that are carried by helicopter, systems that sit on the ground like the buzzsaw transmitters, etc. I first picked up the buzzsaw signal about 1990. I called the FCC and asked them if they knew what it was. They said it was the American version of the over-the-horizon radar. I said, “you mean like the Russian woodpecker signal?”. They said ‘yes”. So they admitted that it had the same purpose. This signal is broadcasted on multiple carriers. The carriers hop from one frequency to another, anywhere in the range from 4MHz to 3OMHz. It is never on the ham band or the international broadcast band. It is only on the allocated frequencies that the government shares with other communication services. With the switching of these frequencies, they are creating what is known as a Levinson Transform, named after Norman Levinson, who generated the mathematics for frequency-time transformations. This is highly significant, since the human brain, body and mind work on time dependent pulsations and frequencies which are time encoded. You have this unusual pulse modulated signal hopping around from frequency to frequency to frequency. They have multiple transmitter. The signals only come in phase at a targeted site. This signal, we believe, has three modes. The first mode is the search-mode. This is where they transmit a signal and then a psychically sensitive human being picks up the signal and sends something back. They can in this way identify these people and where they are. The second mode is the general transmission of a psychic interrupt function which interrupts psychic activity. That’s all it does. It has a tendency to lower the overall psychic awareness of the population. Maybe one out of three people respond to this signal. A good psychic can easily screen this mode out of their consciousness. The third mode is where they target an individual, and we have known six people who have been targeted. They can lock on to the resonance of the synthetic material in your clothing and target you from that. We have a clearing device which uses the equivalent of a white-noise magnetic field to break up the magnetic matrix in objects in order to clear any psychic signatures or stored solitons in the object.

We put this device on the clothing, and you could hear the timing of the buzz-saw changing. It got more and more distorted, and then disappeared for a while; it then came back in on the search mode. This is telling me that it is an interactive signal. Also, if I scan up and down the band, it will find my receiver and lock in on that receiver. They are looking for a changing dynamic function. This must be how they key in the search mode. As I tune the receiver from high to low, it is sending out a phase conjugate function that they are picking up.

X: How can an individual know if they are being controlled through the use of electronics?

Y: Well, if there was a process being impinged on a person that embodied a higher intelligence than the person had, at a higher power level than the person manifested, you could say that he was under control. There could be emotional or physical indication that something was “out of order “.

Typically, we all know when something is wrong. You have to be in touch with how you operate in a normal manner in order to distinguish when something abnormal is going on. You have to have a high order of awareness in order to recognize when an attempt is being made to violate your mind. Understanding how it works is probably your best defense against this, at this point. We have no shield, per se, no real way to jam it, but understanding does limit its effect by allowing you to “plug the holes” in your mentality. A technological device that would block it would have to go above the wave-order that embodies the human being. It would have to be a unified field type of.device in order to be above the orthogonal rotations in hyperspace that they are using to transmit the effect. If you can personally operate within those higher orders, in consciousness, you can control what is going on around you, barring the use of a technological device. Another aspect is that if you operate “outside of time” in consciousness, then time-dependent hyperspacial pulsed modulations would have little or no effect. The people that are perpetrating this stuff want you to be unaware – that’s why they’re sending out the buzz-saw signals. The awareness that it is going on is by all means a major step.

X: How about the use of subliminals in the environment?

Y: There are doors to different levels within the “subconscious’ areas of the mind that are keyed in by the focus of attention and the integration of emotion. For instance, the third and forth level of the subconscious involves sexuality. Advertising and media focus on this subject should not be an area of focus. It is a “jumping off point” to get into the mind.

X: Are these “searching functions’ directed toward specific areas, or do they cover the entire country… is there somewhere you could go to establish a safe reference point?

Y: Well, from the way I have heard it, there are at least five multi- megawatt transmitters propagating these buzz-saw signals. There are also many local transmitters all over the country. These large transmitters could probably reach anywhere in the world. The American buzz-saw signal is mostly hertzian, and I believe it is affecting the magnetic field relative to the person more than the psyche, so magnetic shielding modes should be a step in the right direction. If you live deep underground, you probably would not even pick the signal up.

X: How deep would that have to be?

Y: Probably a mile or so underground would be enough. If you lived in a ring of mountains, they might not find you. See, this is not a time-stress that they are playing with. They don’t need special equipment to do this now.

X: What do you mean?

Y: They need no more than the UHF cellular telephone frequency, which is now being installed everywhere, to do it. The human cranium resonates within the frequencies covered by cellular telephone continuous wave transmissions. The cellular system nationwide is connected to a computer system in Boulder, Colorado. We are very suspicious about what other capabilities that system has, since it is pulse modulated. That is not a relativistic signal – it is a hertzian in-domain type signal and it affects the physical. We suspect that they may be using the cellular telephone receivers to pick up the return signal from the buzz-saw. We have heard buzz-saw like signals on the cellular telephone network that correspond in frequency-switch-timing in the same way that the buzz-saw signals do. There is a definite connection between cellular telephones and the buzz-saw signal. And this is “over-the horizon radar” that connects to cellular telephones? Come on, ‘who’s kidding who here.

X: How do the grid points interface with this technology?

Y: The grid vortex was initially used as an extension of the antenna structure. That’s all it was used for – for the mind control part of Montauk.

X: What size grid nodes would you need for this. There are grid lines about every 1.5 feet.

Y: You have different kind of grid nodes. The Hartman lines .are every 1.5 feet. The military bases are built on the large nodes where the lines repeat about every 15 to 20 miles.

X: Other than this electromagnetic pulsing, what other technologies are you hearing about that may be in this category.

Y: Well, the so-called videodrome signals on television. There is so much going on that could be involved.

X: Would you amplify a little on what you said about the resonance of the human cranium?

Y: There is research that shows that the human cranium resonates at about 850MHz; this seems to vary from about 830MHz to 890MHz. The cellular system is designed to operate right in that range. The cellular system operates from about 840MHz to 890MHz. It is pulse amplitude modulated and pulsed angle modulated.

X: Angle. That would be phase.

Y: Right. You have regular analog modulation as well. When your portable cellular system is ON, it’s in constant communication with the cell site. The set that you are carrying is telling the cell site where you are. When you get to the edge of the cell site it transfers you over to another cell site. They can also use this to track the people as well. Is that the only way to track?

Y: It is conceivable that they could track a person by the ringing within the cranial cavity. I do not know if they can do that yet. It is theoretically possible. Each persons cranium should “ring” with a different resonant signature.

X: What about the interface with this central computer for the cellular system. Could you go into more detail about that?

Y: The cellular system involves their use of a person they dubb a “roamer”, which is a person who roams the country with a cellular transceiver. He has to be able to hand over from cell site to cell site as he travels. The only way a roamer can operate over the entire country is for the system to be tied into a central computer that keeps track of everything.

X: What about the so-called independent cellular companies?

Y: They are tied in. They have to be able to go on to long distance lines.

X: Do you think that these independent companies are also in bed with AT&T involved with mind control?

Y: Of course. They have to be. They are part of the network and they are all linked electronically.

X: Is this all controlled by the military?

Y: Sure. From what I understand, the master computer for the cellular system is in Boulder, Colorado. I don’t think I have to tell you what else is in Boulder.

X: The center of the buzz-saw.

Y: Yes. That gives you the government connection. In fact, I believe that the central cellular computer is in the same building with the National Bureau of Standards.

X: Oh, my God. What more can you tell me about this videodrome signal?

Y: Well, about 6 cycles away from the signal is the harmonic of the power lines. I think that is your reference.

X: Is it pulse or phase modulated?

Y: It appears to be phase modulated.

X: Have you been able to de-modulate this videodrome signal?

Y: Yes. It’s coming right over the television at people.

X: Most of the instrumentation in electronics is constructed to measure a charge couple to mass – the “real” component of the signal. How do you go about measuring the complex conjugate component of the signal which is psychoactive – the relativistic portion of the signal.

Y: That’s not an easy task to do. The only way I know to measure such a signal is by measuring through the zero-point potential using an old-style regenerative receiver as a detector, because then you have the positron-electron pairs coupling through the vacuum and your relativistic functions will affect the coupling between the positron-electron pairs.

X: Is there a practical test that someone without access to a lot of instrumentation can use?

Y: Essentially, you can use any detector system. But all the detectors other than the regenerative type require a correlated hertzian function in order to pump the detector for it to detect the non-hertzian component or function. This is what makes a vacuum tube short wave receiver not fade the way others do. Its detecting the non-hertzian function, but not directly. If you move the hertzian part of the signal completely, your receiver just drops out to complete distortion because all you’re getting is the delta pulses that come through the Dirac sea into the receiver. A regenerative detector can integrate those Dirac pulses into a usable function. If you had a white noise source pump a diode, you could hear the modulations in the white noise source. The problem is, how are you going to hear a delta pulse on the speaker in the audio amp? You have to somehow cross-feed the delta pulse to give you something that is usable.

Source

ORION TECHNOLOGY AND OTHER SECRET PROJECTS

Some interesting info if you know who Al Bielek and Preston Nichols are:

Introduction

This report was constructed from over 9 hours of video interviews, personal interviews and individual commentary. It is structured in an open question-answer format, without regard to who is asking the question and who is answering; this format also allows insertion of other data in the later part of the report in the same open Q&A format. The data is not proven or verified, but is reported as received. This report contains information on the following: The Philadelphia Project, or Project Rainbow, Phoenix Projects 1-3, origins of the Radiosonde and connections with the work of Wilhelm Reich, government weather control programs and hidden agenda, the Montauk Hind Control projects, the deliberate murder of thousands of American children in mind control research and time tunnel experiments, government time-tunnel projects and operational procedures, how Nickola Tesla and Von Neumann contributed to these projects, the “martyrdom clause”, mind control by individual signature, technical ways to produce planetary holograms and Matreiya effects, the explanation behind closed time loops, government rationale and plans for the confinement camps and slave labor, Project Dreamscan, Project Moonscan, the Airborne Instrument Labs, Project Mindwrecker, the alien groups known as the Kondrashkin and their interaction with US Government mind control programs, the Kamogol II and Giza Groups, the negative Sirians, Soviet scalar weaponry, Orion Group manipulations, 6th root race incarnations, telepathy producing drugs and their use and suppression, the FAA and zero-time generators, technical spin-offs from the Philadelphia project, the International Aerospace Alliance, cross-section of implant device, Wilhelm Reich and mind control, Reichian Orgastic-type programming and its use by the US Government and Sirians, the Psi-Corps, Alien soul-trading, Montauk and the aliens from the Antares system, the Leverons, the Elohim Group, the US Navy and time-tunnel projects, the US Government and the Greys, electronic life support,systems of the Reptilian Humanoids, new life form masses over the poles and their relation to yearly outbreaks of flu-like disease, AIDS and Fort Dietrick (NSA), Maglev trains and the US underground tunnel network, the missing human genes, buried spacecraft and alien technical archives under the Giza pyramid, the coming new money, the “Black Nobility”, Nordic and human copper based blood systems and physiology, the technology of cloning and the development of synthetic humans and political replacement programs, the Middle East situation, Congressional awareness of drug and alien agenda, the MIB, the US Army and the black helicopter forces, government mobile mind disruption technology, nature and purposes and the Orion Group, fourth density transmutation of the human race, geological changes, Sirian Mind Control technology, and more, along with illustrations gleaned from witnesses with photographic memory and a lot of courage. This information is supplementary to that in Chapter 7 (Matrix III).

The Interviews

Where do you want to start?

Let’s start with the Phoenix Project.

It was a project that evolved out of the Philadelphia Project. it was a project that the Navy did in the 1930’s and 1940’s in an attempt to make ships invisible. They threw the switch one eventful day and the ship went into hyperspace. They had all sorts of problems with the people on the boat. It was a huge success as well as a huge failure – then they shelved it. Around 1947 it was decided to re-activate the project and it was moved to Brookhaven National Laboratories with Dr. John Von Neumann and his associates. Out of Phoenix I came Stealth technology, which I cannot talk about because of my job. It also produced all sorts of energetic little toys like the radiosonde.

What is a radiosonde?

Well, in all appearances it was a little white box that they attached to a balloon and sent up into the atmosphere. The government told people that it involved gathering weather data. It used a very unusual type of pulse modulation. In most cases they used a CW (continuous wave) oscillator and pulsed the signal. This turned out to be a very efficient conversion of electrical energy to etheric energy. I very recently started collecting radiosondes. I never saw a receiver. I found out that they were designed up at Brookhaven National Labs. I started to talk to people at Brookhaven and ran into a retired gentleman who used to work there. He told me that the design was originally done by Wilhelm Reich. That peaked my interest. The story goes that in about 1947 Wilhelm Reich handed the US Government a weather control device, a device that would do DOR-busting. Reich thought that if he could decrease the amount of DOR that storms would not be so violent. (DOR is the result of orgone energy coming into contact with an enclosed radioactive source. This produces a Deadly Orgone Energy – DOR – which threatens life. It is also produced in the atmosphere through other processes. The government sent the device up there into a storm and it did reduce the intensity of the storm. The government liked it, and they started another phase of the Phoenix project where they designed these “radiosondes” and started launching them in large numbers, maybe 200 to 500 per day. The radio in these things had a range of about 1oo miles. If they used so many of them, one would think that receivers for them would be common-place. I used to be a collector of radio receivers. I have over 100 in my personal collection. I have never seen a radiosonde receiver. I have heard of them but I have never seen them.

What are the frequencies used?

The frequencies used are 403 MHz and 1680 MHz. They used two different frequencies.

They are both on at the same time?

No. One or the other was used at any one time. The earlier ones used 403 MHz plus or minus 2 MHz. The later ones used 1680 MHZ, plus or minus 6 MHz. The “thermistor” in them had gold, silver, platinum and iridium in it. Reich used sensors that had gold and silver in them. The humidity element is a plastic plate with silver around the rim and conductive lines going across the plate. They put a very unusual mixture of chemicals on this plate. Unlike most humistors, the resistance went up as it got damp.

What we’re theorizing at this point is that the “thermistor” (temperature sensing) rod acts like a DOR antenna out-of-phase. The “humidity sensor” acts as an antenna for the orgone; The pressure sensor is essentially what they call a barrel switch, which is a pressure sensitive cycling switch. The device would destroy DOR and build up the orgone. The transmitter consisted of two oscillators, one of which would run at the carrier frequency (403 or 1680) and a second one which was a 7 MHz oscillator hooked into the grid of the carrier oscillator. The result was that the 7 MHZ oscillator would pulse on and off.

How does all this relate to what was going on with these other projects?

The government could not tell the public these were weather control devices. What we are seeing here is actually the genesis of what became the Montauk project, which was a combination of Wilhelm Reich’s work and the Philadelphia Experiment. There were two separate projects going on in Phoenix One. You had the invisibility aspect and you had the development of Wilhelm Reich’s weather control. Toward the end of the Phoenix project, by using some of Wilhelm Reich’s concepts and some of the transmission schemes used from the “radiosonde” project, they found that you could combine the two -factors and use them for MIND CONTROL. Government circles would have me say “mood alteration”, but mind control is what these idiots were doing.

That’s what the Montauk project was?

No. Phoenix One. After political circles found out about it they wanted it shut down. The people that were running it went to the military and proposed that they could use it to “influence the minds of the enemy”. The military loved the idea, and let them use the old Montauk Air Force Base. Among the equipment requested was an old SAGE radar unit, which was on the base. The base was shut down and everything was auctioned off. The group then moved in from the Brookhaven Labs. That began what we call Phoenix Two. They spent the first ten years, from about 1969 to about 1979, researching pure mind control. They started out by taking the output of the SAGE radar, modulating the special wave that Reich had showed them from the weather control process, and combined that with something noticed from the Philadelphia Experiment work. They transmitted about 406 MHz. It would hop around frequencies and change in phase. They used the amplidine concept where you have many stages pulse-modulated. BRF was from 10 cycles to 750 cycles. The pulse width could be varied anywhere from 10 to 75ms. The center frequency was 406MHz generated from a stay-low type function which was referenced from a zero-time function.

Was there any other modulation on this?

There was frequency hopping on it.

So Phoenix Two started in 1969?

Yes, in the period from 1969 to 1971. Phoenix One went from 1948 to 1968. The first part of the mind control project was to take an individual and stand them about 250 feet away from the antenna. The SAGE radar had a peak pulse power of .5 MW. The antenna had a gain of 30db. That means an effective radiated power of at least a gigawatt. It was nominally a gigawatt. Can you imagine what that would do to people? I think its amazing these people are still here. It does things like burn out brain functions, create neurological damage, scar lungs from heat, etc. They tried this with a number of people and there were few survivors.

Where did they get the volunteers for this?

They were just grabbing indigent people off the street and throwing them in front of the radar beam. That’s the sort of nonsense that the government loves to do.

Who was in charge of the project at this time?

Dr. John Von Neumann and Jack Pruett.

Any particular agency?

I’m not sure what the agency was. Now, somebody got the brilliant idea to put the subjects directly in line with the gain horn of the antenna. Lo and behold they got their result without burning the people up. They found out that by varying the phase modulation and the frequency hopping and the pulsing of the multiple phases that they could have profound effects on a persons mind.

How many people worked at this installation?

About 30.

Who authorized them use of the base?

The Air Force and the Navy. It was a joint project. There were both Navy and Air Force personnel involved. We have copies of the orders for the Air Force personnel.

What was the cover story for the base?

They had none. It was a derelict base.

It was abandoned. It was turned over to GSA as surplus around 1969 or 1970 when they shut down all the SAGE radar systems.

It was a “non-existent” operation. it was a perfect cover.

Where did they get the funding?

It was totally private.

Corporations?

It didn’t originally come from corporations, although it did in later phases. The original money came from the Nazi government.

This is Phoenix One?

No, this is Phoenix Two and Three. In 1944 there was an American troop train that went through a French railroad tunnel carrying $10 billion in Nazi gold which they had found. it was $10 billion at the 1944 price of $20 per ounce. The train was blown up in the tunnel. It killed 51 American soldiers. The gold turned up ten years later at Montauk. This has been verified. That money was used to finance the project for many years as the value of gold went uo. They spent all of it and ran out of money. That’s when they tapped on ITT, who funded it. ITT was owned by Krupp in Germany. In terms of personnel, many of the civilians and scientists there were all ex-Nazi’s who came from Germany both before and after the war ended. The project was under US Government surveillance. The intelligence community knew what was going on and the CIA monitored everything, as did other government intelligence agencies. The field of players who actually operated on the base was small, between 30 and 50. The funding was entirely private. After 1983, Senator Goldwater found out about it and started an investigation. He couldn’t find any trace of government funding. Pruett was the metaphysical director of the project. He was Air Force. After he left Dr. Herman C. Untermann took over. They had an electronics expert, Dr. Mathew E. Zerrett, who came over from Germany in 1946 with Werhner von Braun. Probably the reason that they ran out of money is that they had a total of 25 bases around the United States to support. The last of the bases shut down August 12, 1983. The base at Montauk, where all the stations got their zero-time reference from, shut down and the other two remaining bases went down with it.

What about some of the mind effects?

From what I recall of the program, as I was part of it, I was subjected to the mind control field not as I initially went into the program (because they wanted me initially for my sensitive abilities) but later. I was assigned to the indoctrination of the younger recruits. The first indoctrination turned out to be a disaster. I told them I didn’t want anything to do with the program, and they put me in front of this mind beam, and it did do damage to me. Finally, someone said, “shut it off, he isn’t going to give in to it” and they shut it off. Others were affected much more seriously than I was. The effects were generally really bad. It could burn your brains out. They would go out and pick kids between the ages of 12 and 16 off the street…

That’s where a lot of disappearing American kids went?

We estimate they took 10,000 American children off the street and brought them to Montauk, New Jersey. The total number of people that they pulled off the streets for the 25 stations was about 250,000. What the actual thrust of the program was in terms of all these kids is still a mystery. We still don’t know the answers. We know they were fully programmed for something. They were subjected to programming which eventually became more “humane” using advanced electronic techniques. The original programming was Reichian in nature and was more physical. Later they worked out techniques that used computers and electronic programming with the Reichian techniques that took very fast and had little side effects.

Are you aware of any people presently who have been through this?

I’ve run into people over the years. There is a very specific field identity pattern you can detect if you are sensitive enough. You can spot a person who has been through the Montauk program “five miles away”. it’s vary distinctive in the way that it’s been altered. I’ve spotted more than a dozen people in the Long Island, New York area.

What about Von Neumann?

He was still alive up until 1989. He has run into a problem with the government as well as other problems, such as a personality split in 1977, when he resigned as director and became a consultant. The government told everyone he died in 1956. The government is still interacting with him.

Were any of the Montauk subjects given psycho tropic drugs?

I don’t think so…

They used one drug which was used in connection with the Reich programming to make them more receptive. I don’t remember the name of it. The effect of the drug was that it would make you “horny as hell”.

Also euphoric at the same time?

Also euphoric, yes.

Did they get this mind-altering chair from the aliens?

The prototype came from the aliens. Beyond that we are uncertain. This chair was essentially a mind amplifier. The government would have specially trained individuals sit in the chair and generate thoughtforms, which would be amplified and transmitted. They could transmit the signal and put people in a pre-orgasmic state where they would be receptive to programming. It worked very well and they found other capabilities. They found that it could work in time. They had a psychically trained individual sit in the chair and generate a thoughtform of a vortex that connected 1947 and 1981. That’s exactly what they got – a time tunnel they could walk through. There was a series on television at one time that portrayed this concept fairly accurately. These were some of the earlier capabilities. They started going forward and backward in time. That was the last phase of the Phoenix project.

When did this time machine get going?

Around 1979 or 1980 it was fully operational. This transmitter had enough power to warp space and time. The individual in the chair would have to synthesize the vortex function because they didn’t have the technical capability to do that. It can now be mechanically synthesized. They did other things. They had the subject in the chair think of some creature, and the creature would materialize. They had the individual in the chair think of all the animals at Montauk point charging into town, and that’s exactly what happened. They almost had the power to create a being. The problem they had was that what they created only stayed as long as the mind amplifier was on. The power was somewhere between gigawatts and terrawatts. Tremendous power. The vortex could have a diameter of about five miles.

Can you describe what this looked like?

Its like looking into a peculiar spiral tunnel which was lit up down its entire length. You would start to walk into this thing and then suddenly you’d be pulled down it. You didn’t walk through it as such. You were more or less propelled through it. You could go anywhere in space and time.

Could you bring things back?

Yes.

Have you ever brought anything back?

Yes.

Could you continue your description of the tunnel?

Yes. The walls were solid but fluted. The tunnel was not straight but was a sort of corkscrew shape.

If someone turned off the power, would you be stuck in the destination time and space?

Yes. You’d be stuck there.

Did they send a lot of kids down the tunnel’?

Yes, but we don’t know what their goals were. They lost a lot of kids.

Since there is a time loop between however far you went back in the past through however far into the future, is everything fixed?

Yes.

One of the first things they did was send recruits forward to around 6030 AD. It was always to the same point. Somewhere in an abandoned city where there was a statue of solid gold. When they came back they were asked what they saw. Whether they were expecting to find a different answer from person to person is unknown. They would look into the vortex and make sure the environment would support life before they sent people. They took samples.

Are there potential futures that people could be sent to?

No. once you make the connection with the future the line becomes fixed to that point.

Can you change the present by sending someone to the past?

Yes. You can also change the present by sending someone into the future. Under certain conditions. The government is using existing time machines to go forward in the Montauk time line.

Are you saying that now the present can’t be changed because we have established a time-loop through the future and the past?

Yes. That means whatever everyone is doing between the most extreme past point and the future they will be doing forever.

What is the furthest anyone has traveled in the future?

10,000 AD.

So everything is locked in until 10.000AD?

Yes. It’s a dreamlike reality. No one has picked up a tangible future beyond 2012 AD. There is a very abrupt wall there with nothing on the other side.

Prophecies speak of earth changes around then.

Curious, isn’t it?

Can you project yourself two hours into the future and meet yourself?

Yes, but its very dangerous. The person who walked into the tunnel is out of phase with the person who comes out the other end. This did happen. The result is that the person just incinerates.

Did they ever give you a weapon in case you ran into anything negative?

They didn’t have to do that. The vortex could be arranged to follow the person, so that they could bring them back in if anything went wrong. They could see them on a viewer.

So they achieved a working time portal. At one point they had a situation where they had a “monster from the ID” type creature come through and everyone went into a panic. They shut the transmitter off. The creature ate people and equipment. They had to go back and shut down the unit in Philadelphia in order to shut off the unit in the future so they could stop this creature in 1983. This was on August 12,1983. The vortex locked on to the 12 August 1943 test and formed a loop. All this occurred because someone planted the thought in the mind of the operator in the chair to generate this creature. It was an effort to sabotage the project. A lot of people thought the project had gone too far. When I worked for them between 1971 and 1983 1 was so tired when I would get home from work. What they would do is that when I my mission was over they would return me to a point milliseconds before I left. It would appear from one perspective that I never left. Of course, after I stopped working there, all that stopped. Is there a reason that all these things happened?

If you go back into the Philadelphia experiment end of it, which was the beginning of the whole business, one can see from the way that thing was maneuvered that there was a higher force of some kind involved in setting the whole thing up …. because it never would have happened the way it did unless two obscure dates 40 years apart coincided between the two experiments: the project known as the Philadelphia experiment, or Project Rainbow, in 1943 and the Montauk project in 1983.

If I may interject something here. There is a point about two thirds of the way down the time tunnel where the person who is going through the tunnel perceives a large “thump”. The person’s consciousness leaves their body. There is a tendency to see things on a broader basis. I am sure there was some intelligence there. Looking back on my experiences, I’m sure there was some intelligence there. I would have trouble with the recognition of it. What they were trying to do at Montauk was to stabilize the perception process that would occur upon exteriorization from the body. They were trying to manifest that for some reason. We don’t know what their purpose was.

What was the role of the aliens in this whole thing, other than the prototype of the mental amplifier chair?

That would be the another part of this that we haven’t got into yet.

Let’s look at what the Philadelphia experiment got into in a technical sense. It was what started all this happening. It originally began back in the 1930’s in Chicago with three people. Dr. John Hutchinson Sr., who was the Dean of the University of Chicago, Nickola Tesla, and Dr. Kurtenaur, who was an Austrian physicist who was on staff at the University.

They decided to do something with the speculation regarding the concept of things and people being invisible. This subject had been discussed for several year. They got together and did some research at the University of Chicago around 1931 or 1932. In 1933 the Institute of Advanced Studies at Princeton was formed and the project was transferred there in 1934. One of the people on staff at the Institute was Dr. John Erich Von Neumann, who was from Budapest Hungary. He got his degree in chemistry in 1925 and his Ph.D. in mathematics in 1926. He taught in Europe for about four years and transferred to the United States. He taught at the graduate level for three years and was invited to join the Institute.

Other people at the Institute included Albert Einstein, who left Germany in 1930. He went to the California Institute of Technology for three years and taught there and then went to the Institute upon their invitation and acceptance. A lot of other people showed up there as time went on. The project expanded about 1936. In the meantime, Tesla was named director of the project. He was a friend of president Franklin Roosevelt, whom Tesla met in 1917 when FDR was secretary of the Navy. Tesla was asked at that time to do some work for the government for the war effort, which he did. He accepted and became director of the invisibility project until he resigned in 1942. In 1936, after intensive study, they decided to have an initial test of their work. They achieved some partial invisibility. The Navy and everyone else was encouraged to continue the work, and the Navy supplied money for research.

Scientists were coming to the United States from Germany until 1939, when the war with Germany was started.

In 1940, after research using Tesla’s approach, they decided they were ready for a full test at the Brooklyn Navy Yard. They had a small ship and a tender ship at each side. One ship provided the power and the other supplied the drive for the coils. They were tendered to the test ship by cables. The idea was that if anything went wrong they could cut the cables or sink the test ship. Everything worked and the project was declared a success.

The important point about the 1940 test is that there was no one on board the test vehicle. It was strictly a dry run with no people. This is important because of what happened later.

Other people came on board. Thomas T. Brown joined the project because of his expertise in electrogravity effects. He had the task of solving the problem of the German magnetic mines that were affecting allied shipping and Naval efforts. This led into a parallel project which involved the use of degaussing coils and cables to explode the mines at a distance from the ship.

The Navy wanted several people to keep an eye on the tests. That is how I got involved. Keeping technical commentaries. Let’s look at Nickola Tesla.

In 1879 his father died and his first year at college ended. He came to the United States in 1884. He had enormously intuitive insight. He had a perfect track record. Before coming to the US he had known Robert Oppenheimer, who later worked with the development of the atomic bomb, and Dr. David Hilbert, the mathematician who devised equations for Hilbert Space, which described multiple space or multiple realities mathematically. These equations for multiple space became very important in the project. Dr. von Neumann met Hilbert in 1927 and retained a lot of what he had learned. With that, Von Neumann developed other new systems of mathematics. Von Neumann was considered to be one of the most outstanding mathematicians in this century. Some think he was better than Einstein. Another mathematician involved was Dr. John Levinson, who was born in 1912. He died in 1976. He published three books on mathematics. There is no other history of Levinson himself anywhere that I can find. Levinson developed the so-called Levinson Time Equations. with all this behind them, the group had all they needed to proceed with the project.

After the successful 1940 test, the Navy decided to give the project unlimited funds and to classify the project. On December 5, 1941 I was in San Francisco and the government came and told me that a war with Japan would start within 72 hours and that they needed me to assist them. In January 1942 I ended up at the Institute of Advanced Studies. Tesla was given a ship and a crew for a full sized test. Tesla got a battleship. Tesla and Von Neumann didn’t agree on some things. Tesla insisted that they were going to have a very severe problem with personnel. Tesla wanted more time but the NAVY wouldn’t agree. Tesla made periodic announcements in the late 1930’s and early 1940’s about his contact with off planet species. He was in contact with the outside, who agreed that there was a problem with the people. He decided to sabotage the 1942 test in an attempt to stop the project. He de-tuned the equipment so nothing would work. The test failed. Tesla then turned the project over to Von Neumann in March 1942 and left the project.

Von Neumann went to the Navy and requested time to study the problem to determine what had gone wrong. Von Neumann decided to make changes in some of the equipment. He decided he would need a special ship that was designed from the ground up. The Eldridge was selected. The equipment was built into the ship. They put all the equipment on the ship. October 1942 arrived. They selected 33 volunteers for the crew, who arrived after graduation in December 1942. We still have a picture of the class.

After the ship was out of drydock work began. In May of 1943 von Neumann installed a third generator. It would never synchronize with the other two. It went out of control one day and zapped one of the men. Von Neumann pulled out the third generator (installed because Tesla had convinced Von Neumann of the potential problem with people) and went back to the original design. In mid June, the ship had sea trials. On July 22, 1943, they had the test. The ship between radar and optically invisible. They discovered people very disoriented. The Navy pulled the crew off and consulted Von Neumann, who requested more time again from the Navy. The Navy, after consultation with higher-ups, announced that the drop dead date was on the 12th of August, 1943. Von Neumann voiced his concern that it wasn’t enough time.

The Navy decided that it just wanted radar invisibility and not optical invisibility. The equipment was again modified by Von Neumann. August 12th arrived. We knew things were not right. The test began, and for about a minute everything was all right. The ships outline could be seen in the water. There was suddenly a blue flash and the ship disappeared entirely. No radio communication was possible. It was gone. In about three hours it came back. One of the masts was broken. Some personnel were partially embedded in the steel deck. Others were fading in and out. Some disappeared entirely. Many were insane. The Navy extracted the crew and proceeded with four days of meetings to decided what to do about the problem. They decided there would be one more test with another dry run without personnel. They conducted the dry run using about 1000 feet of cable attached to another ship. In late October 1943 the test occurred. The ship disappeared for about 20 minutes. When it returned, they found equipment missing. Two transmitter cabinets and one generator was missing. The cabinet with the zero-time reference generator was intact. At that point, the Navy stripped the ship and stopped the project. The Eldridge served in the war and was turned over to Greece at the end of the war.

The important thing is that there were two tests that were exactly 40 years apart to the day. It was a 40 year separation in hyperspace. Now, the Earth itself has a biorhythm that peaks on a 20 year cycle on August 12th. It “just happened” to peak and provided the connecting link through the fields of the Earth for the two experiments to lock up in hyperspace. Walk-in efforts are aided if they occur during this peak.

The ship was pulled into hyperspace. We were inside the ship and knew something was drastically wrong with the test. We tried to shut it off but it wouldn’t shut off. We ran out on deck and jumped over the side of the ship. We jumped overboard but ended up in a time tunnel which ended at Montauk, Long Island on August 12th, 1983. At night. We were found very quickly and taken down stairs, where Von Neumann greeted us. He expected us. It was a bit of a shock. We had just been in 1943 and now we were in 1983 looking at Von Neumann as an old man. He said that there was a hyperspace lockup and that we had to go back and shut off the generators on the ship or the hyperspace rift would keep increasing and possibly engulf the planet. He had been waiting 40 years for us to arrive.

Montauk sent us back and we smashed the equipment with axes. The ship returned to its original point in space and about three hours later in time. From 1943 on, Von Neumann didn’t know what happened. He had modified earlier equipment in 1943 to where he had a full blown time machine. The Germans also were working on time travel, and had it working in 1945 just before the end of the war. This is all a matter of record.

After the Navy decided to shut down the project in 1943, Von Neumann was sent to work on the atomic bomb project at Los Alamos until that was over. In 1947 there were major changes in the Department of Defense. Someone in the new structure decided to dig up the Philadelphia project to see if they could find out what went wrong. They asked Von Neumann to “take another look” at the project. He agreed.

There is another matter. Starting about August 6th, 1943, UFOs appeared over the Eldridge for about six days. They were there during the test. One of the UFOs was sucked up into hyperspace with the Eldridge and it ended up in an underground facility in Montauk in 1983. It contained a charging device which some aliens made us go back and get for them, as they didn’t want humans to have it. We don’t know who they were. Pruett was concerned about an alien invasion.

Also, Von Neumann was called by the government to come and assist in the examination of a crashed UFO in 1947 at Aztec. Another crash occurred at Aztec about a year later. The first crash had greys on it and none survived. At least one occupant survived the second crash. The radar systems unintentionally brought down the craft. Radar was used intentionally after that until the aliens got wise to it. The occupant of the second crash was not a grey, and Von Neumann got to talk with it. Von Neumann asked it what the answer to the invisibility problems could be. He learned that he had to go back and do his homework in metaphysics. The nature of the problem was that the personnel on the ship were not locked to the zerotime reference of the ship. Humans are normally locked to the point of conception as a time reference, not a zero-time reference. The time stream lock allows the person to flow in synch with the system so interaction is possible.

Time locks are fragile. All the power of the project disrupted the time-locks of the people on the deck on the ship. When the ship came back in time, the people didn’t come back to the same reference.

Von Neumann realized that he needed a computer, as well as some knowledge of metaphysics in order to be able to lock the time reference of the people to the time reference of the ship. He built a computer in 1950 for the purpose. It was ready to be installed in 1952 and a test was performed in 1953 that was successful. They didn’t go floating off into space when it was over. At this point, the Navy canceled Project Rainbow and changed the name to project Phoenix.

Alot came out of the negative effects of the Rainbow project. Some of it led to mind control research programs in the Phoenix project. The invisibility research produced some Stealth technology as well as other highly classified projects.

In 1983, they decided to apply mind control to all participants in these projects in an effort to cover them up. They had also been working on another project: age regression. Now, Tesla had sought back in the 1940’s to develop equipment that could help the members of the crew after they lost time-lock . The government developed it into the age regression program. It was physical age regression. A person retained the memory they had from the older age.

Tesla’s theory was that if you took the individual’s time-lock and moved it forward in time than you would remove aging. That’s what happened. It took between 30 and 60 days for the body to complete the change to the new time reference.

Now, some of this turned up in the movie called the Philadelphia Experiment, which was released in 1984. The government got an injunction which banned showing in the US for two years. It was overturned in 1986 and it was out on tape. I saw the film in 1988, and it helped bring back some of my memory about this.

Any initial comments about electromagnetics?

Well, are a lot of interesting aspects. There is a explained by most theories. It is not magnetic field only propagates at 0.4 of the electromagnetic field propagates at the speed electric field (according to Maxwells equations) propagates at the rate of c-infinity, which means that it propagates throughout the universe instantaneously. If you understand those basic relationships and how they interlock with higher order energies and fields, like soliton and tensor fields, then you can understand how an antigravity drive will work. It is a fact that the unified field theory was completed by Einstein and given to the US Government. They have it and they don’t want anybody to know they have it. It was never released publicly in any books. This kind of knowledge is used as a method of control between and for governments. It’s unfortunate. The government is supposed to be “for the people and by the people”. That is what it says in the Constitution. I wonder when the last time the president read the Constitution?

It seems like there are more people involved in secrecy than there are scientists. Where are all these people?

There are government agents and agencies everywhere that are concerned with keeping things secret. These days, the secrecy is applied more to the applications of hardware than the hardware itself. It’s not like it was in the 1950’s. As an example, the guidance package for the new Minuteman X missle that was developed for the Air Force by Northrop is unclassified. There was no classification on the circuitry and It was so accurate that it could take a missle and drop it down a chimney stack. The applications was capable of was classified.

Isn’t a lot of this left out in the open to distract what is really going on?

Of course.

What is the capacity of the gravity craft fleet of the United States?

I don’t know. I know that they have built quite a number of them.

What are the capabilities of these craft?

Well, when our astronauts first landed on the moon in 1969 they were greeted by a fleet of disks sitting on the rim of a crater. The astronauts asked their superiors if they knew about these disks. They were told “yes”, that they were American disks. The astronauts were angry at being used as public relations men by the government.

Why spend so much money on the Stealth bomber when they have had this gravity technology for so many years?

Well, the aircraft combines two aspects for invisibility. One of the aspects relates to the construction and coating applied to the surface. The other aspect relates to an electronic type of invisibility package which is a result of work done on the Philadelphia experiment years ago. Also, the stealth has a secondary drive system which is very advanced and allows it to fly in space. The assistant director of NASA admitted that this came straight out of alien technology. He admitted this to the public.

He did?

Yes.

That’s interesting in view of the government’s apparent position with respect to covert technology.

There are breaks in the government secrecy programs that are starting to show up. More and more people are getting totally disgusted with government activities and attitudes and they are beginning to talk.

Maybe it’s a deliberate leak.

It could be deliberate. Even MJ-12 in 1984 was about to break some information to the public about ET’s and UFOs. They decided not to release it at that time. John Kennedy demanded that they release it within one year. He also demanded that the CIA get out of the drug business. They assassinated him.

Have you found any resistance to what you have been coming out with?

No. The Navy keeps quiet, but I hear rumblings underground that they are definitely not pleased about it. The so-called .. martyrdom clause” works in my favor. They know that I know why they can’t touch me. If they do, they know that there will be real problems in time and space because of it. There are two of us that are holding certain factors in stability. If anything is done to either of us, there could be a rip in hyperspace. The whole reality system will shift. I will give you one guess as to what it will most likely shift to: We won the second world war by a slim margin. German technology was way ahead of us. If the war had gone on another 30 days the Germans would have won it. They had super weapons in production which they were ready to use. They were so close to winning the war that Churchill and FDR were really worried about it. If the system shifts, it could shift to a parallel reality where the Germans won the war.

That’s why the government doesn’t dare kill either of you?

Right. Because of what we were involved in, it might jeopardize our entire reality system.

Could you explain how a closed time loop works?

Well, one of the problems that has developed is that when you travel through time you cannot come back to the exact point of origin. It has to be later than when you left. If you were to come back to the exact point at which you took off you would be at the same point twice in your lifetime and there would be a very serious problem.

Would you refresh my memory about some of the dates involved with the development of electronic mind control in the US?

The mind control experiments were moved to Montauk about 1969. The hardware phase of some of the later experiments began about 1975; equipment to modify the SAGE transmitter was ordered about 1973.

ITT was the main contractor and sub-contracted portions of the contract out. Most of the contracts were awarded to firms on Long Island.

So what did they actually prove that they could do when the experiments were over?

What they essentially proved they could do was that they could control a person that they had the “signature” for. This pattern that was unique to an individual could be put into the computer program for the transmitter. A second order wavelength would be transmitted that has a lower attenuation and affects that persons mind directly. There could be a command to do anything focused at the person. Once a device was constructed that illustrated this principle on a wide scale. A mental message was put out that if anybody heard the message they were to call a certain phone number. Over 600 calls came from all over the East coast all the way down to Florida. It works.

That’s interesting. There’s a fellow who calls himself Lord Mattreya who says that he is the Christ returned to the planet; that when he links up with the international press he will send a telepathic message to the entire planet in their own language and they will hear it. They also are supposed to receive a visual image. So.. they have that technology?

Yes. There is not only an indivdual signature. There’s a racial signature and also a universal signal for the human race. The government has used all three to target specific individuals. They have also done group messages targeted on a specific racial or ethnic group. That’s common. In Boston and New York they were doing experiments on “mood control” on the cities. Transmitters used no longer exist, but the technology does.

Do targeted individuals perceive what they are receiving as their own thought?

Yes.

Is there any defense against that?

Yes and no. Theoretically no. This is what the government depends on. Practically speaking, they can’t get everyone, because some people are naturally resistant, depending on their level of mental and psychic development. Perhaps 5% of the population do not respond to these signals. If they get 95% coverage, they don’t care about that 5%. That’s what they have the riot squads and the concentration camps for. There is no defense unless you can interfere with that signal. Some people just don’t react.

So they transmit a thought signal?

Not exactly. If you were put on an EEG, you would exhibit a certain pattern of electrical responses. These can be recorded and they are unique to you. It can be recorded and stored and replicated on a computer. If they can replicate your RNA/DNA pattern they’ve got you too – for life.

You mentioned about concentration camps?

Yes. They are all over the United States. There are three in Arizona alone.

So they can control us to the point where we’ll just hand over our guns?

That’s what they hope. It depends on how effective this equipment becomes, how thoroughly installed it is everywhere, and whether or not people can ferret this stuff out and render it inoperative before that time arrives.

How about the idea of a conflict between moral conscience and what the mental command tells you do to?

You don’t have the option not to act as it says the way that equipment is set up – if you are not aware enough to make a connection that it is not your thought. It does not negate choice, it just puts in a strong impluse or command. Those people who responded by calling that number had no idea what went through their heads. Some of this does require preconditioning to a response pattern.

Could they be doing this over the media, like television and radio?

Of course.

You’re suggesting a state of absoulte corruption.

Absolutely correct. Planned corruption.

With this kind of technology, why do they need concentration camps?

Because there are always people that are resistant.

I would think that they would annihilate them, not lock them up. The first step is the camps, where you can handle them easier, then you can eliminate them en masse. You don’t go down the streets shooting everybody down. Once you’re in the camps, they break you down mentally. They’re experts at that.

We think they’re shipping guillotines in there for the people that don’t comply. They’re looking for a slave labor force. That is what H.R. 4079 is about that’s in Congress now. It creates a slave labor force in the prison system, which will be privately owned. States will pay the private prison a fee in order to put their prisoner in there.

Yes.

What are some of the other projects that relate to the capacity of factions operating within the United States Government and corporations to manipulate and control the population?

Well between 1977 and 1978 a project called Dreamscan came on line. It ceased in 1979. The goal of the project was to gain the technical ability to enter into an individuals mind in the dream state and cause his death. There was a movie called Dreamscape which showed what they discovered they could do. The project was run by the Secret Government and managed by the NSA. The purpose of the project was to provide for a means of covert assassination. President Carter found out about it and had it stopped. The hardware is still intact and in storage. There have been attempts to put it back on line by various intelligence operations, some of which are said to involve AT&T operatives.

What else?

Around 1987, a project called Moonscan started. It lasted into 1989 and involved positioning mind control equipment on the moon for use on the population of earth. It, like the others, has clear connections to negative alien activity.

Who ran that one?

It was managed by an organization called Airborne Instrument Laboratories (AIL), who have had other covert projects under their wing. At the time, AIL was run by Eaton Corporation. It is now managed by the Department of Defense as of 1988. There are three branches of AIL: Covert, Commercial, and Defense.

Any other mind control programs that you can mention?

There was a project called Mindwreaker that would allow paralysis of the mind. The aliens were heavily involved with that project. it produced several neurological weapons, some of which are used on the B-1 bomber, which also contains a lot of alien technology. At time, various alien species came and went out of AIL. There was one group called the K-Group, which was short for the Kondrashkin. They had pale skin that had a slight greenish tint and almost no hair. They looked human, and had to bleach their skin and wear wigs. They have been periodically involved with covert projects since the 1940’s.

Where has AIL been located?

In New York Stare, at Farmingdale, Deer Park and Long Island.

What is the current status of AIL?

Well.. there were eight projects ongoing at AIL that also had to do with the development of weaponry against aliens. In 1989 the Orion group discovered this and destroyed the projects. It can only be assumed that AIL still functions in other areas.

What other research goes on at Long Island?

Research on scalar weaponry, like the one that destroyed the Challenger.

I thought the Challenger was destroyed by the Soviets using scalar weapons?

No. The Soviets didn’t do that. The oddity with the incidents as far as the Soviets were concerned was that they pulled their ships about 150 miles out to sea before it happened. They were not the direct cause, which was a scalar weapon that they were trying to put into orbit and test. It accumulated a charge while the Challenger was going up through the atmosphere and turned itself on. That is what destroyed the Challenger. It might have been deliberate.

What was the ultimate power behind the Phoenix projects?

Ultimately, the whole thing is manipulated by the Orion group. The expectation was that they could use mind control to take over the populace in the 1990’s – no later than 1994 or 1995. They have also been doing genetic work in which they alter a human sperm and ovum to the extent that all offspring will produce hybrids with new characteristics. Humans will mate and create children with alien genetics. That’s one step beyond the average abduction scenario. There are other things happening with the human race.

Like what?

Since 1947, there have been components of the 6th race incarnating on the planet. The 5th race was the Aryans. The 6th race humans are 100% telepathic – the secret government and the Orion group sees them as a threat. They’ve been aware of it since 1942.

Wasn’t there a movie about something like that years ago?

Yes. I don’t remember the name, but it came out in 1982. In that film, there was a drug that made babies that were 100% telepathic. This kind of thing has actually happened. There was a Canadian company that was producing a drug which turned out to do just that. This was between 1946 and 1947. It was removed from the market immediately, although its use continues privately. In the movie, the government had a way of using electromagnetics to explode a persons head to get rid of them.

Sounds like something they mught have developed at Montauk.

It does, doesn’t it?

What is the current situation with aliens?

Somewhat mixed and confused. There has been a lot going on all around the planet. In September and October 1990 there was an alien group from some other dimension that was attempting to invade the planet. They took down all the zero-time generators all over the country. The FAA was especially affected. The rogue group was stopped by another species. For many years, some factions of the Orion group depended on a ring of alien satellites that would sustain life functions. Those were wiped out in November 1990 by the same group.

So there are positive light forces out there that are seeking to balance these negative activities by the Orion group?

Yes. I am not at liberty to tell you their identity.

Do you think that this group is related to those who flew over military nuclear silos and rendered the warheads inoperative?

I don’t know if they were involved, although I could ask. The nuclear charade is another thing on a cultural level. The idea of nuclear war was eliminated a long long time ago by all major powers on Earth. The threat of a nuclear winter and the fact that you can’t detonate two nuclear devices too close together in time stops them from doing it. I think a lot of people are aware that the same forces that control the United States today are the same forces that supported the buildup of Nazi Germany and the Soviet Union and arranged for WWII and Vietnam. The public has been lied to in so many areas since the early 1930’s that they don’t know what’s going on. Most people still think that the Congress and the President run the country and that they have Constitutional rights.

How about some interesting technology spin-offs from the Philadelphia experiment?

Well, there are a lot of them in use by the CIA and the NSA, as well as other corporate and government agencies. There is a portable unit that can render an individual invisible. The NSA is known to use those on a fairly regular basis. There is also a UFO research based covert organization that is believed to have them?

And what would that be?

Well, its a super secret international organization that is funded by all major governments. It performs research on aliens and alien technology, coverup operations, and also does espionage. The group is negatively oriented and is considered to have no positive attributes in relation to other humans. It is called the International Aerospace Alliance.

How does it fit into the hierarchy of command and control?

It’s connected to MJ-12, which is believed to be headed by Kissinger at this time. It is also connected to the Joint Chiefs of Staff and the President. AIL type units are also connected to the MJ group.

I have heard a tape of Robert Lazar, the EG & G scientist, and others who indicate that the highest clearance level is ULTRA. Is that it?

There is also BLACK LEVEL clearance.

What is involved with those little implants that are spheres?

Those devices are about 3mm in size. They are called SBMCD’s, or Spherical Biological Monitoring and Control Devices. They represent an organically enhanced synaptid processor powered by a micro-positron flow that controls or mimics the functions within the human nervous system with micro relays that duplicate brain operation or engram patterns.

What is the real story behind Wilhelm Reich?

Most people are familiar with Reichs brilliant work with bions, weather modification, cancer biopathy and other devices. Reichs work has been of interest to the National security Agency for some time, and it involves the fact that when a person is electronically maintained in a pre-orgastic state in their nervous system, gateways unto the mind open up for mind control to take hold. It is his most secret work as far as applications are involved. Reichs contact with alien species, his discoveries about life energy and cancer, and the mind control applications are some of the reasons why he was killed. This knowledge was combined with other knowledge, some of it alien in nature, and integrated into the work at Montauk and subsequent covert projects to subvert the people of the United States and the world under an Orion based system.

What are some of the ways they put people into this state?

Well, there are these devices. Every psychiatric facility has them. For a male, they attach electrodes to five points on the body (you can guess what one of those points are) and turn the device on. It makes programming an individual really easy. It is devious, but a lot more humane than the old electroshock therapy. The thing is, the device is being used for control instead of in a way that might benefit the individual.

What about the Philadelphia Experiment as related to aliens?

The Philadelphia Experiment was not an alien operation, as such, but what was the set-up was the date, August 12, 1943, because it had to be locked to the Phoenix project on August 12, 1983. The date was set by alien influence in order to cause a 40-year hole in hyperspace through which large numbers of alien craft could enter this dimension. It worked, but it didn’t last long enough to give the aliens the maximum benefit of the scenario. The order for the date came from a man in the White House who was directing certain aspects of the project.

This man was one of the K-group and headed what was called the Psi-corp. It was an alien intervention. This was scheduled to be a main invasion from a different universe.

How about other types of aliens that were involved?

Most of the other alien groups around, including the ones that had their shipped sucked into hyperspace, were observers of what was going on, not participants. Beyond the obvious fact that they were observing for themselves, there is insufficient data to determine whether they were observing for anyone else.

What about the alien ship, again, that was trapped underground at Montauk?

I was part of the group that dismantled it. What is involved is that you have to find out how everything goes together. You have to read their manuals… there were seven occupants of that ship; four of them would not talk to us. Eventually, three of them did, and we learned their language and deciphered their manuals about the construction and maintenance of the ship…

They weren’t Greys?

No. They were about 6 foot 5 inches tall. They were essentially human in appearance. They had dark leathery skin. They had no hair. Where they came from we were not sure. We don’t even know why they were there, except perhaps to observe the test on August 12, 1943. When the ship appeared in 1983 underground, we were initially concerned as to whether this ship represented some sort of “point man” for an invasion of some kind.

Was there any weaponry aboard that craft?

Not that I remember. The ship had a lot of strange devices on it. We took a lot of stuff apart. We took off part of the control panels, and communications equipment. We decided not to touch the main power plant because we thought it might blow up if we fooled with it. We left the food processing units intact. The ships drive systems were removed. A lot of the ship was stripped down right to the shell. It was left that way.

Why would they suspect an invasion?

Idon’t know, except that there have been so many groups over the years trying to invade this planet. One wonders why they want to bother with this mud ball and its backward technology.

John Lear suggests that the human race represents a gene pool.

That is one good possibility. Another one, and I get this from sources I can’t reveal at this moment, is that they are seeking certain rare earth elements they apparently can’t find elsewhere.

Robert Lazar mentioned a book that contained the history of earth and that it said that humans were referred to as ..containers for souls” and that souls could be traded in something like a barter system.

The aliens are doing it all the time.

They’re trading in souls?

Yes. They were shuffling us around like we were cattle to them.

Property. What do you think of that concept as applied to humans?

Well, it is mentioned that several races consider humans in some ways similar to that. Whether it is the bodies or the souls that are considered property, I don’t know. It appears that they are concerned more with the bodies, the genetics, and the capabilities of the human mind. The capabilities of the human mind are virtually unlimited. That fascinates some species.

Those aliens that were on that ship. What became of them?

Out of the seven, four did not talk and three did talk to us. One of the group that did not talk to us was evidently the captain of the ship. He eventually killed the three that did talk to us. The four remaining aliens were put into “deep freeze” by the people who were running the underground at Montauk. I have no idea what they did with the other three bodies.

What happened to the craft?

it’s still there, as far as I know. It was a gold colored saucer about sixty feet in diameter. It had a bulge on both the top and bottom.

In one of Linda Moulton Howe’s books they had pictures of types of alien writing. Were you ever able to determine the language they used?

The language they were using was apparently that of the Greys. The symbol that the Greys use a lot is the same symbol that the Trilateral Commission uses.

How big is the underground at Montauk?

It’s very large. It extends for miles, especially the 5th and 6th levels. Almost all of it was constructed in the late 1920’s or early 1930’s. We talked to one of the men who was one of the contractors who built it. It was built on government orders right after the depression started. It was built in six levels. They covered the top over with earth. It’s known locally as “the hill”. Its a huge base. There may still be some use of it. Most of it is shut down. The power has been on for two years now, single phase 220 volt. The elevator used ran on three-phase 440 volts, and that has not been turned on, probably because they plugged all main openings and the elevator shaft with concrete.

How many different species of aliens are you aware of?

Well, the Greys were not part of Montauk. By agreement they never went there. There were groups that were part of it, like a group who called themselves the Leverons. There were those there from Antares that were only observers. They looked like humans. There were members of the Orion group there occasionally. The K-group had some connection with the place, but I personally never saw any of them there. Lastly, there were the inhabitants of that ship that was captured. The Orion Confederation includes a lot of groups, including the Leverons.

The Orion group is supposedly at war with a group called the Elohim. Would you say that is accurate?

Yes. This is happening. The Elohim group is a very old race, perhaps the oldest in the universe. At least its the oldest we know of.

Is there any particular species that has the greatest control over humans?

The Orion group. They’re the weasels in the background that manipulate everybody, including the Greys. The Orion group includes the various reptilian species.

Was the zero-time generator from alien sources?

No. Tesla created the zero-time generator in the 1920’s. It provided a very basic time reference which is actually locked to the center of our galaxy. That’s why they call it a zero time generator. Locking equipment to that is the only way you can get some of these higher function generators to work.

The aliens use crystals quite a bit.

Yes. Crystals can store and modulate enormous amounts of energy. There was a crystal in the alien ship that ended up at Montauk that was about 18 inches long. Other factions of the alien group appeared in one of the side tunnels off the main time tunnel and captured several of us, and wouldn’t let us go unless one of us went back and got that crystal for them. We did. The problem was is that we were in the time tunnel too long, because the time references the man I was with dissolved, and he began to age at the rate of about a day per hour. Within three days he was dead.

What are some of the ways the government became involved in time travel?

The Navy had the ability to use the time travel technology from about 1970 and developed full operational capability in 1973. They did do an experiment where they tried to go back and kill the father of the man destined to be the head of the new One-World government. They did kill his father, but it made no difference. They didn’t understand why it didn’t work. Robert Lazar was voicing the concept that time is quantitized or compartmentalized and that you can’t change what has already happened in terms of the past.

Is the Navy tied in with the secret government?

Small elements in the Navy are, but the Navy in general is not.

So in the 1970’s they were against what was going on and tried ways to stop it?

Yes. At Montauk we did succeed in changing the past, so I know it can be done, but it takes enormous amounts of power and more than just a time machine, but I won’t get into that.

So the person who will be the head of the One World government is walking around and has no father?

Theoretically that is true.

How could this guy have come into existence?

That’s a very good question. That’s another one of the paradoxes of time.

Was this person already in existence before they went back and killed his father?

Yes. They assumed that he would disappear and cease to exist.

Do you know who this individual is?

No. Not by name.

Is the One World government interested in longevity? It seems like all these plans are on a long term basis. It would also seem like it would take too long before those in control could really reap the benefits.

When you get to the level of the warped mentality of the world leaders that are controlled by the Orion group, you don’t really know what their goals are. They are totally dependent on a specific technology, including time machines which are anchored in the 40 years time rift plus the extensions in the time matrix which goes another 20 years. Time machines are based in the technology that had its origin here within that time period, and from what I understand as of 2003 they will suddenly find that their time machines no longer function.

Why?

Because they were created on the basis of something which was basically artificial – the rift in time. The function is based on the rift. Then its back to the drawing boards.

Have they constructed any concrete plans based on the rift that might disappear when the rift does?

I don’t know. I can’t speak for the whole government.

Are any Orion based timetables involved in this?

Well, the Orions have their own ways of doing things.

Would they be dependent on this rift?

No, but the Greys are somewhat dependent on it, having used it to get here in large numbers. The Orion group itself is not here in a large number.

They let others do the dirty work for them?

Yes.

Do you get any particular feeling what things are like within the secret government with respect to the groups of aliens?

Well, they were panic stricken to get rid of the Greys. I don’t know if they’re that panic stricken any more, because I understand that the Orions are essentially gone, except for the mop-up squad, which have their own life support systems.

The general life support for the others was destroyed by another alien group in November 1990. They could not exist here without electronic support from the ring of satellites they put up there ages ago. Almost all of them packed up and left.

What is the nature of the electronic support?

They cannot stand the vibrations of this planet. The Greys like it because this planet is very much like their own home planet.

How would all this relate to the idea that their is a planetoid coming into this system with a bunch of reptilians on it. Would they bring their own electronic life support systems?

Yes. They can replace the satellites. They may well be back before long.

How do you view that scenario, where the planetoid full of Orion reptilians, or Draco, is coming here?

Well, we monitored the signals coming from the planetoid. They were coming in at around 25MHZ with twelve carriers spaced 50KHz apart. The Orion group reptilians have twelve chakras, maybe that has something to do with it.

Then this could be the part of the electronic signal that might even be representative of their electronic life sustenance matrix?

Yes.

It might well be necessary to set up transmitters of our own that would interfere with that kind of electromagnetic emanation.

Yes.

How about the Orion genetics?

It’s very similar to that of humans. For a long time they were hoping to crossbreed. It didn’t work properly. That was one of the side issues of the Montauk-Phoenix project, to find ways of crossbreeding. They never did fully solve the problems.

So this is where the concept of twelfth density would come in?

Yes. Probably. What they were hoping to do if they succeeded in crossbreeding humans and Orions was a silent invasion where they would take over humanity by crossbreeding and eliminate the humans they didn’t want. At that point, Orion souls would move into the crossbred bodies and it would be complete. They would not need electronic support systems to survive here, which consists of 12 satellites.

So how does this affect the world government plans, now that the Orion group is temporarily gone?

It changes the context of the system that backed up the One-World government. They were backed up by and expected support from the Orion group. With the Orions out of the picture, they are on their own.

How about the Greys?

They’re running around in circles. They are probably continuing with the genetic work and the abductions but they are lacking all direction except that which they already had established.

There was a recent abduction of woman in Seattle on December 3, 1990 where there were beings that looked human. They told them, however, that they weren’t really human and allowed them to see their true form. It was a variant reptilian species they had never seen before. They asked the abductees questions about their experiences with the Greys. The woman got the impression that the reptilian humanoids thought that the Greys were going to far in their interactions with humans and that they were looking into it. Any comment?

No data on that one.

Well, since they were looking into Grey excesses in behavior, they probably were an offshoot group and not anything to do with the Draco.

They probably were an offshoot group. I have gotten the impression that not all the Orion Confederation is evil. There is a group within the Orion Confederation that function as sort of overseers and they are apparently quite upset about what these Greys are doing, but apparently there is not much they have been able to do about it. The basic heart of the Orion Confederation that we have become familiar with is totally evil and self-centered.

They basically want to take over the Earth?

Yes. They want to take Earth because of their desire for the planet as a staging base. They also desire the water and the minerals. There have only been partial success of their cross breeding program. A few hybrids have survived. They essentially look human but have Orion genetics within them.

What’s going on in Washington right now?

They are up to their eyeballs in problems. They consider the thing with Hussein in the Middle East as the least of their concerns.

What are they concerned with?

They are concerned with AIDS and other, disease problems which are coming to earth from space. There are currently two huge clouds of amoeba-like creatures over the polar regions of the earth. These have shown up periodically over the last ten years. NASA is working on this. Every time they’ve been detected, all kinds of strange illnesses break out. They don’t how they can stay alive and be in outer space. They’re very concerned about that. The AIDS situation is so far advanced that it is considered to be a disaster.

How do you bounce that against the fact that AIDS was created at Fort Detrick, Maryland? Are the aliens ultimately behind that as well?

I don’t know. It’s very possible. It originated on the orders of the World Health Organization. I suppose you have to go back and see who was responsible for this diabolical plan within WHO to create a virus that would destroy the human immune system. They found out that once it was released that it mutated like crazy and there is no way to produce a vaccine for it. The government does have a way to cure it, but they do that on a pretty selective basis. The cure involves electromagnetics. There are also other means that have been discovered, but the government doesn’t want the outside world to have it. Its part of the population reduction program.

Which is whose idea?

Apparently it was a decision reached by the secret government. The final decision was made in the White House in 1972 on the basis of a meeting of world leaders under Nixon. A friend of mine got the notes from that. He’s now in prison, and he talked about it publicly in 1974. He said that they had the meeting and agreed that the planet was overpopulated and that it had to be reduced. The decision was to reduce the population from 5 billion, which it was at that time, to 1 billion by the year 2000. They were to use any and all means to do this. They believed that the earth could only handle 1 billion inhabitants. Their problem was how to exterminate 80% of the world population in 30 years. They modified the figure to be 2 billion by 2000, but the AIDS thing is going to take care of a good part of that for them. The latest figures coming out of Washington indicate that Africa is now as good as doomed. In another ten years, 75% of Africa will be dead.

There have been recent figures to suggest that 92% of all babies born in Africa today have the virus.

Yes. in India, the rate is 51%.

It seems extremely irresponsible for a government to create something that can take people and do that to them.

Well, it was the “undesirables” that were given the virus first.

They should have known that this thing was going to get out of hand.

They didn’t know that was going to happen. It was also figured that it would affect the young set, those in their prime, most.

If they travel in time and know that geophysical changes will take care of a large part of the world’s population, why would they bother to do it? Especially because you have a bunch of 50 year old men having to wait 30 years.

I don’t know. Obviously they didn’t think.

Or it wasn’t them who were ultimately responsible. The only ones who would have a long term anything to gain would be aliens, so it further indicates that ultimately there are negative off-planet forces that are responsible. The aliens know about the changes.

How did they spread the virus initially?

Through World Health Organization inoculations that were contaminated with the virus. The first program was in black Africa in 1974 with the smallpox inoculations. They then went to Brazil and other Hispanic countries and did it there. In 1978, they laced the gamma globulin for the Hepititus B vaccine because the homosexual population was the greatest consumer. That’s why it showed up first in the United States in the homosexual population and why it was claimed to be a homosexual disease. Nothing could be further from the truth, but it was something the Evangelists took up quickly, saying that AIDS was “Gods curse on the homosexual”. People didn’t worry about it who weren’t gay. The people who planned this didn’t figure on the ability of the virus to mutate.

It must taken someone with a really stupid mentality to do this.

What kind of disturbances have appeared with each appearance of these amoeba-like clouds?

Respiratory disturbances. It’s been detected in the New York area and on the west coast. Details are scant, but they consider it a major problem. It affects the human system directly. It is also the mechanism behind the influenza attacks in 1916 and 1917 that killed so many people.

It is possible that the ozone layer was deliberately affected in order to allow this influence to come through?

I don’t know. The greenhouse affect is taking hold because of it.

Is there any particular alien species whom it would benefit if the earth dried up and became desert?

Yes. The reptilians species might be good candidates.

Where do the Greys come from originally?

From outside our time/space continuum. The government does not fully understand where that is, since they don’t trust a lot of their information about them.

Do the Pleiadians use the gravity amplifier to fold time and space?

No. They have a hyperspacial drive system. They don’t do it in the same way. They use velocity rather than folding.

Aren’t they beneficial to humans?

They have not been invited to help. They are also sensitive to earth politics, galactic directives, and their own policies. It comes down to the fact where you don’t interfere when you’re not asked. Even when you are asked, there are limits to what you can do.

Can they be asked?

Well, in the case where you would have interference on a mass basis, like in response to the Orion incursion, you’re getting involved with the history of all humanity. We’ll have to see.

I would think that the only hope would be to collectively raise the consciousness of the entire planet.

Right. There are also other problems. The government worked out a deal with the Greys some time ago and has some of their technology. Weapons have been developed. They now have a missle that has a minimum operational range of I light year. We can hit any spacecraft well beyond the solar system.

I saw a brief on the news where the Star Wars technology is being turned around in space to hit down asteroids. Will they in fact be used primarily as a planetary defense against alien incursion?

Yes. The directives out of Washington seem to point to the fact that the secret government wants no aliens here at all interfering with their plans. They have not solved the problem with the Greys.

How do aliens refer to religious concepts?

As far as I know, none of them have any religion as such. They acknowledge a divine source in the universe. The Greys refer to the universe as a mind.

What is your prognosis for the future of the human species?

It will survive.

Why was it mentioned at one time that 2011 was the last year that they could see anything tangible?

It was mentioned in the Mayan calendar that 2011-2013 was a barrier of some kind. Psychics have said that there is a ‘barrier around 2013 that they can’t go through.

That doesn’t mean there is nothing beyond that.

No. It’s just blocked from view. Even to the time machines. There are a lot of people wondering whether they are going to retain control over humanity beyond 2013.

There seems to be a quickening of consciousness right now as we are beginning to go into fourth density.

Right. There seems to be some evidence of this.

Do you know where the current entrances to Montauk are?

No, but I know they’re there. The last time two people went out there to look they were abducted. They were knocked out electronically and taken underground to another facility where mental adjustments were made on them. They were returned to the spot, but one of them was not returned exactly at the same time as the other. There was about a 2 second gap and the one that was already there saw it. They knew immediately that something was wrong. They were given a warning. The underground system is still in operation. There are three entrances near AIL. They have three plants in the Farmingdale area. Brookhaven National Laboratories have an entrance to the system. There is also a connection to the Newark ITT Corporation building. From there a spur that goes to the ITT facility at Nutley. There is also a tunnel that goes from Newark to Wright Patterson AFB.

Do they use Maglev trains in this tunnels?

Yes. There is a very extensive tunnel network under the United States. The interesting things is that once you get past the coding system at the entrance elevators and get into the underground, nobody asks any questions. They assume you are supposed to be there, unless you make it obvious that you are not by your actions or appearance.

Why do humans age?

There are two genes missing from the human chromosome. One of them controls the aging process, so humans age. Because of this, when cells are duplicated in the body they are compared to the parent cell, not a master pattern that would exist in the genes, so the duplicate is not exactly the same is time. So humans age gradually.

There has been some discussion of the biorhythm cycles of the planet. Could you explain that again?

The cycles of humans are well known. It was not known until after 1983 after Montauk went down that the earth has cycles. It was discovered by accident. After an analysis, it came out that there were four basic cycles involved. These four cycles reach their maximum peak every 20 years. It’s always on the 12th of August.

So the next peak will be in 2003?

Yes.

Do the biorhythm cycles of humans and those of the planet interlock’?

It is not known to interlock.

Have you seen the movie Millennium? What can you say about the concepts portrayed there?

Yes. It was well done. It was an attempt to explain some disappearances. It’s an intriguing idea. Strangely enough, they didn’t cover something that really happend in Denver around 1965. A jet was coming in on final approach in daylight with no bad weather and vanished entirely from the radar screen. It was never found. No trace. Years later, in Tucson, I met the son of a man who was vice president of United Airlines. I asked him about it. He said, “how did you hear about that?”. I said I read it in the newspapers and then it was hushed up. He said, .. you better believe it was”. I asked him if anyone knew what happened to it, and he said that they had no idea. There was no wreckage, nothing. There is no way it could have happened like that.- but it did. The ideas in Millennium were more along the line of something they would have developed in the Phoenix project.

Are there any tunnels under the Pyramids?

There is a tunnel under Giza. No one knows when it was constructed or how.

How about spacecraft or anything else like that?

An expedition was mounted as a result of data gathered back in the 1920’s and 1930’s about a secret chamber under the pyramid. They built equipment in later years and went in down into the pyramid and found this metal door 500 feet below the base of the pyramid. They found other doors. The doors used a sonic code. They found a room with over 30,000 recording disks and alien equipment. They made photos of the disks with IR film. The Egyptian government wouldn’t allow them to take any out. The disks were deciphered. They described the rise and fall of civilizations in outer space going back more than 100,000 years. This group built this record room and then built the pyramid over it. There was no UFO, but a lot of equipment was stored on three levels. They photographed over 2,700 record disks. According to an Air Force contact, these disks are sitting in a safe at Kirtland AFB in New Mexico. They don’t want the public to know the information.

How is the government involved in cattle mutilations?

Human scientists are involved with longevity studies using adrenalyn. They have developed altered adrenlyn, and drugs called cordrazine, cortropinex, formazine, and hyronalix. All of them have an adrenalyn base. The only way to get the large quantitites of adrenalyn is to get them from cattle. Some of the substances they develop affect psychic development. Other drugs have physical restoration properties. Aliens use cattle for the biological materials as well. They use the materials in their breeding program and for the construction of cloned individuals.

Do you know when the Federal Reserve is going to issue the new money?

I don’t know. There have been several dates that have come and gone. When they do all the current cash will be worthless.

The plan is to give a short notice date by which people will have to turn in their old money for new. Of course, you will have to account for it, especially since it is now illegal for you to have $3,000 or more on your person. It’s coming.

Would you consider the secret government the Fourth Reich?

It’s hard to say. My understanding of it is that the secret government is not connected with the Nazis but with world bankers, old money and what’s called the “black nobility”. These were the blue-bloods of Europe. They actually did have blue blood, and it was not hemoglobin based but copper based. They were semi-human. There are still to this day, some animal species in South America that have copper based blood systems. There was a problem with hemophilia, and not because of intermarrying. The problem was that they started to marry outside of the copper based blood system. Hemoglobin and copper systems don’t mix. That’s where the laws against marrying commoners originated.

What about these synthetic humans?

Human cloning was developed at the University of Utah at Salt Lake City in 1977. They first aired this on TV as part of a series. They had an alleged human clone on TV that they were interviewing. It didn’t talk very well. They showed the original human and the clone. The clone was not all that successful. It took 14 months to generate a fully adult human clone in a tank. It was a two part series. The second part of the series never aired, for obvious reasons. CIA sources have confirmed that it started at the University of Utah. The government has a facility for clones. The first one was built in the Mount Hood area, about sixty miles east of Portland, Oregon. They have other facilities in other locations. Locations must have stable geomagnetic fields and other special characteristics or the cloning process does not work properly. They can replicate them faster now. They have clones of all the major government figures. This is partly for security reasons. it also creates the situation that when someone falls out of favor, they clone the person and kill the original. This kind of thing apparently happens with some frequency.

There have been allegations by some that Carter and Reagan were replaced.

Yes. I’ve heard that, but I have no information that says that it happened. Reagan looked a bit funny after his assassination attempt, particularly after he came out of the hospital.

It’s curious about the cloning facility in Portland. Were there not reports in the 1960’s or 70’s about people seeing a spitting image of Hitler there?

Yes. it is curious. There isn’t any connection that we can establish, but anything is possible. Hitler could have died as late as 1984. I have heard rumors that he was the top director of the Phoenix project, but those rumors were not considered to have any merit by most people. Eichmann was apparently involved at one point until the Israelis got him. A lot of top level Nazi scientists were involved. There was a man called Huntermann who was the associate director of the project. We wondered if there was anybody above him. There was – a complete collection of pure Nazis at the top. The Germans were also involved in work with the Greys and cloning processes.

Are they Nazis still running things?

I don’t know what interconnections they may have today. I have two friends who say opposite things. one says that the Nazis are in charge and the other says that Jewish scientists are in charge. Other people say its MJ-12. Take your pick. I think that they’re all involved.

That’s very interesting about the duality of the Germans and the Jews. Recently, we received information that these two groups of entities are originally from one source out there somewhere, and that they were banned to this planet to work out their differences. They have apparently always sought to destroy each other … and they are still doing it on many levels. Everyone else just has to stand by and put up with it, I guess. it just adds to the mess. Orientation of both groups appears to be negatively oriented toward service to self instead of others. There have been things recently said by abductees that indicate that they were taken to joint Nazi-Alien bases were they had swastikas on the walls. This was within the last two years.

Do you remember the Reinhold-Schmidt story?

He was a businessman who lived in New Jersey in the 1950’s. I finally got a copy of his book. He insisted that one time when he was driving home from work, something went wrong with his car. He was approached by someone and was taken aboard a saucer. All the occupants were dressed in black clothing and talked in German. To him it appeared like they might be Nazis. He wasn’t sure but he thought they were. They picked him up by agreement several times thereafter. He began talking about it and he had a visit from government agents who told him to shut up. He insisted. He was picked up and put into treatment in a mental hospital for about four months. When he came out he was a changed man. He died sometime later. Up until he went into the mental hospital, he was insistent on his story. This was approximately 1956. I’m not sure. He was a prominent businessman. It was a sensational story at the time.

It’s interesting that you should mention copper based blood before. Aren’t the Nordics involved with that?

Yes. Although Nordics are humanoid and externally almost identical to humans. There are subtle differences in the Nordic alien physiology, and most of them are based on the living conditions that they have grown up in. Their planets are extremely hot and dry, and have a low oxygen content in the atmosphere. They have a larger lung capacity than humans and have a copper based blood in order to carry oxygen more efficiently. The eyes are protected by inner lids and can allow them to see into the ultraviolet range of the spectrum. They have only 28 teeth, as they lack a back pair of molars. Their heads are longer than humans. The brain case is about .2 mm thicker and the bone is harder. The brain is the same as the human brain as far as structure and size is concerned, except for the midbrain area, where there are functions that allow telepathic and telekinetic skills. It explains the psionic powers of the Nordics. They average about 2 meters in height. Females about 1.7 meters. They have no sweat glands. The skin allows moisture to be drawn from the air as well as moisture to penetrate. The heart beats at around 242 beats per minute, and the average blood pressure is 80 systolic and 40 diastolic. They have extremely dilated blood vessels. The heart is located where the human liver would be. The cartilage that would protect a human heart extends down 3.5cm further in the Nordic in order to protect this structure. Blood cells are biconvex in contrast to the concave cells of humans. Kidney type functions only allow about half the liquid consumed to be excreted. The rest is evidently put back into the system. Urine is thick with minerals and appears in color and texture to freshly pumped crude oil. Feces are dry pellets with all moisture removed. The adult Nordic can regulate the amount of adrenalyn in their body. They have no pineal gland. Nordic females are capable of being impregnated at any time, but the males are capable of impregnation about once a year. The period of incubation is three to five months.

What about the Sirians?

Well, we are finding out that they are seemingly involved in the Dark Side activities with abductees along with the Greys and elements of the US military and intelligence forces. we are finding out that Reich programming is currently being used as of December 1990 on abductees. This is a direct outgrowth of work at Montauk. The Sirians are usually described as about 6 &frac12; feet tall, blond hair cut very short, and blue eyes that have a cat’s eye vertical pupil. They’re negatively oriented. I have been working on a case where this 21 year old woman has had contact with them, the last time being in December 1990. The beings present were the short little helpers that the Greys use; the ones that wear hooded cloaks. There were Grey clones, tall Greys, Sirians and US military personnel of some description. The woman had her breasts and other body parts hooked up to some machine that maintained her in a pre-orgastic state while they used inculcation bars with red and blue lights to aid in the programming. When she does something they don’t like, they take her out of her body and stick her in this black box, where there is terrible loneliness and isolation. She really broke down when she was describing that, saying that she didn’t want them to put her back in the box. They evidently told her that if she talked too much they were going to do that. On the lighter side, she has also had contact with positive groups. There has been some discussion as to whether these negative Sirians are part of the Kamagol II group that built the records chamber under Gizeh, but that has not been established. The negative Sirians are considered part of the Orion group that is playing the domination/control game.

Is there some significance to the red and blue lights in the inculcation bar?

The lights on the bar are of special frequencies. Pulsing of these lights is often combined with sonic patterns to virtually reprogram the mind of the individual. This kind of activity has been going on for tens of thousands of years. Why do you think that the Orion based groups that control todays society use red and blue on police car lights? Its very restimulative and many people have buried memories of programming sessions that have occurred through their various lives. The result is fear and negative emotional response. It appears that during the last 40 years there have been a lot of people that have been incarnating that were on one side or the other in Nazi Germany, and we are finding a lot of abductees that have memories of the Greys during that period. Sometimes they find that they are dealing with the same exact beings they dealt with in another lifetime. Of course, we know that abductions also follow multi-generational patterns. It all ties together.

There have been some that have said that Hitler was connected into things in terms of the Aryan race and ET’s. What is the story behind that?

Well, Hitler spend a lot of time in libraries before his mother died, and he was convinced that the white race was going to be squeezed out of existence in anoth&r 75 years. He decided that he was going to be the defender of the Aryan race. This was back before World War One. He was also relating this to the Protocols of the Learned Elders of Zion, where in the 24th protocol it says that the white race will be destroyed by genetic inter-marriage. He wanted to stop the trend. He became interested in metaphysics. The Dark Side involvement began after a bout with peyote before World War One and his involvement with the Thule Society, which was connected to Aleister Crowley and the Order of the Golden Dawn in England. Hitler also adopted the idea of fighting the communists, because the communists were just about ready to take over Germany. There were not Greys around in large numbers but they were there. The Germans were involved with alien technology. They had one version with electromagnetic drive. They had jet aircraft in 1943. They had nuclear weapons but Hitler did not use them. Mind control research was ongoing.

Getting back to present day, what do you think about the idea that the Saudi government is being bankrupted by the US?

Well, the Rockefeller group sold the Saudis 30 year notes back in the 1960’s. They are coming due. The Saudis want to get out of the paperwork nightmare so they won’t lose all their money. The Rockefeller banks were going to declare bankruptcy, so the Saudis said they would pull all their investments out of the United States and collapse the economy totally. The United States backed down and that is the reason why there is all that forgiveness of debt business going on. It was done with Bushes authority. The Saudis were satisfied. Now the problem with Iraq arises. The Israelis have refused to carry out the deals they have made about leaving the west bank area. Hussein is saying that if the United States can convince Israel to do that for the Palestinians, then he will walk out of Kuwait. That will defuse the entire Middle East situation. January 15th is the apparent deadline date. There are people in government that are crazier than Hussein. As of early December 1990, a contract already exists with Flora Construction company to rebuild Kuwait, so its going to happen anyway.

Does Iraq have nuclear devices?

I’m not sure. They were stealing trigger devices for quite a while before the government found out about it and started substituting non-functional ones. It’s believed that they do. The Iraqis are also said to have devices that had their origin in Nazi Germany, such as the air-fuel bomb, which will “turn the air to fire” and suffocate American troops. There is a concern that he will also use chemical weapons. The United States used chemical weapons in Korea and Vietnam. If Iraq uses them, the United States will respond with devastating force. It would be a good time for the secret government to bring out their disks and impersonate alien species in an attempt to pacify the planet. When the United States wins the conflict, it will produce potential problems for years.

It is seen as the only option. They could impose this in a pseudo-religious way in an attempt to unify religious groups that are on “holy war” campaigns. Either way, presence of .. an apparently benevolent technology” would cause a peaceful unification. Presence of “an apparent malevolent technology” would achieve the same thing, but with a negative unification based on fear. There are again another aspects to the middle east scenarios. One aspect is that the middle east represents an annoying delay to the secret government that has been caused by Iraq. This delay could affect certain types of agenda. Another aspect is that since the US basically controls the planet, all this is a sham for the public – to keep humans up tight, in fear, and at each others’ throats it could be reflective of what is ultimately an Orion based agenda. It is a matter of record that flying disks have been seen in all wars and conflicts.

How about the Congress? Are they aware of the alien and drug things that are going on?

Some of them are, but they are turning their heads because they want to collect their retirement. They’re just hoping the government will be solvent when they get to that point. There is no question that as we enter 1991, many agendas will accelerate and many hands will be forced.

Are the men in black residents of Earth?

The group is an off-world one. They monitor conditions on the planet. They are not physical beings, but they can become solid.

Do the black helicopters have anything to do with the MIB?

No. They are managed by the Army. It is a super secret group that have bases all over the United States. They have one near Sedona. They have one in Connecticutt and in Newark, New Jersey. The helicopters have no markings and are used for operations involving drug smuggling, mutilations and security for alien related operations and projects. Obviously, it’s all illegal as hell, and they have been getting away with it for 40 years.

What about the subliminal programming that happens with television?

The FCC “ruled” years ago that it was illegal, but it never stopped. You find it more common on cable tv. There are using subliminal conditioning on all cable networks. They use it to emphasize different elements of what you are seeing around you. People end up being brainwashed and stay ignorant.

What are some of the capabilities they have?

The government has vans that drive around that are capable of complete mind disruption. They have used it before to kill a man in his house in fifteen minutes. All it takes is four helicopters flying in tandem to completely mentally wreck a city if they have those pods on them. The pods are an outgrowth of the Phoenix project. They, can produce heavy mood control over a city. They are going into areas beyond the electromagnetic. They are trying to increase the,stress level in the population. It is no secret that Bechtel was laying cables under major metropolitan areas several years-ago,claiming that it was being laid for others” whom they wouldn’t reveal. It had nothing to do with electric, telephone or cable TV.

What is another possibility as to why the death of the father of the One World government failed to produce the dematerialization of the future leader of the One World government?

This seeming paradox can be better explained this way: The people who went back and tried to kill the father were successful but the son still lived. This is all related to the Grandfather Paradox. The truth of the matter is that they prevented the birth of the leader of the One World government not in the time stream where the existing person was born but in a parallel one where he never existed in the first place. It existed before and after the effort to kill the father; the parallel time stream also exists where the Germans overtly won the second world war. There are differing but parallel interrelated worlds and universes, each having an endless number of streams relating to individual entities. These streams are ultimately expressed as different patterns and outcomes for the same entity depending on the level of expression for the entity at any one time. All divergent entities are part of the one reality which is the all embracing unity. The varied potential tracks all exist as one unified central force. The parallel tracks that exist in our universe, depending upon which one of them is taken, will determine the ultimate outcome for the individual entity, and this can change.

What is the actual nature and purpose of the Orion group?

Basically, the purpose of the Orion group is enslavement and conquest. Their objective is to locate certain individuals who vibrate in resonance with their own vibrational complex and manipulate them. There is a concept called spiritual entropy which apparently causes them to experience constant disintegration of their social memory complexes. They do follow the Law of One but observe free will according to service to self. Those on the enslaved planet then disseminate the attitudes and philosophy which is service to self. These individuals become the “elite”. Through the elite, the attempt begins to create a condition whereby the remainder of the planetary entities are enslaved by their free will.

That seems like what is happening on the planet right now, especially in the United States.

Yes.

Why don’t they just come down in force instead of using the back door, as it were?

Well, they could. A mass landing would create a loss of polarization due to the infringement on the free will of the planet. If the planet were then conquered and became part of the Empire, the free will would then be reestablished. The way they are doing it is characteristic of the Orion group – to have others do their dirty work for them, including humans. That way, the abridgement of free will is not so obvious. It didn’t help the situation when agreements were made with different alien species. It didn’t matter that the agreements were made with groupings of humans that did not represent the wishes of the mass consciousness. The technical fact of the agreement allowed a lot of action that was negatively polarized. The Orion group specifically targets civilizations before they become a social memory complex.

What does it mean to have a society with a social memory?

Well, a social complex consisting of individual entities becomes a social memory complex when it adopts one orientation or seeking in a specific direction. When this happens, the group memory that was not available to individuals becomes known. The advantage of a social memory complex is the relative lack of distortion.

What does polarization mean for an individual entity?

Generally, entities can have little or no polarization, positive polarization or negative polarization. A positively polarized entity will select a path embodying service to others. An entity choosing negative polarization would focus on service to self. A negative polarization involves the elements of control and repression. For example, a negatively polarized entity would seek separation from and control over others by sexual means and have the idea of power as an end. The negatively oriented entity will program for maximum separation from and control over all entities which it perceives as being other than itself.

Are not all humans, for example, expressions of each other?

Well, yes. Entities will eventually realize that their actions on other selves are actually being done to themselves, since the consciousness present in each entity is a variation on the same thing. The individuation is present to allow maximum differentiation of potentiality and creation.

Many people have been discussing the idea that we are going into fourth density. What does that mean?

Basically another general vibratory rate. It also relates to the realization that one is not separate from the creator. It is that kind of spectrum which has been called by the Christians as the “second coming”. The second coming is a state of being, not an individual arriving and establishing a power hierarchy.

When will this be completed?

Well, entities on this planet should make the attempt to polarize in terms of what excites them no later than 1993, or it will be harder to do so. Polarization can be positive or negative. Generally, the fourth density is much more full of life. Entities must still care for their physical vehicles. It is also a density where compassion, understanding and love are more predominant. Full conversion to fourth density will occur between 2003 and 2013.

Its interesting that according to the mathematics behind the I Ching, everything goes jackpot around 2012.

Yes. Nothing will be the same on Earth. It is changing right now. What we are seeing is basically the death of the third density way of life.

Does density level refer to polarization?

An entity can be negatively polarized and in fourth density, but it is an intense struggle because of the development of telepathic functions. If there is a place in which fourth density negative entities have established a power structure, then there is more use of the concept of mind control in order to keep the negative structure from conversion to positive orientation.

What about the upcoming geological changes? How does that relate to all of this?

The fourth density is a vibrational spectrum. The time/space continuum has put Earth and that star system into that type of vibration. This causes electromagnetic realignments within the body of the planet. The energies and collective thoughtforms of the population also disturb the energy patterns of the planet. Geological changes accompany transition between densities. At this point we are in the last 20 years at the end of a cycle which has lasted 75,000 years.

Anything more about fourth density?

The majority of the Orion group are of fourth density. Some are positively oriented toward service to others, but most that are concerned with the current situation are negatively polarized and playing the domination game. Entities on Earth following any religion or no religion at all will move into fourth density if they are that vibration. Entities not at fourth density vibration will remain at third density vibration and will move to other locations to continue third density life until their vibrational level increases and polarizes in time with a cycle of density movement. The polarization can be positive or negative.

How does the idea of a higher self relate to densities?

In terms of an entity perceiving through as linear time structure, the higher self exists in sixth density and functions in the entites “future”. One interesting aspect of it is that the entity who is perceiving the higher self manifestation is actually a thoughtform materialized by the “higher self” itself. Entities in these terms are actually a complex composed of what they perceive to be mind”, “body”, and “spirit”. These complexes can occur within single entities or groups, depending on the specific space/time conditions. The higher self is that self which exists with full understanding of the accumulation of experiences of that entity. At one point, the entity perceives a lower self and a higher self. They are not actually there “simultaneously”; functions of the higher self interact from a position in development which equates to the linear “future” of the entity, as perceived by an entity in this state. Obviously, cultural conditioning encourages development of impotent states of mind where the “lower self” is in control and the “higher self” is reached very little or totally ignored. There is no synthesis that will permit the energy of the intelligent matrix to flow correctly.

How are the cultural states of mind organized? How do they fill the needs of the Orion group and the Brotherhood?

Well, start with the prime factor of body identification. The society promotes the concept of “you are your body”, which results in fear, especially fear of “death”, which is tied in with the idea of physical pain. Combine this with religious doctrine and various cultural ideologies, and you have a very fertile ground for manipulation. There is also promotion of identification with the personality and ego. The ego is culturally conditioned to a reactionary state which is encouraged by media and literature to focus on the elements of security, sensation and power. Under these circumstances, individuals are basically disempowered and blind. In terms of cultural activity, individuals are put in a position where they spend most of their time dealing with “self preservation”, “self-gratification”, and “self-definition”. These functions are basically left hemisphere related. The ego structure often becomes fragmented into “partial selves”, making the problem even worse. What is missing is the love of truth, life, and the creator that we are all a part of. The idea is to transform “self-preservation” into right action, .. self-gratification” into right feeling, and “self-definition” into right thought. This is not probable in the Orion based culture in which we reside if the missing elements are not introduced. What will help to introduce it is the quickening of the vibrational resonance as we move into the fourth density, and what we are seeing around us is the desperation of the negative forces as they grapple for position and control. The alien agendas are beyond secret government manipulation, and at this time they are very worried. That is why the mind control technology has been developed and implemented – to make sure that they can try and preserve control over the population.

Thanks to the publication “The Sovereign Scribe”, we are following this section with some interviews with Al Bielek and Preston Nichols; the material relates very well to the data that you have just read. It features some interesting data about the alleged United States ventures on Mars and more data about the Delta-T antennas. Enjoy!

Source

The Nag Hammadi Library (Archon info)

If you are interested in Archons and their deception you should definitely check this site out:

The Nag Hammadi Library, a collection of thirteen ancient codices containing over fifty texts, was discovered in upper Egypt in 1945.

This immensely important discovery includes a large number of primary Gnostic scriptures – texts once thought to have been entirely destroyed during the early Christian struggle to define “orthodoxy” — scriptures such as the Gospel of Thomas, the Gospel of Philip, and the Gospel of Truth.

The discovery and translation of the Nag Hammadi library, completed in the 1970’s, has provided impetus to a major re-evaluation of early Christian history and the nature of Gnosticism.

Several of the major texts in the Nag Hammadi collection have more than one English translation; where more than one translation is available, we have listed the translators’ names in parenthesis below the name of the text.

Texts marked with the {*} had more than one version extant within the Nag Hammadi codices; often these several versions were used conjointly by the translators to provide the single translation presented here.

An Overview of the Nag Hammadi Texts

When analyzed according to subject matter, there are six separate major categories of writings collected in the Nag Hammadi codices:

  • Writings of creative and redemptive mythology, including Gnostic alternative versions of creation and salvation:
    • The Apocryphon of John
    • The Hypostasis of the Archons
    • On the Origin of the World
    • The Apocalypse of Adam
    • The Paraphrase of Shem

     

  • Observations and commentaries on diverse Gnostic themes, such as the nature of reality, the nature of the soul, the relationship of the soul to the world:
    • The Gospel of Truth
    • The Treatise on the Resurrection
    • The Tripartite Tractate
    • Eugnostos the Blessed
    • The Second Treatise of the Great Seth
    • The Teachings of Silvanus
    • The Testimony of Truth
  • Liturgical and initiatory texts:
    • The Discourse on the Eighth and Ninth
    • The Prayer of Thanksgiving
    • A Valentinian Exposition
    • The Three Steles of Seth
    • The Prayer of the Apostle Paul
    • (The Gospel of Philip, listed under the sixth category below, has great relevance here also, for it is in effect a treatise on Gnostic sacramental theology)
  • Writings dealing primarily with the feminine deific and spiritual principle, particularly with the Divine Sophia:
    • The Thunder
    • Perfect Mind
    • The Thought of Norea
    • The Sophia of Jesus Christ
    • The Exegesis on the Soul
  • Writings pertaining to the lives and experiences of some of the apostles:
    • The Apocalypse of Peter
    • The Letter of Peter to Philip
    • The Acts of Peter and the Twelve Apostles
    • The (First) Apocalypse of James
    • The (Second) Apocalypse of James
    • The Apocalypse of Paul
  • Scriptures which contain sayings of Jesus as well as descriptions of incidents in His life:
    • The Dialogue of the Saviour
    • The Book of Thomas the Contender
    • The Apocryphon of James
    • The Gospel of Philip
    • The Gospel of Thomas

 

This leaves a small number of scriptures of the Nag Hammadi Library which may be called “unclassifiable.”

It also must be kept in mind that the passage of time and translation into languages very different from the original have rendered many of these scriptures abstruse in style. Some of them are difficult reading, especially for those readers not familiar with Gnostic imagery, nomenclature and the like. Lacunae are also present in most of these scriptures — in a few of the texts extensive sections have been lost due to age and deterioration of the manuscripts.

The most readily comprehensible of the Nag Hammadi scriptures is undoubtedly The Gospel of Thomas, with The Gospel of Philip and the The Gospel of Truth as close seconds in order of easy comprehension. (These texts were all also thankfully very well preserved and have few lacunae.)

There are various translations of most of these scriptures available; the most complete being the one volume collection The Nag Hammadi Library in English, edited by James Robinson, from which the translations presented here are principally quoted.

Read “The Dead Sea Scrolls“.

Alphabetical Index

 

Codex Index

Codex I (The Jung Codex)

  1. The Prayer of the Apostle Paul
  2. The Apocryphon of James:
  3. The Gospel of Truth:*
  4. The Treatise on the Resurrection
  5. The Tripartite Tractate

Codex II

  1. The Apocryphon of John* (long version)
  2. The Gospel of Thomas:
  3. The Gospel of Philip
  4. The Hypostasis of the Archons
  5. On the Origin of the World*
  6. The Exegesis on the Soul
  7. The Book of Thomas the Contender

Codex III

  1. The Apocryphon of John* (short version, used in long version translation above)
  2. The Gospel of the Egyptians*
  3. Eugnostos the Blessed*
  4. The Sophia of Jesus Christ
  5. The Dialogue of the Savior

Codex IV

  1. The Apocryphon of John* (long version)
  2. The Gospel of the Egyptians*

Codex V

  1. Eugnostos the Blessed*
  2. The Apocalypse of Paul
  3. The (First) Apocalypse of James
  4. The (Second) Apocalypse of James
  5. The Apocalypse of Adam

Codex VI

  1. The Acts of Peter and the Twelve Apostles
  2. The Thunder, Perfect Mind
  3. Authoritative Teaching
  4. The Concept of Our Great Power
  5. Plato, Republic 588A-589B
  6. The Discourse on the Eighth and Ninth
  7. The Prayer of Thanksgiving
  8. Asclepius 21-29

 

Codex VII

  1. The Paraphrase of Shem (fragmentary, translation not provided here)
  2. The Second Treatise of the Great Seth
  3. The Apocalypse of Peter
  4. The Teachings of Silvanus
  5. The Three Steles of Seth

Codex VIII

  1. Zostrianos
  2. The Letter of Peter to Philip

Codex IX

  1. Melchizedek
  2. The Thought of Norea
  3. The Testimony of Truth

Codex X

  1. Marsanes

Codex XI

  1. The Interpretation of Knowledge
  2. A Valentinian Exposition
    2a. On the Anointing
    2b. On the Baptism A
    2c. On the Baptism B
    2d. On the Eucharist A
    2e. On the Eucharist B
  3. Allogenes
  4. Hypsiphrone

Codex XII

  1. The Sentences of Sextus
  2. The Gospel of Truth:*
  1. Fragments (translation not provided here)

Codex XIII

  1. Trimorphic Protennoia
  2. On the Origin of the World*

 

Additional Information

Related Reports

Source

Pop Goes the Womb

Here Nigel Kerner talks how music affects to fetus when it is in mother’s womb:

 

Image of embryo

Pop Goes the Womb

18th April 2011

Many people the world over question and wonder why the sounds of the beautiful ballads of yesteryear are slowly disappearing from radio play sheets all over the world. They have been replaced by a tsunami of meaningless cacophonies running to a cannonade of industrial rhythms and utterly meaningless dross for lyrics.A huge audience of over sixties all over the world have little to listen to that might still speak of sentiment, innocence and the expression of feeling in melody that once brought, if not a tear to one’s eye, a recognisance of human feelings outside the binary machine mindedness that now seems to run so much of our world.The ballad, the folk song, the cultural narrative, that explored human feelings is no more celebrated in the world of western music and the great personalities of voice and style have all but died out. The great ballads that signified standards of melody and lyric are all but gone from the ear. These songs are sung for records no more.

It all came to an end with the advent of music that emulated the dissonance of road traffic and the factory floor. Music with more and more dissolute discordant percussive threads and less coherence connecting melody with lyric, became the order of the day. The apotheosis of calmer more reflective norms followed in a rush and became the order of the popular musical way of things. The body and not the mind became the transcendent resolve of broadcast offerings. What they call the ‘beat box’ in the industry had arrived.

But why did this happen. Is it simply progress. What brought about this tirade and the subsequent loss of sanity, form and shape in natural popular music norms so quickly. The experts say that that the greatest thrust of it, all took just a single decade to happen. That decade was between the middle nineteen fifties and nineteen sixties.

I believe it happened so fast and with such seeming fury because the English speakers, the world’s richest most influential ethno/cultural group that identified the Occidental personality most, the Celtic-Anglo-Saxon cartel, was changing quantumly and hardening up in the 1940’s, 50’s and 60’s to merge with the powerful dictates of a rapidly emerging industrial social format, especially in the USA. The entire psychological base of the Euro-Caucasoids was firming up and being de-sensitised in terms of human empathetic resolves. This happened with a storm force of artificially produced mental imperatives that required less orientation towards ‘people minded-ness’ and more orientation towards ‘systemic machine minded-ness’.

The greatest influence in modern music, the music of African Americans, has always been true and gloriously natural fare. The human spirit in torture, shame and contrived out of its natural context in Africa, was turned into Spirituals, Soul, Blues and later Jazz, as the negro social lament turned the wretchedness the white Euro Caucasian had visited on them into the triumphant under-base of most of North America’s best and most meaningful music to this day. It was of course a natural palliative that arose from an inner protest at the degradation visited on the human spirit in enslavement. All this was to become one of the greatest cultural treasures of an entire species. It was all based on the natural beat of body rhythms and no synthetic tempo, or timbre, entered the paradigm. Not so with the Euro Caucasoids. They were to go synthetic. Their modern musical inspirational centre, mostly euro-folk and country music narratives, was to become something artificial and insidious. Rock, Punk, Metal, Heavy Metal, Grunge, and more recently Hip hop, Techno etc. The synthesised machine beat had truly arrived.

Of course it all may be seen as progress. As the development of new ways of perceiving and developing the audio art forms. The real question is – was it natural change or something more contrived, more artificial and pernicious at root.

Is there a single propulsion root to it all, or is it just a natural change of tastes commensurate with changing social trends. Could there be a physiological organic root to it and if so what could that root be. Recent research may point to a clue. The answer may well lie in the womb itself. It all could begin in the central atrium that admits all life, literally and physically.

A look at the female womb with a new life in it will clearly show that the baby is set cosseted in a warm tightness of soft tissue and water. We were all taught at school that sound travels better in water than in air. In fact it travels about fifteen times faster in a solid medium and about five times faster in a liquid medium, than in air, dependent on temperature. Current research into the inter-uterine influence and post-natal influences of sound on living things provides very interesting reading. Some great research was done by Giselle Whitwell on this theme, I quote:

I observed that lullabies were relegated to the past: young mothers no longer knew this folk song tradition. Michel Odent, M.D., believes that women have a profound need to sing to their babies but that the medicalization of birth has upset this process. In the past, women all over the world have sung lullabies to their babies. These were very important because as we now know the fetus is having first language lessons in the womb. The inflections of the mother tongue are conveyed not only through speech but most importantly through song. The singing voice has a richer frequency range than speech. In fact, studies in other disciplines such as linguistics and musicology (e.g., David Whitwell, 1993) point out that there was a time when speech was song and therefore singing is the older of the two.

Few young Occidental mothers know how to sing a lullaby now. I don’t know if they will recognise one if it is played to them. That is assuming that they will actually listen to it anyway. Giselle Whitwell goes on to discuss the subject at length in her fascinating paper: The importance of Prenatal Sound and Music.:

“Babies born of deaf mothers miss these important first lessons in language development. French pioneer Dr. Alfred Tomatis mentions being intrigued by the fact that song birds hatched by silent foster mothers can’t sing. What the baby learns in utero are the intonational patterns of sound and the frequencies of a language in his/her particular culture. Frequency is the level of pitch measured in Hertz (Hz.) This range varies between 16 to 20,000 Hz. There is very little distortion of the mother’s voice as heard by the fetus whereas other external voices sound more muffled, especially in the higher frequencies. According to Rubel (1984), the fetus is responsive first to lower frequencies and then to higher ones. Verny and others have noted that babies have a preference for stories, rhymes, and poems first heard in the womb. When the mother reads out loud, the sound is received by her baby in part via bone conduction. Dr. Henry Truby, Emeritus Professor of Pediatrics and Linguistics at the University of Miami, points out that after the sixth month, the fetus moves in rhythm to the mother’s speech and that spectrographs of the first cry of an abortus at 28 weeks could be matched with his mother’s. The elements of music, namely tonal pitch, timbre, intensity and rhythm, are also elements used in speaking a language. For this reason, music prepares the ear, body and brain to listen to, integrate and produce language sounds. Music can thus be considered a pre-linguistic language which is nourishing and stimulating to the whole human being, affecting body, emotions, intellect, and developing an internal sense of beauty, sustaining and awakening the qualities in us that are wordless and otherwise inexpressible.

The research of Polverini-Rey (1992) seems to indicate that prenates exposed to lullabies in utero were calmed by the stimulus. The famous British violinist Yehudi Menuhin believes that his own musical talent was partly due to the fact that his parents were always singing and playing music before he was born.

The sound environment of the womb is very rich. There are various interpretations as to the noise level, ranging between 30 to 96 dB. (decibel being a measure of sound intensity or loudness). A whisper can register 30 dB., a normal conversation is about 60 dB. and rush hour traffic can average about 70 dB. On the other hand, shouted conversations and motorcycles reach about 100 dB. Rock music has been measured as 115 dB. and the pain threshold begins at 125 dB. Recent research with hydrophones have revealed that the womb is something comparable to what we experience in our environment between 50 and 60 dB. Uterine sounds form a “sound carpet” over which the mother’s voice in particular appears very distinct and to which the prenate gives special attention, because it is so different from its own amniotic environment. These sounds are of major importance because they establish the first patterns of communication and bonding. Some researchers have discovered that newborns become calmer and more self-regulated when exposed to intrauterine sound. The soothing sounds of the ocean and water are probably reminiscent of the fluid environment in which we began life. Tomatis suggests that the maternal heart beat, respiration and intestinal gurgling all form the source for our collective attraction to the sound of surf and may have to do with our inborn sense of rhythm. Prenatal sounds form an important developmental component in prenatal life, because they provide a foundation for later learning and behaviour. With foetal sound stimulation the brain functions at a higher level of organisation.

The ear first appears in the 3rd week of gestation and it becomes functional by the 16th week. The foetus begins active listening by the 24th week. We know from ultrasound observations that the foetus hears and responds to a sound pulse starting at about 16 weeks of age and this is even before the ear construction is complete. The cochlear structures of the ear appear to function by the 20th week and mature synapses have been found between the 24th and 28th weeks. For this reason most formal programs of prenatal stimulation are usually designed to begin during the third trimester. It is clear that the sense of hearing is probably the most developed of all the senses before birth.

Four-month-old foetuses can respond in very specific ways to sound; if exposed to loud music their heart beat will accelerate. A Japanese study of pregnant women living near the Osaka airport had smaller babies and an inflated incidence of prematurity – arguably related to the environment of incessant loud noise. Chronic noise can also be associated with birth defects. There is a report from a mother who was in her 7th month of pregnancy when she visited the zoo. In the lion’s enclosure, the animals were in the process of being fed. The roar of one lion would set off another lion and the sound was so intense she had to leave the scene, as the foetus reacted with a strong kick and left her feeling ill. Many years later, when the child was 7 years of age, it was found that he had a hearing deficiency in the lower-middle range. This child also reacts with fear when viewing TV programs of lions and related animals. There are numerous reports about mothers having to leave war movies and concerts because the auditory stimulus caused the foetus to become hyperactive.

Alfred Tomatis notes that the ear is “the Rome of the body” because almost all cranial nerves lead to it and therefore it is considered our most primary sense organ. Embryonically, according to him, the skin is differentiated ear, and we listen with our whole body.

In order to better understand the role of music in its elements of rhythm and melody, we must briefly clarify the two parts of the inner ear. These are the vestibular system and the cochlea. The vestibular system controls balance and body movements, including the integration of movements which make up the rhythm of music-making the vestibular system the more archaic. And according to Paul Madaule (1984) “it is in fact because of the vestibular system that music seems to have an impact on the body.” At around 4 ½ to 6 weeks gestational age the vestibular and the cochlear systems become differentiated, at 7 ½ the auditory ossicles start to grow, and at 4 ½ months the ear of the fetus is already adult-like in shape and size.

The cochlear system enables the transformation of acoustic vibrations into nervous influx, thus allowing the perception of melodies which carry higher frequencies. Knowing this, one can have a better understanding of the intimate relationship and unity of rhythm and melody. George Gershwin expressed this nicely: “Music sets up a certain vibration which unquestionably results in a physical reaction.” With this in mind, we should choose for early music stimulation melodies and rhythms that are simple.

Tomatis has a unique view of the function of the human ear going beyond what is traditionally assumed. He regards it as neither an instrument solely for hearing and listening, nor an organ for the maintenance of equilibrium and verticality. For him the ear is primarily a generator of energy for the brain, intended to give a cortical charge which is then distributed throughout the body “with the view to toning up the whole system and imparting greater dynamism to the human being” (Gilmor & Madaule, 1984, p. 6). Hence the importance of right sound stimulation which will lead to vocal expression, listening, and thinking. Sound, music and human development are intricately interwoven.”1

The late thirties was an age of burgeoning industrialisation as never previously experienced by humanity. All this provided a powerful schematic, both socially and environmentally, that could and indeed would condition minds to ways and means not scheduled for the human personality in the natural way of things up till then. The vast majority of people farmed and fished for a living and lived quiet lives in rural ways, where human resources were a premium. Life was hard, but the difficulties had to be shared for the sake of survival and this forged strong emotional bonds between people and the family sense was constantly marshalled for cracks and very soon resolved and repaired. This began with the womb. With the mother’s lullaby. In other words with song and melody.

Industrialisation and urbanisation changed all that. People moved from the rural straights to cities and urban environments in their thousands. The run had begun. The run that is taking us from the warmth of the human heart and giving us instead the cold, mindless, meaningless dross of hard wired systems. Human kind seems to have started its walk to become no more than an organic biological machine, serving the robotic behests of perhaps some extra terrestrial synthetic alien beings, for all that it mattered.

You can see from the above how profoundly babies might be influenced in the sound modulating womb environment. Can you imagine the influence of heavy metal, or punk rock (or whatever tirades so called modern music culture might have in store) will have on an infant in the womb. What a fiendish preparation for a new life. That will be someone’s son or daughter, brother or sister-to-be, when born.

As more and more mothers-to-be were employed in the impersonal factory lines, manufacturing modules and lived in uncongenial home environments, newborns might well have had their minds pre-conditioned more concussively and percussively here. In Europe they would do this with the sonic background of a World War. The day to day living process in this cacophony would affect the child in the womb and familiarise it with the sharp discordant tones of road traffic and industrial machines, even ballistic explosions, within the cosseted pre-natal environment, where sound is amplified through the amniotic fluid. Later in the post birth, neonatal period and early childhood, when the brain cells are growing fastest and enlivened neuronal networks are being set down, they could be further re-conditioned by the sounds of war, road traffic and the modern hard and heavy rhythmic beats of road hammers, drills and other machines. The background sound quantum of contemporary life, thrown at us from every direction, could well have reflected in later life on the tastes that decided musical enjoyment.

Those pregnant during these years were to produce progeny that would be in their teens and twenties in the late 1950’s and early 1960’s just when the complexion of modern pop music has shown the beginning of the drastic change from its previous quieter more reflective studied format, to the much more enforced and belligerent instrumental sounds of rock and pop. And so perhaps the rising quantum of force in societal living paradigms in the 30’s and 40’s translated itself in and through the womb into a mental hook that reflected it in an extra-uterine empathy with this more impersonal force. Music and words in song could never again reflect a quieter more thoughtful premise in life and living. No more the poem and the lyrical word in melody. A breed that blushes at symmetries in pitch and tone will also recoil at sentiment and erudite meaning in words. Hearts of stone, writing dead letter futures. Meaningless droll dumbed down lyrics would become the order of the day when the instrument supplanted the voice and thus the lyric. Musical composition would become the bit-stream expressed by fingers on computer keyboards and the heartbeat in the human chest would become the clock in computers. The machine mind had arrived. Human kind in the northern climes of our planet began to move as the machine. It would get worse with time for many, as the industrialisation of social formats continued. The earlier sound formats that reflected the music of far yester-years would have no inner metaphor concomitant with the sounds heard during the inter-uterine period, when impressions are exceptionally strongly retained and formatted, as circuits set down as neuronal tracks. The most powerful conditioning psycho/biologically happens in the womb. It may thus well be that we are all set in the gel that dictates our tastes in music by the time we are seven years old.

A pointer to the power of this effect is the fact that the musical instrument took over from the voice. Modern Jazz forms as distinct from the more humanly empathetic traditional form at its inception and orchestral music with explosive beats overwhelmed the entertainment industry. Words in music thus took a beating. Lyrics have to be listened to and picked out. The young were the first to lose out. They were far less likely to extrapolate meaning in a musical work with lyrics. The interest value shown about anything in and by the young mind can be measured in nano seconds. Words have little depth of meaning at an early stage in childhood when a vocabulary is being learned. It takes time for the human personality to grow and mature into the deeper meanings espoused by this vocabulary. Time that provides not just the blacks and whites of things, but also myriads of shades of grey. The subtleties that make up the whole answer and story to any question.

Modern life allows less for subtleties. For individualised well studied depth and clear thinking on matters that effect the human soul. There is often simply no time for this, with the pace of life many of us are required to lead. Modern life is geared more for so called scientific certainties and system driven imperatives. This is more so for the young, as their age related inherent lack of experience gives them a distinct handicap over and above all this disadvantage, in resolving values. They of course usually fail to recognise this loss of perspective. Something pop industry moguls count on where music is concerned. Throw the little punter, be they little in mind or body, the most ill-contrived sound excrement. Dress it up as the latest thing, the more bizarre the better, and sell it with as much media hype as possible. The ‘fledgling follies’ will lap it up and swallow any detritus and come back for dessert. You then sell them more of the same garbage, this time with a bit of cream on the top.

The Artists & Repertoire Managers of Record Companies had to have a way that quick exchanges in artists could be made to keep the ball rolling. Quality is rare and much more expensive. It also thinks for itself tends to be intelligent and is likely to have difficult and greedy agents. Easy availability and thus quantity mattered and not quality, and every sound and any sound that was different from the previous ones could be made the ‘in sound’. In this way there would be a constant stream of new faces recognisant with new sounds. They did not even need to play the musical instruments. New technology could make a goose sound good and everything could be done by proxy with the public never being aware that it was all humbug. All façade. A front. The group ‘The Monkeys’ exemplified this in the 1960’s. There were of course a few quality artists that were the genuine article. A thin skeleton that gave the whole façade some credibility.

As I have said, the new paying punter had to come predominantly from the young, the immature, mostly musically naive. The younger the better. You could sell them anything. Of course everyone is entitled to have their own taste in music without patronization and some jumped up so and so dictating tastes. But the vast majority came from non musical backgrounds and simply did not have the musical sense or erudition to question anything. The evident trash that came out as ‘pop’ could not then be questioned and dismissed as rubbish. Again one man’s trash is another’s Mozart. The punter did not know enough about music to make the judgment. It might fit somewhere in some social augury in the mind’s eye of the individual. A caucus that would not question the musical quantums laid out for them. “You could make them like anything provided you hyped it up enough”, Brian Epstein the Manager of ‘The Beatles’ is once said to have said. This all meant that the crucial weapon to achieve this would be the disc jockeys and more pertinently the schedule arrangers of the main radio networks. They chose what was to be played. In effect they dictated public taste. The commercial music lobby concentrated their guns on them, a relative few people and locked them into their own creations of public musical taste. This was further locked into particular kinds of social stratifications and the pop Guru was invented to account for it all and give it a blessing or hype it up as a respectable art form.

The whole thing was a sham from start to finish, with the shareholders of record companies the final pseudo arbitrators of taste. In fact, in ultimate irony, almost all large record Companies are owned by Conglomerates that have nothing to do with music.

Of course as I have said, taste is a very personal thing and everyone has a right to exercise it in their own way, without being held to judgment as to its veracity and aesthetic, or other, quality. But no-one’s taste should be manipulated such that it conforms to commercial interest. Commercial interests that have no sense of responsibility for keeping up standards in art or art forms. No one should be manipulated by teams of clever behavioural psychologists, and greedy unscrupulous money Moguls with irises writ large with dollar and pound signs. Be a fly on the wall at one of their board meetings and you will need to wear a protective helmet from the dulcet tones of humbug. I remember walking into a school class of 24 Beatle haircuts one week, after the first Beatle’s tour of the USA. Only one student differed. Such could be the power of public notice through the media. Such is the power open to the manipulators of public taste. Don’t we know it.

It is the strangest thing that the audience age range of the 60–90 group, who are by far the richest and the most fiscally stable of all societal groups in the Occident, of all age groups, is the least catered for by the music industry – for their tastes in music. It is they that can most afford to buy the music. The odd radio programme might give in to their behests, once in a while, under some nostalgic format or the other. 40 year old records will be dusted down and played. Is there no entrepreneur with a brain the size of a pea who can see that, in most western countries, the market for music based on the formative years of the over 60’s is nearly 40–50% of population. I had to go to Sri Lanka to find any radio station playing the melodies of yesteryear on a regular basis. The Commercial Service of the Sri Lanka Broadcasting Corporation and GOLD FM – a private commercial station also broadcasting on the island paradise, had the most beautiful formats for melodies of yesteryear I had heard after listening extensively all over the planet.. It was bizarre. A nation so different in its culture, both social and religious, but here, in this island so far away from the English speaking world, day after day, night after night, were played the songs of a bygone era, in the relevant English medium without apology and with grace and enthusiasm, as I say, by several of the main radio broadcasters there. It was bizarre.

So what of the older generation and their scope for enjoying the music they love. There surely is a fortune to be made, especially through the auspices of the internet, where elderly people can buy the songs and singers of yesteryear through the simple press of a few buttons. Admittedly not many older people are computer literate enough to pick out, hear and order music over the internet. I maintain that there are enough out there to bring about a huge revival in the old ways of song, if things are simplified, through commercial products that enable more people with less technical knowledge outlooks to do this simply. The technology will be soon available in every home with a TV set to do this, without resort to the complexities of a computer. Something alas many older people resist. One great thing all this will do is to kill off the record companies and open a world of talent out there directly to the public. You will be able to make your own personal choice of what you want to listen to without being dictated to by someone else’s whims or measures of what you should hear. You will be able to order your favourite songs by title and choose to hear however many artists you want, singing a portion of the song, to enable you to decide which one to buy on a download, or a posted CD. All done from your own home and TV set.

A strange and utterly bizarre situation prevails. No-one seems to want the opportunities and perhaps fortune that awaits anyone with the business erudition to see that there is a market three times the size of the current pop music market for anyone who will record or put out, be it on the internet or elsewhere, newly recorded songs of yesteryear, or indeed new ones, sung as was done in the styles back then, by voices of and musicians of real talent recorded on contemporary recording equipment. The old nostalgic fare laid down decades ago comes set in a gel of old technology and the quality of voice and accompaniment leave much to be desired, when heard on present day audio equipment.
Why then will no one take up the challenge. It seems perhaps an entire generation is programmed. Programmed and formatted in the womb to miss the point. through no fault of their own. Could most leaders of media taste all over the Occidental world have hardened up psycho mentally to and through the concussive and percussive exploding bolts of industrial machine sounds they heard in their mothers’ wombs. It may well prove to be so. They were either conceived too late or conceived in the wrong social situations. Conceived too late to be able to appreciate the full and almost transcendental power and meaning of lyrics, expressed to make an intelligent point in music and song. They were conceived too late or conceived in the wrong social situations. through no fault of their own.

The crucial point is that the power of brain formatting when young enough can lead the way extremely powerfully for future perceptions and actions. Some might call this progress. This power is not usually recognised and much that is good and sociably valuable for the greater good of us all is thus tacitly discarded and thrown away.

Out there, somewhere in the cold metal shelves of song libraries, are still songs on fragile scratched master cutting discs, black discs and clouding silvered CDs, for those among you whose birth logistics and lineages might have had the good fortune to miss situations that are changing humankind into machine minded robots. Your mind sense might have been lucky enough to have retained a stronger sentimental sense of things and thus the music of the past. Songs where lyrics actually meant something. And were not just the meaningless indices accompanying the banal mechanised beats of road drills and steam hammers. More an industrial cacophony suitable for the factory floor as I have said.

Hear them while you still can, these songs of yester-year. Treasure them while you still have a heart-sense to appreciate them. To the religious, a sentimental heart would be a gift you have in the soul. Fewer and fewer radio broadcasts will feature these songs or singers, as things are, till one day the squeaks and grunts of transistors and diodes and the booms and thuds of the rhythms of machine noises maybe the only lullaby a baby will ever hear.

© Nigel Kerner 2010

REFERENCES
1 ‘The Importance of Prenatal Sound and Music’ Whitwell, Giselle E. Rmt Journal of Prenatal & Perinatal Psychology & Health, Vol. 13, No. 3/4, Spring 1999

Source

2012 – And Man Shall Walk as Machine?

Do you think that it is normal, that we blend ourselves with machines? Do we lost the last drop of humanity? I think so…

Image of Man's head covered in electrodes

2012 – And Man Shall Walk as Machine?

Originally published: ufodigest.com, unexplained-mysteries.com
6th February 2011

‘Transhumanism’ is a term that has become a euphemism that has been assimilated into our vocabulary such that it shocks no longer. It would seem perfectly natural that we follow the next ‘evolutionary’ step towards the survival of the fittest and convert ourselves into an information field that never breaks down or decays. No need for physical bodies that break down and die, we can reconstruct our virtual self in electronic form and go on forever. Or can we?

Ray Kurzweil believes the exponential growth of artificial intelligence, biotechnology and nanotechnology means that before 2050 his consciousness and identity – can be copied and uploaded into a non-biological form transcending biology and achieve the dream of immortality.

All this flows from Kurzweil’s Law of Accelerating Returns, a generalization of Moore’s Law, which predicts ongoing exponential growth of key technologies. What this means, Kurzweil writes, is that “…we won’t experience 100 years of progress in the 21st century – it will be more like 20,000 years of progress (at today’s rate).”

A body vastly enhanced through biotech and nanotech may suffice to extend life spans indefinitely, but the ultimate leap is to transcend biology entirely. Before 2050, Kurzweil predicts that AI and nanotech will have advanced so far that his brain, with its memories, capabilities and characteristics, can be reduced to pure information and rebooted in a non-biological format, be it a supercomputer, a real or virtual body, or a swarm of nanobots.

If he’s right, before 2050 all information-based technologies will be millions of times more advanced and AI will far outshine the power of all human brains combined, a development futurists describe as ‘The Singularity.’

There are a surprising number who will see morphing into a non- biologically centred virtual machine as an attractive and even exciting prospect for the future of our species. Many look at it as a palliative for all the ills that plague the human quantum both in terms of a social and a physical perspective. Many people will be familiar with how the elements that contrast man against machine play out.

The arguments settle within the aprons of two broad primary factions. There are those who are able to have a sense of what might lie beyond the scales of the purely physical and empiricist standpoint; people with a religious faith or belief in an eternal tray of continuity. Then there are those who hold a hard wired outlook and only believe in an existential tray that is strictly the manifestation of atoms alone and thus of a Universe of force and parts that decays to a complete negation of all things ending in a nothingness driven by the Second Law of Thermodynamics. The latter is a strictly temporal view that only believes in what is here and affirmable through the physical senses, a view that, finally exposes an end to all reason and meaning and more pertinently, an end to the delineation of the concept of free compunction within an individualization that allows for an assertion of the concept and realization of the Self. Whilst the former, the religious view, all too often points to an anthropomorphic entity as a God who out of his perfection creates us in our imperfection just to watch the fun. If he, she, or it is any God he, she, or it should know the outcome! So how perfect can such a God be?

I have written extensively about a third way, one that unites both factional views and points to the fallacy and terrifying consequences of each taken in isolation.

Let’s first take a deeper look at the kind of ‘Singularity’ Kurzweil outlines as a something that might well point to a kind of Valhalla.
If you trace back the pathway of the explosion into states of greater and greater separation with time, as we can trace what has happened with the Universe, you will inevitably arrive at a point of union, a singularity where there is no separation of points and therefore no time, space or matter, a non-physical quantum field that you might for want of a better word call God. If our consciousness is a manifestation of that quantum field set against what is incidentally opposite to it, then the singularity that Kurzweil is so looking forward to would be a reconstruction of that original natural state in an artificial, virtual format.

But what exactly is that original natural state? There seems to be a power that allows for ordered states to happen incidentally within a disorganizing inertia. This power I believe emanates from an ultimate singularity that is itself manifested through the existence of two absolute Poles. One a pole of ultimate Union and Harmony, the singularity before the Big Bang and the other a Pole of ultimate disunion and disharmony, the point of ultimate chaos, the end point of the second law of thermodynamics or ‘entropy’ that describes the fact that all states decay into greater and greater randomness, chaos, and separation with time. This primary existential backdrop is implicit and implicate. There is no creator God playing dice with his created beings. We are, as a combined manifestation of these primary existential opposed poles, here through our own choice made in the perfect freedom of the state in which all choices are possible. It is this pole of ultimate union that provides for the whole reference against which all partial states can be known. Without that reference these partial states cannot be known. Thus artificial intelligence cannot include self awareness or consciousness. It will always be a sum of parts working together, a working machine, but it will have no reference of the whole picture through which it may know its parts.

The Earth as a planetary concept for instance is claimed to be conscious as the manifestation of the Gaya principle. If consciousness is defined as the ability to have control over one’s environment, to be cognizant enough to break the chain of cause and effect, the Earth cannot be conscious because it cannot intervene in the basic laws of cause and effect of its own volition and intercept them. In the same way no purely atomic construction can break the chain of cause and effect. It is intrinsically part of that chain of action and reaction in an enforced universe. Only that which has no force can break the chain and as force is the product of the separation of points only that which is from state of perfect union has no force.

A wonderful illustration of this principle is the contrast between the Old Testament dictum of ‘an eye for an eye a tooth for a tooth’ and the Christian prophet’s instruction to turn the other cheek. By this simple statement Christ illustrated the nature of consciousness set against that which is not conscious. A computer program or a non living static-dependent object (by that I mean – a robot) can only follow an eye for an eye, action and reaction. A conscious and thus self evaluating being can intercept that chain of events and change it regardless of implied trend. When Jesus said “If a man asks you for his coat give him your cloak also” he was illustrating the same principle. Conscious being can change the course of events, do that little bit more than simply respond to stimuli. In fact it could be said that every positive quality that has a unionizing momentum that might be termed ‘love’ is an expression of consciousness intercepting the entropic chain of cause and logically implied effect.

In his unbridled enthusiasm to recreate his identity does Kurzweil believe that his self awareness will be there to appreciate its own virtual eternity? Will he be there to view and appreciate his virtual self? “In the 2040s,” says Kurzweil, “the non-biological proportions of our beings will be powerful enough to completely model and simulate the biological part. It will be a continuum, a continuity of pattern.” But is self awareness recreated by repeating the pattern of a self aware being? Would you be there to know your own artificial re-creation? Or would it be accurate to say that Kurzweil’s singularity is actually a dead end, nothing but an empty go-nowhere image of the conscious, aware singularity that preceded the Big Bang?

It is almost as though he and those who advocate trans-humanism are re-enacting the age old metaphor in which the character Lucifer, the fallen angel, makes copies of the heavenly hierarchy. Artificial intelligence, cloning, virtual reality would all come under this umbrella. Would you want your children to look forward to a future in which they will be implanted with chips that can increase their intelligence or their musical ability, genetically engineer their offspring to be to follow a desired specification and eventually download their personalities, their likes their dislikes, their whole being into a virtual copy? Would you want to leave your kids the legacy trans-humanism has to offer? If the answer is no and Kurzweil is right in his predictions now is the time to slam on the brakes.

If you suspect that the Grey alien phenomenon is real and have deduced as I have from the evidence thus far that these visitors are the ultimate in artificial intelligence then you might also come to the conclusion that the civilization that produced them never applied the brakes. In them are we looking at our future? Perhaps a more pertinent question would be, are they sponsoring that future?

In the Book of Revelation, Chapter 13 there is a remarkable description of what may well be trans-human future.  HYPERLINK “http://www.kingjamesbibleonline.org/Revelation-13-11/” \o “View more translations of Revelation 13:11″A beast comes up out ‘out of the earth’ that has ‘horns like a lamb’ but speaks ‘as a dragon.’ The implication is of something that is seemingly innocent and harmless but in reality quite different. This beast does ‘great wonders’ and deceives those ‘that dwell on the earth by the means of miracles.’ An entity is described that has a deadly wound but is somehow miraculously brought back to life, an image is then created out of that entity. Could this refer to cloning procedures involving imaging and copying, procedures that might one day be so commonplace that anyone who does not embrace the trans-human ideal that they bring about will be dispensed with, ‘as many as would not worship the image of the beast should be killed?’

Many have speculated that the ‘mark’ of the ‘beast’ that is received ‘in their right hand or in their foreheads’ may well be a form of bio-chip that will be essential for all ‘buying’ and ‘selling.’ Could the ‘beast’ that seems, in the Book of Revelation, to lead the creation of a kind of Sim-card man simply refer to the ultimate irony that trans-humanism makes us like beasts as it takes away from us the very freedom of rationally, based sophisticated choice, the very freedom to beat the chain of cause and effect that marks us out as human when set against the simple reactive mental modes of animals not far removed from the mechanical psycho-expletives one might expect from a robot or machine and its functioning paradigms.

I do not wish to send a chill through the spine of readers but the mere possibility that such as I am outlining might be true exposes a remarkable irony. Could it be that the ultimate in apparent sophistication and human evolutionary potential actually results in the ultimate in human devolutionary potential, the conversion of the human species into a state of an idle and restricted freedom no different in real terms to that of the lowest forms of life.

Even if one does not accept a reality beyond the physical that might be compromised by the abrogation of the human spirit to mechanized external features there is no doubt that trans-humanism mortgages our capabilities as human beings to a prosthetic technology that is quantum steps further than that brought about by the industrial revolution, which arguably made life easier for us through mechanization of basic tasks. Trans-humanism is the mechanization of our intrinsic faculties as human beings to think and know.

I believe this all is a startlingly real and will be a verifiable threat for those who are willing to do the research (with a mind-set that is objective and neutral), into the consequence of the world Kurzweil and his cohorts are laying out for us. The trouble is that many of us find this very hard to do. We slip on with the days own troubles leading us into boxes made by our restrictions and prejudices, the strongest of which are those we hitch up to our eyes. We creep along inexorably with views that blend into a backdrop of ready assembled comfort points. Comfort points designed to provide physical ease and convenience. It is simply the dope of the damned. A matrix we create for ourselves where we weave a spiders web of restrictions all around us. The trouble is we don’t trap any flies. We are the flies. We trap ourselves and our futures.

Will we pay the ultimate price for not being able to see that an eternal scope might exist for each and every one of us in a scale that lies beyond the hems of atoms? Are we going to compromise something as mightily significant as this simply because we in the empirical way cannot measure it, and see, hear, touch, smell or taste it? Man shall surely walk as machine if we do.

© Nigel Kerner 2011

Source